environmental impact assessement and environmental...

Environmental Consultant

(A Govt. of India Enterprise)MECON LIMITED

Project Proponent

Uttam ValueSteels Limited

ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT ASSESSEMENT AND

ENVIRONMENTAL MANAGEMENT PLAN

FOR

EXPANSION OF STEEL PLANT FROM

1.0 MTPA TO 2.0 MTPA

AT

WARDHA, MAHARASHTRA

11.S2.2015.EE2184 March, 2015

EIA REPORT FOR

PROPOSED EXPANSION OF STEEL PLANT FROM 1.0 MTPA TO 2.0 MTPA

0F UTTAM VALUE STEELS LIMITED

1

Declaration by Experts contributing to the EIA/EMP Studies for Expansion of Steel Plant from 1.0 MTPA to 2.0 MTPA at Bhugaon Link Road at Villages Barbadi, Bhugaon & Selukate, Tahasil and District Wardha, Maharashtra

We, hereby certify that we were a part of the EIA/EMP report team in the following capacity that developed the above study. EIA Coordinators: Name: 1. Dr. Vikas Kumar (Overall co-ordination) Signature & Date:

Period of Involvement: March, 2013 till date.

Contact Information: Ph: 9470193780; e-mail: [email protected]

Functional Area Experts Sl.

No.

Functional

Areas Name of Expert

Involvement

(Period & Task)

Signature

& Date

1. AP

C.D. Goswami Apr ’13 – Apr ’13, Air Pollution prevention and control

Dr. VVSN

Pinakapani

March ’13 – Apr ’13, Air Pollution prevention and

control

2. WP Dr. Balbir Singh May ‘13- June ’13, Water Pollution control strategy

Dr. Bipul Kumar May ‘13- June ’13, Water Pollution control strategy

3. SHW

Sanjay Sen Apr ‘13- June ’13, Solid waste disposal strategy

Dr. Bipul Kumar May ‘13- June ’13, Solid waste disposal strategy

Dr. Balbir Singh May ‘13- June ’13, Solid waste disposal strategy

4. RH

Sanjay Sen Risk assessment & management Dr. VVSN

Pinakapani Risk assessment & management

5. SE Dr. S.

Bhattacharya

March ’13 – Apr ’13,

Socio-economic studies.

6. EB & SC Dr. S.K. Singh March ’13 – Apr ’13,

Ecological studies & Soil Conservation.

mailto:[email protected]

EIA REPORT FOR



2

Sl.

No.

Functional

Areas Name of Expert

Involvement

(Period & Task)

Signature

& Date

7. HG Dr. S.

Veezhinathan

Apr ‘13- June ’13,

Hydro-geological studies.

8. GS A.K. Mishra Apr ‘13- June ’13,

Geological studies.

9. AQ Dr. V.V.S.N.

Pinakapani

May ‘13- June ’13,

Meteorological and Air Pollution Dispersion studies.

10. NV

C.D. Goswami Apr ‘13- June ’13,

Machine noise & vibration control strategy.

Dr. Vikas Kumar Apr ‘13- June ’13,

noise propagation and control strategy.

11. LU

Dr. M. K.

Mukhopadhyay Apr ‘13- June ’13, Land use study.

Vishal Skaria Apr ‘13- June ’13, Land use study.

Declaration by the Head of the Accredited Consultant Organization

I, C.D.Goswami , hereby confirm that the above mentioned experts prepared the EIA/EMP Studies for Expansion of Steel Plant from 1.0 MTPA to 2.0 MTPA at Bhugaon Link Road at Villages Barbadi, Bhugaon & Selukate, Tahasil and District Wardha, Maharashtra. I also confirm that I shall be fully accountable for any misleading information mentioned in this statement.

Signature: Name: C.D. Goswami Designation: Joint General Manager, Environmental Engineering Section Name of the EIA Consultant Organization: MECON Limited

EIA REPORT FOR



(i)

CONTENTS

Sl. No.

Description Page No.

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12.

INTRODUCTION PROJECT DESCRIPTION DESCRIPTION OF THE ENVIRONMENT ANTICIPATED ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACTS & MITIGATION MEASURES ENVIRONMENTAL MONITORING PROGRAMME ADDITIONAL STUDIES PROJECT BENEFITS ENVIRONMENTAL MANAGEMENT PLAN : ADMINISTRATIVE ASPECTS SUMMARY & CONCLUSION DISCLOSURE OF CONSULTANT ENGAGED QUESTIONNAIRE FOR ENVIRONMENTAL APPRAISAL COMMENTS OF THE PROJECT PROPONENT ON THE VARIOUS CONCERNS RAISED IN THE PUBLIC CONSULTATION

1 – 1 to 1 – 12

2 – 1 to 2 – 39

3 – 1 to 3 – 111

4 – 1 to 4– 64

5 – 1 to 5 – 13

6 – 1 to 6 – 62

7 – 1 to 7– 2

8 – 1 to 8 – 7

9 – 1

10 – 1 to 10-8

11-1 to 11-32

12-1 to 12-65

EIA REPORT FOR



(ii)

LIST OF FIGURES Fig. No. Description Chapter No. 2.1 2.2 2.3 3.1 4.1 4.2 4.3 4.4 4.5 6.1 6.2 8.1

LOCATION MAP OF SITE MATERIAL FLOW CHART OF EXPANSION PROJECT WATER BALANCE OF EXPANSION PROJECT WIND-ROSE AT WARDHA DURING SUMMER - DAY & NIGHT(OVERALL) ISOPLETHS FOR SPM CONCENTRATION DUE TO PROPOSED EXPANSION PROJECT ISOPLETHS FOR SO2 CONCENTRATION DUE TO PROPOSED EXPANSION PROJECT ISOPLETHS FOR NOx CONCENTRATION DUE TO PROPOSED EXPANSION PROJECT ISOPLETHS FOR FUGITIVE EMISSION CONCENTRATION DUE TO PROPOSED EXPANSION PROJECT STEPS FOR ASSESSMENT OF SIGNIFICANCE OF ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACTS FLOOD HAZARD MAP OF INDIA SEISMIC MAP OF INDIA ORGANISATION CHART (PROPOSED) OF ENVIRONMENT MANAGEMENT DEPARTMENT

2 2 2 3 4 4 4 4 4 6 6 8

EIA REPORT FOR



(iii)

LIST OF DRAWINGS

Sl. No

Description Drawing No.

1. 2. 3. 3. 4.

GENERAL LAYOUT OF PLANT MATERIAL BALANCE OF PLANT WATER BALANCE OF PLANT PHYSIOGRAPHY OF STUDY AREA LAND USE OF STUDY AREA

MEC/ 01/02-03/Q763/Layout/001 R1

MEC/ 01/02-03/Q763/MFS/001 R0

MEC/ 01/40/A4/Q71P/WBD/001 R1

MEC/ Q725/11/S2/01

MEC/ Q725/11/S2/02

EIA REPORT FOR



(iv)

INDEX TO MOE&F TOR COVERAGE IN THE EIA REPORT

SN. TOR POINTS GIVEN BY MOE&F COVERAGE IN EIA

REPORT REMARKS

1. Executive summary of the project Ex. Summary ES1- ES15 Submitted separately

2. Iron ore/Coal linkage documents Not applicable 3. Photographs of the existing and

proposed plant area Refer Chapter-1 , page 1-10 to 1-12

4. Compliance to the conditions stipulated in the Environmental Clearance / NOC granted by the SPCB.

We undertake to comply with all the conditions of EC and consent to establish given by MPCB. Refer Chapter-3 , page 3-62 to 3-101

5. A certified copy of the report of the status of compliance of the conditions stipulated in the environmental clearance and Consent to Operate for the ongoing I existing operation of the project by the Regional Office of the Ministry of Environment and Forests and SPCB.

Refer Chapter-3 , page 3-62 to 3-101

6. Recent monitoring report from SPCB, which shall include data on AAQ, water quality, solid waste etc. shall be submitted.

Refer Chapter-3 , page 3-45 to 3-51

7. Has the unit received any notice under the Section 5 of Environment (Protection) Act, 1986 or relevant Sections of Air and Water Acts? If so, compliance to the notice(s)

Yes, Refer Chapter-3 , page 3-94 to 3-101

8. A line diagram/flow sheet for the process and EMP

Refer Chapter 2,page 2-35 Drawing No.

MEC/01/02-03/Q763 /MFS/001, R0

9. The earlier questionnaire for industry sector should be submitted while submitting EIA/EMP.

Refer Chapter 11,page 11-1 to 11-32

10. A site location map on Indian map of 1:10,00,000 scale followed by

Refer Chapter 3, Drawing no. MEC/Q725/11/S2/01

EIA REPORT FOR



(v)

SN. TOR POINTS GIVEN BY MOE&F COVERAGE IN EIA REPORT

REMARKS

1:50,000/1:25,000 scale on an A3/A2 sheet with at least next 10 Kms of terrains i.e. circle of 10 kms and further 10 kms on A3/A2 sheets with proper longitude/latitude/heights with min. 100/200 m. contours should be included. 3-D view i.e. DEM (Digital Elevation Model) for the area in 10 km radius from the proposal site. A photograph of the site should also be included.

11. Present land use should be prepared based on satellite imagery. High-resolution satellite image data having 1m-5m spatial resolution like quickbird, Ikonos, IRS P-6 pan sharpened etc. for the 10 Km radius area from proposed site. The same should be used for land used/land-cover mapping of the area.

Refer Chapter 3, Drawing no. MEC/Q725/11/S2/02

12. Topography of the area should be given clearly indicating whether the site requires any filling. If so, details of filling, quantity of fill material required, its source, transportation etc. should be given.

Flat area. No filling required.

13. Location of national parks/wildlife sanctuary/reserve forests within 10 km. radius should specifically be mentioned. A map showing land use/land cover, reserved forests, wildlife sanctuaries, national parks, tiger reserve etc in 10 km of the project site.

No national parks / wildlife sanctuary within 10 km radius Refer Drawing no. MEC/Q725/11/S2/02 for land use

14. Project site layout plan to scale using AutoCAD showing raw materials, fly ash and other storage plans, bore well or water storage, aquifers (within 1 km.) dumping, waste disposal, green areas, water bodies, rivers/drainage passing through the project site should be included.

Refer Drawing No. MEC/01/02-03/Q763/Layout/001 annexed with the report for layout

15. Coordinates of the plant site as well as ash pond with topo sheet should

Refer Chapter 1 ,clause 1.2.5, page 1-9

EIA REPORT FOR



(vi)


REMARKS

also be included. 16. Details and classification of total land

(identified and acquired) should be included.

The proposed expansion is within the existing plant premises and no additional land is required.

17. Rehabilitation & Resettlement (R & R) should be as per policy of the State Govt. and a detailed action plan should be included.

No R&R issues involved. The proposed expansion is within the existing plant premises and no additional land is required.

18. Permission from the tribal’s, if tribal land has also to be acquired along with details of the compensation plan.

No tribal land

19. Permission and approval for the use of forest land, if any, and recommendations of the State Forest Department. .

No forest land is involved

20. A list of industries containing name and type in 25 km radius should be incorporated.

Refer Chapter 3, clause 3.1.5, page 3-3

21. Residential colony should be located in upwind direction.

Will be located in up wind direction

22. List of raw material required, analysis of all the raw materials and source along with mode of transportation should be included. All the trucks for raw material and finished product transportation must be “Environmentally Compliant”.


23. Petrological and Chemical analysis and other chemical properties of raw materials used (with GPS location of source of raw material) i.e. ores, minerals, rock, soil, coal, iron, dolomite quartz etc. using high definition and precision instruments mentioning their detection range and methodology such Digital Analyzers, AAS with Graphite furnace, ICPMS, MICRO-WDXRF, EPMA, XRD, Nano studies or at least as per I30-10500 and WHO norms. These analysis should include trace element and metal studies like Cr (vi) Ni, Fe, As,

Refer Chapter 3, page 3-49 to 3-50

EIA REPORT FOR



(vii)


REMARKS

Pb, Zn, Hg, Se, S etc. Presence of radioactive elements (U, Th etc.), if applicable, should also be included.

24. Petrography, grain size analysis and Major element analysis of raw material and soil from project site and raw material should be done on the same parameters along with analysis for SiO2, Al2O3, MgO, MnO, K2O, CaO, FeO, Fe2O3, P2O5, H2O, CO2.


25. If the rocks, ores, raw material has trace elements their petrography, ore microscopy, XRD, elemental mapping EPMA, XRF is required to quantify the amount present in it and hence future risk involved while using it and management plan.


26. Action plan for excavation and muck disposal during construction phase.

Refer Chapter 4, clause 4.1.3, page 4-2 to 4-3

27. Studies for fly ash, muck, slurry, sludge material disposal and solid waste generated, if the raw materials used has trace elements and a management plan should also be included.

Trace elements present in raw materials are minimal.

28. Manufacturing process details for all the plants should be included.

Refer Chapter 2, clause 2.7, page 2-3 to 2-5

29. Mass balance for the raw material and products should be included.

Refer Chapter 2, page 2-35, Drawing No. MEC/01/02-03/Q763 /MFS/001, R0

30. Energy balance data for all the components of steel plant including proposed power plant should be incorporated.

Refer Chapter 2 , page 2-37

31. Site-specific micro-meteorological data using temperature, relative humidity, hourly wind speed and direction and rainfall should be collected.

Refer Chapter 3 , clause 3.2.1, page 3-7 to 3-9

32. Data generated in the last three years i.e. air, water, raw material properties and analysis (major, trace


EIA REPORT FOR



(viii)


REMARKS

and heavy metals), ground water table, seismic history, flood hazard history etc.

33. One season site-specific micro-meteorological data using temperature, relative humidity, hourly wind speed and direction and rainfall and AAQ data (except monsoon) should be collected. The monitoring stations should take into account the pre-dominant wind direction, population zone and sensitive receptors including reserved forests.

Refer Chapter 3

34. Ambient air quality at 8 locations within the study area of 10 km., aerial coverage from project site with one AAQMS in downwind direction should be carried out.

Refer Chapter 3, clause 3.2.2, page 3-10 to 3-13 AAQ values are annexed at the end of chapter-3.

35. The suspended particulate matter present in the ambient air must be analyzed for the presence of poly-aromatic hydrocarbons (PAH), i.e. Benzene soluble fraction. Chemical characterization of RSPM and incorporating of RSPM data.

Refer Chapter 3, page 3-13

36. Determination of atmospheric inversion level at the project site and assessment of ground level concentration of pollutants from the stack emission based on site-specific meteorological features.


37. Air quality modelling for steel plant for specific pollutants needs to be done. APCS for the control of emissions from the kiln and WHRB should also be included to control emissions within 50 mg/Nm3.


38. Action plan to follow National Ambient Air Quality Emission Standards issued by the Ministry vide G.S.R. No. 826(E) dated 16th November, 2009 should be included.

National Ambient Air Quality Emission Standards followed

39. Ambient air quality monitoring modelling along with cumulative

Refer Chapter 4, clause 4.1.4.2.1, page 4- 7 to 4-

EIA REPORT FOR



(ix)


REMARKS

impact should be included for the day (24 hrs) for maximum GLC along with following :

16 . Model values are annexed at the end of chapter

i) Emissions (g/second) with and without the air pollution control measures

-do-

ii) Meteorological inputs (wind speed, m/s), wind direction, ambient air temperature, cloud cover, relative humidity & mixing height) on hourly basis

-do- SODAR – Refer Chapter 3, clause 3.2.12, page 3-54 to 3-60

iii) Model input options for terrain, plume rise, deposition etc.

-do-

iv) Print-out of model input and output on hourly and daily average basis

-do-

v) A graph of daily averaged concentration (MGLC scenario) with downwind distance at every 500 m interval covering the exact location of GLC.

-do-

vi) Details of air pollution control methods used with percentage efficiency that are used for emission rate estimation with respect to each pollutant

-do-

vii) Applicable air quality standards as per LULC covered in the study area and % contribution of the proposed plant to the applicable Air quality standard. In case of expansion project, the contribution should be inclusive of both existing and expanded capacity.

-do-

viii) No. I-VII are to be repeated for fugitive emissions and any other source type relevant and used for industry

-do-

ix) Graphs of monthly average daily concentration with down-wind distance

-do-

x) Specify when and where the ambient air quality standards are

-do-

EIA REPORT FOR



(x)


REMARKS

exceeded either due to the proposed plant alone or when the plant contribution is added to the background air quality.

xi) Fugitive dust protection or dust reduction technology for workers within 30 m of the plant active areas.

-do-

40. A plan for the utilization of waste/fuel gases in the WHRB for generating power have to be set out.

Not Applicable

41. Impact of the transport of the raw materials and end products on the surrounding environment should be assessed and provided. The alternate method of raw material and end product transportation should also be studied and details included.

Refer Chapter 4, clause 4.1.4.3, page 4-16 to 4-17

42. One season data for gaseous emissions other than monsoon season is necessary.


43. An action plan to control and monitor secondary fugitive emissions from all the sources as per the latest permissible limits issued by the Ministry vide G.S.R. 414(E) dated 30th May, 2008.


44. Presence of aquifer(s) within 1 km of the project boundaries and management plan for recharging the aquifer should be included.


45. Source of surface/ground water level, site (GPS), cation, anion (Ion Chromatograph), metal trace element (as above) chemical analysis for water to be used. If surface water is used from river, rainfall, discharge rate, quantity, drainage and distance from project site should also be included. Information regarding surface hydrology and water regime should be included.


46. Ground water analysis with bore well data, litho-logs, drawdown and


EIA REPORT FOR



(xi)


REMARKS

recovery tests to quantify the area and volume of aquifer and its management.

47. Ground water modelling showing the pathways of the pollutants should be included


48. Column leachate study for all types of stockpiles or waste disposal sites at 20oC-50oC should be conducted and included.

TCLP result of EAF slag is given in Chapter 3, page 3-45 to 3-47

49. Action plan for rainwater harvesting measures at plant site should be submitted to harvest rainwater from the roof tops and storm water drains to recharge the ground water and also to use for the various activities at the project site to conserve fresh water and reduce the water requirement from other sources. Rain water harvesting and groundwater recharge structures may also be constructed outside the plant premises in consultation with local Gram Panchayat and Village Heads to augment the ground water level. Incorporation of water harvesting plan for the project is necessary, if source of water is bore well.


50. Permission for the drawl of water from the State Irrigation Department or concerned authority and water balance data including quantity of effluent generated, recycled and reused and discharged is to be provided. Methods adopted/to be adopted for the water conservation should be included.

Refer Chapter 2, Clause 2.10, page 2-29 to 2-30 Water drawal permission, page 2-38 Water balance page 2-36

51. A note on the impact of drawl of water on the nearby River during lean season.

There will not be any impact in lean season since water is drawn from the Dham river which has sufficient reserve of water throughout the year.

EIA REPORT FOR



(xii)


REMARKS

52. Surface water quality of nearby River (60 m upstream and downstream) and other surface drains at eight locations must be ascertained.

10 days water storage has been envisaged Refer Chapter 3, clause 3.2.4, page 3-26 to 3-32

53. If the site is within 10 km radius of any major river, Flood Hazard Zonation Mapping is required at 1:5000 to 1:10,000 scale indicating the peak and lean River discharge as well as flood occurrence frequency.

Flood Hazard map is enclosed in Chapter 6.

54. A note on treatment of wastewater from different plants, recycle and reuse for different purposes should be included.


55. Provision of traps and treatment plants are to be made, if water is getting mixed with oil, grease and cleaning agents.

- Settling tank provided

56. If the water is mixed with solid particulates, proposal for sediment pond before further transport should be included. The sediment pond capacity should be 100 times the transport capacity.

- Not applicable

57. Wastewater characteristics (heavy metals, anions and cations, trace metals, PAH) from any other source should be included.


58. The pathways for pollution via seepages, evaporation, residual remains are to be studied for surface water (drainage, rivers, ponds, and lakes), sub-surface and ground water with a monitoring and management plans.


59. Ground water monitoring minimum at 8 locations and near solid waste dump zone, Geological features and Geo-hydrological status of the study area are essential as also. Ecological status (Terrestrial and Aquatic) is vital.


60. Action plan for solid/hazardous waste Refer Chapter 4, clause

EIA REPORT FOR



(xiii)


REMARKS

generation, storage, utilization and disposal particularly slag from all the sources, char and fly ash. Copies of MOU regarding utilization of ash should also be included.

4.1.4.5& clause 4.1.4.6, page 4-21 to 4-23

61. Details of evacuation of ash, details regarding ash pond impermeability and whether it would be lined, if so details of the lining etc. need to be addressed.

No generation of Fly ash in our process. Hence ash pond is not required.

62. A note on the treatment, storage and disposal of all type of slag should be included. Identification and details of land to be used for SMS slag disposal should be included. Details of secured land fill as per CPCB guidelines should also be included.


63. End use of solid waste and its composition should be covered. Toxic metal content in the waste material and its composition should also be incorporated particularly of slag.

There will not be any toxic material in the solid waste including slag

64. All stock piles will have to be on top of a stable liner to avoid leaching of materials to ground water.

- Stable layer will be provided

65. Action plan for the green belt development plan in 33 % area i.e. land with not less than 1,500 trees per ha. Giving details of species, width of plantation, planning schedule etc. should be included. The green belt should be around the project boundary and a scheme for greening of the travelling roads should also be incorporated. All rooftops/terraces should have some green cover.


66. Detailed description of the flora and fauna (terrestrial and aquatic) should be given with special reference to rare, endemic and endangered species.


67. Disaster Management Plan including risk assessment and damage control

DMP- Refer Chapter 6, clause 6.2.8, page 6-34 to

EIA REPORT FOR



(xiv)


REMARKS

needs to be addressed and included. 6-46 Risk - Refer Chapter 6, clause 6.2, page 6-2 to 6-33

68. Occupational health: Refer Chapter 3, clause 3.2.11, page 3-51 to 3-52

a) Details of existing Occupational & Safety Hazards. What are the exposure levels of above mentioned hazards and whether they are within Permissible Exposure level (PEL). If these are not within PEL, what measures the company has adopted to keep them within PEL so that health of the workers can be preserved,

-do-

b) Details of exposure specific health status evaluation of worker. If the workers’ health is being evaluated by pre designed format, chest x rays, Audiometry, Spirometry, Vision testing (Far & Near vision, colour vision and any other ocular defect) ECG, during pre placement and periodical examinations give the details of the same. Details regarding last month analyzed data of abovementioned parameters as per age, sex, duration of exposure and department wise.

-do-

c) Annual report of heath status of workers with special reference to Occupational Health and Safety.

-do-

d) Action plan for the implementation of OHS standards as per OSHAS/USEPA.

-do-

e) Plan and fund allocation to ensure the occupational health & safety of all contract and sub-contract workers.

-do-

69. Corporate Environment Policy Refer Chapter 4, page 4-55

EIA REPORT FOR



(xv)


REMARKS

i) Does the company have a well laid down Environment Policy approved by its Board of Directors? If so, it may be detailed in the EIA report.

Yes

ii) Does the Environment Policy prescribe for standard operating process / procedures to bring into focus any infringement / deviation / violation of the environmental or forest norms / conditions? If so, it may be detailed in the EIA.

Yes

iii) What is the hierarchical system or Administrative order of the company to deal with the environmental issues and for ensuring compliance with the environmental clearance conditions? Details of this system may be given.

Refer Chapter 8, clause 8.3, page 8-2

iv) Does the company have system of reporting of non compliances / violations of environmental norms to the Board of Directors of the company and / or shareholders or stakeholders at large? This reporting mechanism should be detailed in the EIA report.

Refer Chapter 8, clause 8.3, page 8-2

70. Details regarding infrastructure facilities such as sanitation, fuel, restroom etc. to be provided to the labour force during construction as well as to the casual workers including truck drivers during operation phase.

Refer Chapter 4, clause 4.1.3.1, page 4-3

71. Impact of the project on local infrastructure of the area such as road network and whether any additional infrastructure needs to be constructed and the agency responsible for the same with time frame.

Details will be provided after commissioning of the plant

72. Environment Management Plan (EMP) to mitigate the adverse

Refer Chapter 5 of EIA report

EIA REPORT FOR



(xvi)


REMARKS

impacts due to the project along with item wise cost of its implementation. Total capital cost and recurring cost/annum for environmental pollution control measures should be included.

73. Plan for the implementation of the recommendations made for the steel plants in the CREP guidelines must be prepared.

Refer Chapter 4, clause 4.1.4.10, page 4-27

74. At least 5 % of the total cost of the project should be earmarked towards the Enterprise Social Commitment based on public hearing issues and item-wise details along with time bound action plan should be included. Socio-economic development activities need to be elaborated upon.


75. Public hearing issues raised and commitments made by the project proponent on the same should be included separately in EIA/EMP Report in the form of tabular chart.

- Will be provided after public hearing

76. A note on identification and implementation of Carbon Credit project should be included.

No Carbon credit project

77. Any litigation pending against the project and/or any direction/order passed by any Court of Law against the project, if so, details thereof should also be included.


EIA REPORT FOR



(xvii)

LIST OF ABBREVIATIONS, SYMBOLS AND UNITS

Abbreviation / Symbol / Unit Full Form

µg/m3 Micrograms per Cubic Meter AAQ Ambient Air Quality

ac Acre AGM Asst. General Manager BDL Below Detection Limit

BF Blast Furnace BOD Biochemical Oxygen Demand

BOD Plant Biological Oxidation & De-Phenolization Plant BOF Basic Oxygen Furnace CDI Coal Dust injection

MPCB Maharashtra Pollution Control Board CO gas Coke Oven gas

CPCB Central Pollution Control Board CREP Charter on Corporate responsibility for

Environmental Protection

D/s Downstream dB(A) Decibels DGM Deputy General Manager

Drg Drawing EC Electrical Conductivity

ED Executive Director EIA Environmental Impact Assessment EMP Environmental Management Plan

EMD Environment Management Department ESP Electro static precipitator

Fig Figure g/m2/d Grams per Square meter Per Day

g/s Grams per Second GCA Gross Cropped Area GCP Gas Cleaning plant

GHG Green house gas

EIA REPORT FOR



(xviii)


GLC Ground Level Concentration GM General Manager ha Hectare

HPLA High Pressure liquor aspiration HR Coil Hot rolled Coil

HVAS High Volume Air Sampler IMD India Meteorological Department Kcal/Nm3 Kilo calorie per normal meter cube

Kg/thm Kilogram per tones of hot metal km Kilometer

km/hr Kilometer per Hour km2 Square Kilometer

l liter Leq Log Equivalent

LF Ladle Furnace

LPG Liquefied Petroleum gas m Meter

m/s Meters per Second m2 Square Meter m2/s Square Meters per Second

m3 Cubic Meters m3/d Cubic Meters per day

m3/h Cubic Meters per hour mc Machine MEC/MECON MECON Ltd

meq/gm Mille Equivalents per Gram mg/l Milligrams Per Liter

mg/Nm3 Milligrams per normal meter cube mm Millimeter Mm3 Million Cubic Meters

MoEF Ministry of Environment and Forests, Govt. Of India MPN Most Probable Number

EIA REPORT FOR



(xix)


MT Million Tonnes MTPA Million Tonnes per Annum MWe Mega Watt Electricity

NAAQS National Ambient Air Quality Standards Nm3 normal meter cube

NOx Oxides of Nitrogen NTU Nephelometric Turbidity Units Pb Lead

PF Protected Forest PP Power plant

QOL Quality of Life qtl/ac Quintal per acre

R & D Research and Development R & R Rehabilitation and Resettlement RDS Respirable Dust Sampler

RF Reserved Forest RMP Refractory Material Plant

RPM Respirable Particulate Matter SMS Steel Melting Shop SO2 Sulphur Dioxide

SPM Suspended Particulate Matter Sq Square

t tonnes t/m2/h Tones per meter square per hour TCS Tonnes of Crude Steel

tpd Tonnes Per Day U/s Upstream

VD Vacuum Degasser

EIA REPORT FOR



© 2015 MECON Limited. All rights reserved 1- 1

1.0 INTRODUCTION

Uttam Value Steels Limited (UVSL) intends to enhance the steel manufacturing capacity from 1.0 MTPA to 2.0 MTPA at Village Barbadi, Bhugaon and Selukata, Bhugaon Link Road, District Wardha, Maharashtra and produce Hot rolled coils/sheet/plates, Long products (Bar & Rods), Cold Rolled coils & sheets and Galvanized coils & sheets, Colour Coating Product and Pipes to meet the requirements of the customers. The expansion facilities will be built within the existing facilities.

UGML has submitted Form-I on 8th October, 2012 to The Ministry of Environment, Forest and Climate Change for prescribing Terms of Reference (TOR) for expansion of Steel Plant from 1.0 MTPA to 2.0 MTPA within the existing plant premises at the above mentioned location at Wardha, Maharashtra. The following TOR has been finalised during the 8th Reconstituted Expert Appraisal Committee (Industry) of Ministry of Environment & Forest held on 16th to 17th May, 2013 for preparation of EIA/EMP report for the expansion project. 1. Executive summary of the project 2. Iron ore/Coal linkage documents 3. Photographs of the existing and proposed plant area 4. Compliance to the conditions stipulated in the Environmental Clearance / NOC

granted by the SPCB. 5. A certified copy of the report of the status of compliance of the conditions

stipulated in the environmental clearance and Consent to Operate for the ongoing I existing operation of the project by the Regional Office of the Ministry of Environment and Forests and SPCB.

6. Recent monitoring report from SPCB, which shall include data on AAQ, water quality, solid waste etc. shall be submitted.

7. Has the unit received any notice under the Section 5 of Environment (Protection) Act, 1986 or relevant Sections of Air and Water Acts? If so, compliance to the notice(s)

8. A line diagram/flow sheet for the process and EMP 9. The earlier questionnaire for industry sector should be submitted while submitting

EIA/EMP. 10. A site location map on Indian map of 1:10,00,000 scale followed by

1:50,000/1:25,000 scale on an A3/A2 sheet with at least next 10 Kms of terrains i.e. circle of 10 kms and further 10 kms on A3/A2 sheets with proper longitude/latitude/heights with min. 100/200 m. contours should be included. 3-D view i.e. DEM (Digital Elevation Model) for the area in 10 km radius from the proposal site. A photograph of the site should also be included.

11. Present land use should be prepared based on satellite imagery. High-resolution satellite image data having 1m-5m spatial resolution like quickbird, Ikonos, IRS P-6 pan sharpened etc. for the 10 Km radius area from proposed site. The same should be used for land used/land-cover mapping of the area.

12. Topography of the area should be given clearly indicating whether the site requires any filling. If so, details of filling, quantity of fill material required, its

EIA REPORT FOR




source, transportation etc. should be given. 13. Location of national parks/wildlife sanctuary/reserve forests within 10 km. radius

should specifically be mentioned. A map showing land use/land cover, reserved forests, wildlife sanctuaries, national parks, tiger reserve etc in 10 km of the project site.

14. Project site layout plan to scale using AutoCAD showing raw materials, fly ash and other storage plans, bore well or water storage, aquifers (within 1 km.) dumping, waste disposal, green areas, water bodies, rivers/drainage passing through the project site should be included.

15. Coordinates of the plant site as well as ash pond with topo sheet should also be included.

16. Details and classification of total land (identified and acquired) should be included.

17. Rehabilitation & Resettlement (R & R) should be as per policy of the State Govt. and a detailed action plan should be included.

18. Permission from the tribal’s, if tribal land has also to be acquired along with details of the compensation plan.

19. Permission and approval for the use of forest land, if any, and recommendations of the State Forest Department. .

20. A list of industries containing name and type in 25 km radius should be incorporated.

21. Residential colony should be located in upwind direction. 22. List of raw material required, analysis of all the raw materials and source along

with mode of transportation should be included. All the trucks for raw material and finished product transportation must be “Environmentally Compliant”.

23. Petrological and Chemical analysis and other chemical properties of raw materials used (with GPS location of source of raw material) i.e. ores, minerals, rock, soil, coal, iron, dolomite quartz etc. using high definition and precision instruments mentioning their detection range and methodology such Digital Analyzers, AAS with Graphite furnace, ICPMS, MICRO-WDXRF, EPMA, XRD, Nano studies or at least as per I30-10500 and WHO norms. These analysis should include trace element and metal studies like Cr (vi) Ni, Fe, As, Pb, Zn, Hg, Se, S etc. Presence of radioactive elements (U, Th etc.), if applicable, should also be included.

24. Petrography, grain size analysis and Major element analysis of raw material and soil from project site and raw material should be done on the same parameters along with analysis for SiO2, Al2O3, MgO, MnO, K2O, CaO, FeO, Fe2O3, P2O5, H2O, CO2.

25. If the rocks, ores, raw material has trace elements their petrography, ore microscopy, XRD, elemental mapping EPMA, XRF is required to quantify the amount present in it and hence future risk involved while using it and management plan.

26. Action plan for excavation and muck disposal during construction phase. 27. Studies for fly ash, muck, slurry, sludge material disposal and solid waste

generated, if the raw materials used has trace elements and a management plan should also be included.

EIA REPORT FOR




28. Manufacturing process details for all the plants should be included. 29. Mass balance for the raw material and products should be included. 30. Energy balance data for all the components of steel plant including proposed

power plant should be incorporated. 31. Site-specific micro-meteorological data using temperature, relative humidity,

hourly wind speed and direction and rainfall should be collected. 32. Data generated in the last three years i.e. air, water, raw material properties and

analysis (major, trace and heavy metals), ground water table, seismic history, flood hazard history etc.

33. One season site-specific micro-meteorological data using temperature, relative humidity, hourly wind speed and direction and rainfall and AAQ data (except monsoon) should be collected. The monitoring stations should take into account the pre-dominant wind direction, population zone and sensitive receptors including reserved forests.

34. Ambient air quality at 8 locations within the study area of 10 km., aerial coverage from project site with one AAQMS in downwind direction should be carried out.

35. The suspended particulate matter present in the ambient air must be analyzed for the presence of poly-aromatic hydrocarbons (PAH), i.e. Benzene soluble fraction. Chemical characterization of RSPM and incorporating of RSPM data.

36. Determination of atmospheric inversion level at the project site and assessment of ground level concentration of pollutants from the stack emission based on site-specific meteorological features.

37. Air quality modelling for steel plant for specific pollutants needs to be done. APCS for the control of emissions from the kiln and WHRB should also be included to control emissions within 50 mg/Nm3.

38. Action plan to follow National Ambient Air Quality Emission Standards issued by the Ministry vide G.S.R. No. 826(E) dated 16th November, 2009 should be included.

39. Ambient air quality monitoring modelling along with cumulative impact should be included for the day (24 hrs) for maximum GLC along with following :

i) Emissions (g/second) with and without the air pollution control measures ii) Meteorological inputs (wind speed, m/s), wind direction, ambient air

temperature, cloud cover, relative humidity & mixing height) on hourly basis

iii) Model input options for terrain, plume rise, deposition etc. iv) Print-out of model input and output on hourly and daily average basis v) A graph of daily averaged concentration (MGLC scenario) with downwind

distance at every 500 m interval covering the exact location of GLC. vi) Details of air pollution control methods used with percentage efficiency

that are used for emission rate estimation with respect to each pollutant vii) Applicable air quality standards as per LULC covered in the study area

and % contribution of the proposed plant to the applicable Air quality standard. In case of expansion project, the contribution should be inclusive of both existing and expanded capacity.

viii) No. I-VII are to be repeated for fugitive emissions and any other source

EIA REPORT FOR




type relevant and used for industry ix) Graphs of monthly average daily concentration with down-wind distance x) Specify when and where the ambient air quality standards are exceeded

either due to the proposed plant alone or when the plant contribution is added to the background air quality.

xi) Fugitive dust protection or dust reduction technology for workers within 30 m of the plant active areas.

40. A plan for the utilization of waste/fuel gases in the WHRB for generating power

have to be set out. 41. Impact of the transport of the raw materials and end products on the surrounding

environment should be assessed and provided. The alternate method of raw material and end product transportation should also be studied and details included.

42. One season data for gaseous emissions other than monsoon season is necessary.

43. An action plan to control and monitor secondary fugitive emissions from all the sources as per the latest permissible limits issued by the Ministry vide G.S.R. 414(E) dated 30th May, 2008.

44. Presence of aquifer(s) within 1 km of the project boundaries and management plan for recharging the aquifer should be included.

45. Source of surface/ground water level, site (GPS), cation, anion (Ion Chromatograph), metal trace element (as above) chemical analysis for water to be used. If surface water is used from river, rainfall, discharge rate, quantity, drainage and distance from project site should also be included. Information regarding surface hydrology and water regime should be included.

46. Ground water analysis with bore well data, litho-logs, drawdown and recovery tests to quantify the area and volume of aquifer and its management.

47. Ground water modelling showing the pathways of the pollutants should be included

48. Column leachate study for all types of stockpiles or waste disposal sites at 20oC-50oC should be conducted and included.

49. Action plan for rainwater harvesting measures at plant site should be submitted to harvest rainwater from the roof tops and storm water drains to recharge the ground water and also to use for the various activities at the project site to conserve fresh water and reduce the water requirement from other sources. Rain water harvesting and groundwater recharge structures may also be constructed outside the plant premises in consultation with local Gram Panchayat and Village Heads to augment the ground water level. Incorporation of water harvesting plan for the project is necessary, if source of water is bore well.

50. Permission for the drawl of water from the State Irrigation Department or concerned authority and water balance data including quantity of effluent generated, recycled and reused and discharged is to be provided. Methods adopted/to be adopted for the water conservation should be included.

51. A note on the impact of drawl of water on the nearby River during lean season. 52. Surface water quality of nearby River (60 m upstream and downstream) and

EIA REPORT FOR




other surface drains at eight locations must be ascertained. 53. If the site is within 10 km radius of any major river, Flood Hazard Zonation

Mapping is required at 1:5000 to 1:10,000 scale indicating the peak and lean River discharge as well as flood occurrence frequency.

54. A note on treatment of wastewater from different plants, recycle and reuse for different purposes should be included.

55. Provision of traps and treatment plants are to be made, if water is getting mixed with oil, grease and cleaning agents.

56. If the water is mixed with solid particulates, proposal for sediment pond before further transport should be included. The sediment pond capacity should be 100 times the transport capacity.

57. Wastewater characteristics (heavy metals, anions and cations, trace metals, PAH) from any other source should be included.

58. The pathways for pollution via seepages, evaporation, residual remains are to be studied for surface water (drainage, rivers, ponds, and lakes), sub-surface and ground water with a monitoring and management plans.

59. Ground water monitoring minimum at 8 locations and near solid waste dump zone, Geological features and Geo-hydrological status of the study area are essential as also. Ecological status (Terrestrial and Aquatic) is vital.

60. Action plan for solid/hazardous waste generation, storage, utilization and disposal particularly slag from all the sources, char and fly ash. Copies of MOU regarding utilization of ash should also be included.

61. Details of evacuation of ash, details regarding ash pond impermeability and whether it would be lined, if so details of the lining etc. need to be addressed.

62. A note on the treatment, storage and disposal of all type of slag should be included. Identification and details of land to be used for SMS slag disposal should be included. Details of secured land fill as per CPCB guidelines should also be included.

63. End use of solid waste and its composition should be covered. Toxic metal content in the waste material and its composition should also be incorporated particularly of slag.

64. All stock piles will have to be on top of a stable liner to avoid leaching of materials to ground water.

65. Action plan for the green belt development plan in 33 % area i.e. land with not less than 1,500 trees per ha. Giving details of species, width of plantation, planning schedule etc. should be included. The green belt should be around the project boundary and a scheme for greening of the travelling roads should also be incorporated. All rooftops/terraces should have some green cover.

66. Detailed description of the flora and fauna (terrestrial and aquatic) should be given with special reference to rare, endemic and endangered species.

67. Disaster Management Plan including risk assessment and damage control needs to be addressed and included.

68. Occupational health:

a) Details of existing Occupational & Safety Hazards. What are the exposure levels of above mentioned hazards and whether they are within Permissible

EIA REPORT FOR




Exposure level (PEL). If these are not within PEL, what measures the company has adopted to keep them within PEL so that health of the workers can be preserved,

b) Details of exposure specific health status evaluation of worker. If the workers’ health is being evaluated by pre designed format, chest x rays, Audiometry, Spirometry, Vision testing (Far & Near vision, colour vision and any other ocular defect) ECG, during pre placement and periodical examinations give the details of the same. Details regarding last month analyzed data of abovementioned parameters as per age, sex, duration of exposure and department wise.

c) Annual report of heath status of workers with special reference to Occupational Health and Safety.

d) Action plan for the implementation of OHS standards as per OSHAS/USEPA. e) Plan and fund allocation to ensure the occupational health & safety of all

contract and sub-contract workers. 69. Corporate Environment Policy

i) Does the company have a well laid down Environment Policy approved by its Board of Directors? If so, it may be detailed in the EIA report.

ii) Does the Environment Policy prescribe for standard operating process / procedures to bring into focus any infringement / deviation / violation of the environmental or forest norms / conditions? If so, it may be detailed in the EIA.

iii) What is the hierarchical system or Administrative order of the company to deal with the environmental issues and for ensuring compliance with the environmental clearance conditions? Details of this system may be given.

iv) Does the company have system of reporting of non compliances / violations of environmental norms to the Board of Directors of the company and / or shareholders or stakeholders at large? This reporting mechanism should be detailed in the EIA report.

70. Details regarding infrastructure facilities such as sanitation, fuel, restroom etc. to

be provided to the labour force during construction as well as to the casual workers including truck drivers during operation phase.

71. Impact of the project on local infrastructure of the area such as road network and whether any additional infrastructure needs to be constructed and the agency responsible for the same with time frame.

72. Environment Management Plan (EMP) to mitigate the adverse impacts due to the project along with item wise cost of its implementation. Total capital cost and recurring cost/annum for environmental pollution control measures should be included.

73. Plan for the implementation of the recommendations made for the steel plants in the CREP guidelines must be prepared.

74. At least 5% of the total cost of the project should be earmarked towards the Enterprise Social Commitment based on public hearing issues and item-wise

EIA REPORT FOR




details along with time bound action plan should be included. Socio-economic development activities need to be elaborated upon.

75. Public hearing issues raised and commitments made by the project proponent on the same should be included separately in EIA/EMP Report in the form of tabular chart.

76. A note on identification and implementation of Carbon Credit project should be included.

77. Any litigation pending against the project and/or any direction/order passed by any Court of Law against the project, if so, details thereof should also be included.

It was decided that TOR prescribed by the Expert Appraisal Committee (Industry) should be considered for preparation of EIA/EMP report for the above mentioned project in addition to all the relevant information as per the generic structure given in Appendix III and IIIA in the EIA notification, 2006. The draft EIA/EMP report shall be submitted to the State Pollution Control Board for public hearing. The issues emerged and response to the issues shall be incorporated in the EIA report. The final EIA report shall be submitted to the Ministry for obtaining environmental clearance. EIA/EMP report has been prepared based on the above TOR and contains all the information as per the generic structure of EIA.

1.1 PURPOSE OF THE REPORT

In pursuance of Government of India policy vide Environmental (Protection) Act, 1986, any expansion project necessitates statutory prior environmental clearance in accordance with the objectives of National Environmental policy as approved by the Union Cabinet on 18th May, 2006 and MoEF EIA Notification dated 14.09.06, by preparing Environmental Impact Assessment (EIA) report. In view of the above, the EIA report has been prepared taking into consideration the requirement and guidelines of statutory bodies and also client’s requirement.

The objective of the EIA study report is to take stock of the prevailing quality of environment, to assess the impacts of proposed industrial activity on environment and to plan appropriate environmental control measures to minimise adverse impacts and to maximise beneficial impacts of the proposed project. The following major objectives have been considered:

Assess the existing status of environment. Additional impacts if any; due to the proposed expansion. Suggest additional pollution control and ameliorative measures to minimize/reduce

the impacts. Prepare an action plan for implementation of suggested ameliorative measures. Suggest a monitoring programme to assess the efficacy of the various adopted environmental control measures. Assess financial considerations for suggested environmental control plans.

EIA REPORT FOR




Clearances from statutory authorities 1.2 IDENTIFICATION OF THE PROJECT AND PROJECT PROPONENT 1.2.1 Nature of the Project Expansion Project 1.2.2 Size of the Project

Uttam Value Steel Limited (UVSL) intends to enhance the steel manufacturing capacity from 1.0 MTPA to 2.0 MTPA at Village Barbadi, Bhugaon and Selukata,Bhugaon Link Road, District Wardha, Maharashtra and produce Hot rolled coils/sheet/plates, Long products (Bar & Rods), Cold Rolled coils & sheets and Galvanized coils & sheets, Colur Coating Product and Pipes to meet the requirements of the customers. The expansion facilities will be built within the existing facilities.

Uttam Value Steels Limited is a company of Uttam Group promoted by Miglani family.

1.2.3 Project Proponent

M/s Uttam Galva Steels Limited (UGSL) is the first company promoted by Miglani family which has its registered and corporate office located at Uttam House, 69, P.D’Mello Road, Mumbai – 400009, India. M/s UGSL is a producer of cold rolled steel (CR), galvanized products comprising galvanized plain (GP), galvanized corrugated (GC) coils and sheets and colour coated products. The company is in the business of procuring hot rolled steel (HR) and processing it into CR and further into GPs. The one million tonne plant is at Khopoli on Mumbai-Pune road. Its facilities are mainly in thinner gauge materials .

1.2.4 Importance of the Project

The National Steel Policy 2005 had envisaged steel production to reach 110 million tonnes (mt) by 2019-20. However, based on the assessment of the current ongoing projects, both in green field and brown field, the Working Group on Steel for the 12th Plan has projected that the crude steel capacity in the country is likely to be 140 mt by 2016-17 and has the potential to reach 149 mt if all requirements are adequately met. The demand is estimated to grow about 7% in 2015-16 against 5.5 % in 2014- 15 and it is expected that the average growth of steel consumption in India for the next 5 years will be more than 10 % per annum. There is a tremendous potential to create new steel capacities in India. Uttam Value Steels Limited is well positioned to fulfill its role in the nation’s quest for higher growth and development in the new millennium. The growth of the steel industry significantly contributes to economic growth of the Nation as well as to the region as it generates employment both directly and also due to development of downstream industries. The infrastructural and other social amenities grow in the region leading to overall development of the region.

EIA REPORT FOR




1.2.5 Location of the Project

The proposed site is located at villages Bhugaon- Barbadi- Selukate in Wardha District of Maharashtra state between latitude 20°42'37” N and longitude 78°37'32” E. The State highway No. SH-243 joining Wardha and Vaygaon passes about 2 km away from site on the West side. The site is approximately 5 km South of Wardha Town. The Wardha railway station of central railway is located 7 km from the site. The site is at an elevation varying from 270 to 280 m above MSL. Photographs of existing plant and proposed expansion site is attached at the end of this chapter.

1.3 BASIC DATA GENERATION, FIELD STUDIES AND DATA COLLECTION

This report has been prepared on the basis of one full season baseline environmental data supplied by UVSL during March, 2013 to June, 2013 by field study. The data includes meteorological conditions, ambient air quality, noise, water quality and soil quality. Site survey has been conducted for studying the flora and fauna, socio-economic conditions including public consultation, land use, hydrology, geology, ecology etc. Additional information is also collected from several agencies and departments, both under State and Central Governments pertaining to above.

The collected data have been analysed in detail for identifying, predicting and evaluating the environmental impacts of the proposed project. The maximum anticipated impacts on environment are assessed and suitable environmental management plan has been suggested.

1.4 REPORT COVERAGE

This report contains information on the existing environment and evaluates the predicted environmental and socio-economic impacts of the proposed plant. A detailed coverage of background environmental quality, pollution sources, anticipated environmental impacts (including socio-economic impacts) and mitigation measures, environmental monitoring programme, additional studies, project benefits, environmental monitoring plan and all related aspects have been covered in this report.

The report including this introduction chapter includes:

- Project Description - Description of the Environment - Anticipated Environmental Impacts and Mitigation Measures - Environmental Monitoring Programme - Additional Studies: Public Consultation - Additional Studies: Socio-economic Studies - Additional Studies: Risk Assessment Studies - Project Benefits - Environmental Management Plan (EMP) - Summary and Conclusion - Disclosure of Consultant engaged

EIA REPORT FOR




EXISTING PROJECT

Existing SMS Area

Existing CRM Area

EIA REPORT FOR




Existing HRM Area

EIA REPORT FOR




PROPOSED PROJECT

Proposed Plant Area

Proposed Plant Area

EIA REPORT FOR




2.0 PROJECT DESCRIPTION 2.1 INTRODUCTION

Uttam Value Steels Limited (UVSL) intends to enhance the steel manufacturing capacity from 1.0 MTPA to 2.0 MTPA at Village Barbadi, Bhugaon and Selukata, Bhugaon Link Road, District Wardha, Maharashtra and produce Hot rolled coils/sheet/plates, Long products (Bar & Rods), Cold Rolled coils & sheets and Galvanized coils & sheets, Colur Coating Product and Pipes to meet the requirements of the customers. The expansion facilities will be built within the existing facilities for Techno-Commercial viability of entire steel complex. The proposed facilities are presented below.

Table 2.1 : The existing and proposed capacities of the project Sr No. Name of the Product Existing

( MTPA) Proposed

(MTPA) Total Capacity

(MTPA) 01 Hot Rolled Coils /

Sheets/Plates 1.000 0.500 1.500

02 Long Product ( Bar & Rods)

- 0.500 0.500

Total - 1.000 2.000 Further Processing for Value addition

A Cold Rolled Coils & Sheets 0.225 0.375 0.600 B Galvanized Coil & Sheets 0.225 0.375 0.600

Finishing Line A Colour Coating Product - 0.300 0.300 B Pipes - 0.250 0.250

2.2 TYPE OF PROJECT

The proposed project falls under Category ‘A’ (Sl. No. 3 (a) of Schedule: "Primary and Secondary Ferrous Metallurgical Industries") of the “List of project or activities requiring prior environmental clearance” of MoEF notification dated 14th September, 2006 in connection with Environment (Protection) Rules 1986.

2.3 NEED FOR THE PROJECT

Steel being a basic commodity for all industrial activities, quantum of its consumption is considered as an index of industrial prosperity. Since independence, there has been a substantial growth in the steel sector in India from 1.5 Mt in 1950 - 51 to 76.7 Mt in 2012. Despite having a population of nearly 20 % of the world population, India’s contribution is only 4.0% of the world steel production. The Govt. of India has been taking ample measures for promotion of consumption of steel in the country. As per the report of the Working Group on Steel for the 12th Plan, there exist many factors which carry the potential of raising the per capita steel consumption in the country. These include among others, an estimated infrastructure investment of nearly a trillion dollars, a projected growth of manufacturing from current

EIA REPORT FOR




8% to 11-12%, increase in urban population to 600 million by 2030 from the current level of 400 million, emergence of the rural market for steel currently consuming around 10 kg per annum buoyed by projects like Bharat Nirman, Pradhan Mantri Gram Sadak Yojana, Rajiv Gandhi Awaas Yojana among others. At the time of its release, the National Steel Policy 2005 had envisaged steel production to reach 110 million tonnes by 2019-20. However, based on the assessment of the current ongoing projects, both in green field and brown field, the Working Group on Steel for the 12th Plan has projected that the crude steel capacity in the country is likely to be 140 mt by 2016-17 and has the potential to reach 149 mt if all requirements are adequately met. The demand is estimated to grow about 7% in 2013-14 against 5.5 % in 2012- 13 and it is expected that the average growth of steel consumption in India for the next 5 years will be more than 10 % per annum. There is a tremendous potential to create new steel capacities in India considering the following intrinsic advantages of India in this industry: Availability of major Raw materials, viz., high Quality Iron Ore. Availability of technically competent personnel at relatively lower Cost. Proximity to the major consuming markets of South East Asia, Middle East etc.

To tap this potential, several Indian Steel manufacturers viz., SAIL, TISCO, ESSAR, JSW and even foreign players like POSCO, ARCELOR MITTAL are planning to put up steel making facilities in India.

While modernisation of the existing steel plants in India may increase steel output marginally, setting up of new steel plants facilities will be essential to meet the increasing steel demand. The project is needed to increase Steel Production in the country as per National Steel Policy to bridge the gap between demand and supply.

2.4 LOCATION

The proposed site is located at Bhugaon-Barbadi-Selukate in Wardha district of Maharastra state between latitude 20°42'37”N and longitude 78°37'32”E. The State highway No. SH-243 joining Wardha and Vaygaon passes about 2 km away from site on the West side. The site is approximately 5 km South of Wardha Town. The Wardha railway station of central railway is located 7 km from the site. The site is at an elevation varying from 270 to 280 m above MSL. Location map is shown as Fig. 2-1.

2.5 SIZE OR MAGNITUDE OF OPERATION

The expansion plant is intended to increase the steel production to 2.0 MTPA. The process-cum-material flow for the expansion plant is given in Fig. 2-2.

2.6 PROPOSED SCHEDULE FOR APPROVAL AND IMPLEMENTATION The proposed integrated steel plant will be put into operation after 24 months from go-ahead signal.

EIA REPORT FOR




2.7 TECHNOLOGY & PROCESS DESCRIPTION

Uttam Value Steel Limited will follow the DRI-SCRAP-EAF-CCM-B&R mill Route of steel making. The primary raw material shall be coal based DRI, scrap,Hot Metal, Pig Iron, sms grade lime and dololime, carbon powder and ferro-alloys. No Iron making facility is envisaged in proposed expansion, we shall be discussing only Steel making, casting and rolling facility. The main steps in manufacturing process are as follows: Electric Arc Furnace (EAF) process Iron is taken for steel making in Electric Arc Furnace. The EAF will be AC Arc type, bottom tapping, water cooled side walls, roof side graphite electrode, foamy slag formation, continuous charging of DRI through roof, mechanized charging of lime, ferroalloy and scrap through roof and coke powder by injection into the furnace. Heating, deoxidation, alloying and homogenization of chemical composition takes place in the Laddle Refining Furnace. Reaction During blowing and arcing operation, oxygen oxidises iron into iron oxide and carbon into carbon monoxide. The iron oxide immediately transfers the oxygen to the tramp elements. The center of the reaction has temperatures of around 2000°C-2500°C. The development of carbon monoxide during refining process promotes agitation within the molten bath. The reaction of the tramp elements with the oxygen and the iron oxide developed in the center of reaction leads to formation of reactive slag. As blowing and arcing continues, there is a continuous decrease of carbon, phosphorous, manganese and silicon within the melt. Phosphorous is removed by inducing early slag formation by adding powder lime with oxygen. The refining process is completed when the desired carbon content is attained. The steel produced is sent to continuous casting. Continuous Casting During continuous casting, the liquid steel passes from the pouring ladle, with the exclusion of air, via a tundish with an adjustable discharge device into the short, water-cooled copper mould. The shape of the mould defines the shape of the steel. Before casting, the bottom of the mould is sealed with a so-called dummy bar. As soon as the bath reaches its intended steel level, the mould starts to oscillate vertically in order to prevent the strand adhering to its walls. The red-hot strand, solidified at the surface zones, is drawn from the mould, first with the aid of a dummy bar, and later by driving rolls. Because of its liquid core, the strand must be carefully sprayed and cooled down with water. Rolls on all sides must also support it until it has completely solidified. This prevents the still thin rim zone from disintegrating. Once it has completely solidified, mobile cutting torches or shears can divide the strand. Intensive cooling leads to a homogeneous solidification microstructure with favourable technological properties.

EIA REPORT FOR




Bar & Rod Mill Bar & Rod Mill will roll Rebars, rounds and Round Cornored Square (RCS) in straight lengths and wire rods in coil form from square continuous cast billets. Cold Rolling Mill Steel, an alloy of carbon and iron, is a material which is both inexpensive and has great mechanical strength. However, it is initially produced as steel slabs which are too thick and heavy to be used. To convert the steel into useful products it must first be rolled into thin sheets and coiled onto the spools. This steel is more useful, but it is prone to rusting and will have its useful life span seriously shortened if it is used in damp environment. To prevent corrosion, the steel is coated with Zinc in a process known as galvanising thus lengthening the useful lifespan of steel. If a suitable paint coating is applied on the galvanised sheet surface, the protection effect can be further enhanced. The brief description of process as follows: Step 1: Cold Rolling Sheet/Coil is the raw material for CRM complex where value addition takes place through further processing. HR strips is first slitted in desired specification and Pickled before cold rolling. Pickling is necessary to remove the fine layer of iron oxide scale forms on the surface of the steel during hot rolling. The steel strip is pickled in Low Strength hydrochloric acid. As the steel strip passes through the pickling tanks the HCL solution reacts with the rust to form a solution of iron chloride.

Fe2O3.xH2O + 6HCL =2FeCl3 + (x+3) H2O

The sheet is then rinsed, dried and oiled to prevent further corrosion then fed into the cold reversing mill. Here they are rolled out, recoiled and then passed through the mill in the reverse direction. Between five and seven passes are made until correct gauge (thickness) is attained. The strip thickness is continuously measured. The strip is then cut and recoiled in readiness for transfer to the galvanising line.

Step 2 - Galvanising

The galvanising process begins with the uncoiling to produce a continuous steel strip. This strip is then cleaned and degreased in an electrolytic alkali cleaning section. Here it is immersed in a bath of hot alkali, where it is cleaned both by the alkali and by the electrolysis of water. The bath contains an anode and a cathode which electrolyse the water, producing hydrogen which blast off the grease. Roller brushes and hot water sprays also help to remove the oil. The clean steel is then rinsed to remove the alkali and passed through a hot pickle bath of hydrochloric acid that removes traces of rust and lightly etches the surface.

EIA REPORT FOR




The strip next enters the heat treatment furnace. The furnace is brick lined and has atmosphere of nitrogen and hydrogen to prevent oxidation of steel surface. Here the steel is subjected to a controlled heating and cooling cycle to alter its physical properties. Depending on the grade of steel being manufactured, the strip is either stress-relieved to produce high strength steel or annealed to produce ductile grades. The zinc coating operation is performed by passing the steel strip directly from the exit of the annealing furnace into a molten zinc bath. The excess zinc on the surface is wiped off by air knives after the strip leaves the bath. The zinc composition in the bath is carefully controlled to ensure that the optimum coating characteristics are achieved. The galvanised steel is then passes through a set of rollers in the skin pass/leveller unit. Here, any distortion that the strip has acquired in the annealing furnace is smoothened out, readying it for both repaint and general sheet metal applications. From the leveller, the strip is passes through a chromate spray which reacts with the fresh zinc to produce a pasivation film of zinc and iron oxides. The chromate spray form the protective film otherwise zinc will corrode to white rust, if it is stored in damp and poorly ventilated environment. Hence chromate strengthens the expected storage life of the product.

Step 3 – Colour Coating About 75% of all galvanised steel is sold directly to customer, with the remainder being painted before sale. Steel sheets are painted for both decoration and corrosion prevention. At the entry section of coil painting line, coil is fed into cleaning and pre-treatment section to prepare the surface for coating. The primer is applied on the sheet when the strip passes in an S fashion around two large rubber coated application rollers. Excess paint drips off and the remainder is baked on at up to 240 0c by high temperature air jet. The baking can take as little as 15 seconds. The paint is cured by further heating before leaving the primer oven. On leaving the primer oven, the strip is cooled first by air jet, then by water sprays. It then travels to a second identical roller coating and oven baking operation where the top coat is applied. Four different type coats are used, producing four different grades of colour steel for use in different environment. The general lay out of the expansion plant is given in Drg. No. MEC/01/02-03/Q71P/SMS/004 Rev.1.

2.8 PROJECT DESCRIPTION 2.8.1 Electric Arc Furnace (EAF)

The electric arc furnace will be of AC arc type with high power transformer. Major features, which will be incorporated in electric arc furnaces, are as follows.

Eccentric bottom tapping Water cooled side wall panels and roof Water spray cooling of the graphite electrodes

EIA REPORT FOR




Facilities for calcined lime and calcined dolo charging Oxygen blowing facilities DRI charging: Mechanised continuous charging through roof with system of

overhead bins, conveyors, vibro-feeders, weigh hopper, chute, etc. DRI will be conveyed from coal based DR module of the plant

Scrap charging through bucket Provision for hot metal charging if hot metal is available n future. Ferro-alloys and flux addition system : Mechanised Coke injection system: Mechanised Steelmaking practice: Single slag, hot heel, foamy slag, slag free tapping. Alloying in

ladle during tapping and also at ladle furnace. Steel composition correction : In ladle furnace Fume collection and cleaning: ESP type common for electric arc furnace and ladle

furnace.

The main technological parameters of electric arc furnace are indicated below.

Technical parameters for EAF

Parameter Values Annual production of liquid steel, t 531,407 No of EAFs 2 Rating, MVA Each 60 No. of days EAF shop operating, d/yr 320 Heat Size, t 60 Relining time, h (each furnace) 168 ( 7days ) Tap to tap time, min, average/EAF 90 No. of heats per day, max (each furnace) 16 Total no. of heats per year (both furnace) 10,240 DRI, kg/t of L.S 1130 Scrap, kg/t of L.S 60 Carbon Powder, kg/t of L.S 10 Lime, kg/t of L.S 70 Dololime, kg/t of L.S 110 Fe-Mn, kg/t of L.S 10 Fe – Si, kg/t of L.S 5 Oxygen, Nm3/t of L.S 40 Slag rate, kg/t of L.S 175

Ladle furnace (LF) Ladle furnace is widely used as secondary refining unit for carrying out heating, deoxidation, desulphurisation, alloying and homogenisation of temperature and chemical composition of steel tapped into ladle from steelmaking furnace (i.e., electric arc furnace).

EIA REPORT FOR




The Ladle furnace will help to produce various steel grades, improve productivity, steel quality and operating indices of the melting unit. In addition, the ladle furnace will be used as a holding furnace when caster is not ready to receive heat or during emergency situations. Overhead bins will be provided on ladle furnace platform for storing calcined lime, deoxidisers, fluorspar and ferro-alloys. Weighed quantity of these materials will be charged into ladle during LF treatment. Argon purging facilities will be provided at ladle furnace station. Handling and transportation of ladle at the ladle furnace station will be done by steel ladle transfer car. Wire feeding and carbon injection facilities will also be provided at ladle furnace. Technological parameters of the ladle furnace are given below.

Technological parameters of the ladle furnace

Parameter Description No. of LF 2 Type of ladle furnace Single station with water-cooled roof Method of charging additives Mechanised Method of argon purging Porous plug at the ladle bottom with

provision for top lance purging Fume collection and cleaning ESP/Bagfilter type FES system along

with ID fan, chimney etc Capacity of LF, t 60 Rating of LF, MVA each 20 Heating rate, °C/min 5 Liquid steel production t/yr 531,407 No. of heats per day, max(each furnace) 16 Specific consumption Lime, kg/t of liquid steel (Already covered in sp consumption of lime for EAF)

10

Fluorspar 1.5

Billet/bloom caster It is envisaged to install one (1) No. of 3/4 - strand high-speed billet / bloom caster with curved mould and a base radius of 9.0 m (approx.). The billet caster will be of latest design with state-of-the art technology and equipped with special features such as parabolic high speed moulds, hydraulic mould oscillator, automatic mould level controller, mould EMS, high intensity multi zone spray cooling system, multi-point unbending, rigid dummy bar, turnover type cooling bed, billet discharge facilities and computerized process control system (Level-II).

EIA REPORT FOR




The operating parameters of billet/bloom caster for casting of different sections are given below.

Operating parameters of billet/bloom caster

Description Unit Parameters No. of machine x No. of strands No. x Nos. 1 x 3/4 Billet thickness to be cast mm 165 Billet width to be cast mm 165 Reference size to be cast mm x mm 165 x 163 Average casting speed m/min 2.5 -3.5 Casting time min 30-40 Preparation time min 40 Nominal heat size t 60 Overall availability d/yr 320 Yield % 97

The salient design and technological features of the high-speed billet/bloom caster are given below.

Salient design and technological features of the billet caster

Description Design feature of billet caster Type of machine Radial with curved mould Base radius, m 9 Design casting speed, m/min 2.5 -3.5 Reference cast to be size , mm2 165 x 165 Casting practice Sequence casting Ladle holding device Ladle turret with lifting/ lowering and weighing

facility, equipped with ladle cover manipulator Ladle stream protection Ceramic shroud Tundish Refractory lined, capacity – 35 t, suitable for

hot tundish practice. Tundish car 1 No. Cantilever type with weighing facility Mould Tube mould Dummy bar system Rigid type Cutting facility Automatic torch cutting machine Cooling bed Turnover type cooling bed Cross-transfer Overhead type Marking unit Automatic billet marking machine Billet discharge Hot charging to bar mill and transfer to billet

storage bay.

EIA REPORT FOR




2.8.2 Bar & Rod Mill

A Bar & Rod Mill of 500,000 t/yr capacity has been envisaged for the proposed 2.0 MTPA expansion of existing integrated steel plant. Bar & Rod Mill will be working for 320 days per year and 3 shifts per day. It is expected that after providing for various mill delays such as Mechanical and Electrical delays, Roll and guide change, Mill setting and other normal operational delays, at least 6500 net hot rolling hours would be available for the mill for rolling the required tonnage. However, achievement of the above hot rolling hours, consistently, will require trained manpower and high degree of technical and operational discipline. Bar & Rod mill will use continuously cast billets of 165x165 mm cross section and 12000 mm length as feed material. Input Billet availability for the plant will be 515,464 t/yr., Hence the finished product from the above Bar & Rod Mill will be 500,000 t/yr. Bar & Rod Mill will produce wire rods of various grades of 5.5 mm to 20 mm dia in coil form for special rod quality and special bar quality from 20 mm to 63 mm dia in straight length. The above mill will also be capable to produce TMT bars and deformed rods in coils and straight lengths size 8-40 mm for meeting the requirement of various steel consumers and industries. The capacity and the product mix range for the Rolling Mill is given below.

Product-mix

Sl. No.

Type of Product Size Range (mm) Annual Production (Tonnes)

a. Bars in Straight Length (SBQ) i) Plain Rounds 20-63 250,000

SUB-TOTAL (A) 250,000 b. Rods in coil forms (Special Rod

Quality)

i) Plain Rods/TMT Bars/ 5.5-20 / 8-40 mm 250,000 SUB-TOTAL (B) 250,000 TOTAL (A+B) 500,000

The rolled products will conform to Indian standards as well as International standards such as BIS, DIN, ASTM and others.

The proposed Bar & Rod Mill will be of 500,000 tpa capacity and will roll rounds in straight lengths and wire rods in coil form from square continuous cast billets. The mill will be suitable to produce special quality bar products for a maximum output of 100 tph with cold billets charging. Provision for hot charging of billets into Reheating furnace has also been envisaged.

EIA REPORT FOR




Technical parameters of the Bar & Rod Mill

The major technical parameters of the mill are given below:

Major Technical Parameters of the Mill Sl. No. Item Unit Parameter

1. Type of Mill - Continuous Rolling Mill composed of Eighteen (18) Horizontal and Vertical alternatively arranged rolling stands. 10 Stand Wire Rod Block

2. Capacity of mill t/yr. 500,000 3. Rolling (Operating) speed,

max. m/s 16 for bars dia 16.00 mm

105 for 5.5 to 8.0 mm dia wire rods 4. Available days for rolling d/yr 320 Shifts/day Nos. 3 5. Available hot rolling hours hrs/yr 6500 (Minimum) 6. Reheating furnace - 100 t/h nominal capacity,

Walking beam type 7 Fuel for furnace - Furnace Oil /Gas Fired 8 Feed billet size mm 165X165X12000 mm, 2500 kg 9 Annual billet requirement t/y 515,464 10. Finished product size range - Straight length products

Round : 20- – 63 mm dia/ TMT Bar 8-40 mm Wire rods in coils : 5.5 – 20 mm dia Bundle weight : 3000 – 5000 kg Coil weight : 2336 kg Coil ID : 850 mm , OD : 1250 mm

11. Billet to product yield % 97

Special features of Bar & Rod Mill

The envisaged Bar & Rod mill will be of modern design and will have the following special features to ensure superior surface finish, close dimensional tolerances and physical properties of the steel products:

Billet Charging Facility Provision for Hot Charging of billets into Reheating furnace Billet weighing facility Walking beam type Reheating furnace High pressure descaling facility Single strand high speed continuous mill arranged in H-V configuration for twist free rolling Modern housing less stands for ease in Maintenance and better rigidity

EIA REPORT FOR




Quick roll change facility Inter stand tension control rolling Online rapid water quenching unit for production of thermo- mechanically treated high strength bars Finishing Block after quenching for producing SBQ Mill Floor Level at +5.00 m Cooling Bed of required length for Bar products Water Boxes before wire rod finishing block to produce special rod quality 10-Stands finishing block mill for wire rod products Control cooling conveyor in Wire rod line Automatic bar bundling and tying facility Coil handling and coil compact facilities Sizing Mill Inspection and Finishing facilities Guide and Roll Shop Lab and Repair shop Level-2 automation and control

Major facilities in Bar & Rod Mill

Major facilities envisaged for the Bar & Rod mill with their brief technical features are given below:

Sl. No. Equipment/Facilities Unit Technical feature

1. Furnace charging area

Equipment ahead of furnace -

Cold billet charging equipment such as billet charging grid, roller tables and billet weighing unit etc. Provisions for Hot billet charging of billets is envisaged

2. Reheating furnace Number and type 1 No. Walking beam type, side charging and side

discharging Nominal throughput t/h 100 for cold charging

120 for hot charging Fuel - Furnace Oil/Gas Billet charge °C Cold billets at ambient temp. Provision for hot

charge. Temp. of reheated billet °C 1150-1200 max. Size of input stock - 165X165 x12,000 mm Air preheat temp. °C 500-550 max. Charging and

Discharging Method - Single/Double row Charging/Discharging

Recuperator - Metallic, U-type

EIA REPORT FOR





Chimney - Self supporting type steel chimney 3. Rolling Mill High pressure descaling

unit 1 No. High pressure water system for descaling of

hot billet Heat insulated roller table 1 No. Feed roller table to first mill stand. Billet Reject Cradle 1 No. To receive rejected Billet Pinch roll unit 1 No. To assist feeding of billet to first mill stand. Emergency shear

(Toggle shear before stand no.1)

1 No. For chopping of billet in case of cobble/stoppage of rolling in downstream

Mill stands 18 Nos. 6 Stands-Roughing Group of stands 6 Stands- Intermediate Group of stands 6 Stands- Finishing Group of stands

Mill Configuration - Arranged in Horizontal- Vertical configuration Crop and cobble shear 2 Nos. Provided after Roughing, Intermediate Group

of stands for cropping and chopping in case of cobble in the downstream.

Online measuring Gauge 1 No. For measuring bar dimension online and providing feedback data for product sizing correction

Water quenching unit 1 Set Online water quenching unit between finishing group of mill stands and cooling bed to control scales and steel micro structure and to quench bars for TMT production

Finishing Block - 4-stands finishing Block to produce SBQ quality Bars.

Pinch roll unit with Dividing shear

1 No. Rotary dividing shear with pinch roll is provided after water quenching unit to divide bars into cooling bed length.

Rake type cooling bed 1 Set. Walking beam (fixed and moving rakes) type cooling bed.

Cold shear with shear gauge

1 No. To divide finished bars to commercial lengths of 6-12m.

Bundling and binding station

2 Sets. Automatic operation for bundling & binding of bars. Bundle weight envisaged :3-5 tonnes

Bundle collecting and unloading station.

1 Set. To receive tied bundles from binding station, equipped with bundle weighing facility.

Short bars receiving grid 1 Sets Short bar receiving grid to receive short bars and further discharge by EOT cranes to short bar storage area.

4. Facilities for Wire rod coils Water Boxes 2 Nos. Low temperature rolling to produce special

quality rods.

EIA REPORT FOR





Finishing block 10 Nos. 10 Stands- Finishing block mill Water boxes 5 Nos. - After 10 stands Finishing block mill Pinch roll and laying

head 1 Set Pinch roll and laying head to ensure high-

speed linear path of rod to circular path and form convolutes.

Control cooling conveyor 1 No. Cooling conveyor complete with insulating covers, fans and cooling air ducts for controlled cooling of wire rod convolutes.

Coil reform tub 1 No. To facilitate of coil from cooled wire rod convolutes

Vertical pallet conveyor /Power and Free Hook conveyor

1 Set each

To handle coils for cooling and transport to coil compactor.

Coil compactor 1 No. For Compacting coils Unloading station 1 No. For Coil unloading and dispatch 5. Roll and Repair Shop

Roll and Repair shop Roll and repair shops equipped with facilities

for grooving new rolls, shear blades and guides. Dismantling/assembly of bearings, maintenance of roll assembly, preparation of templates, grinding of tools etc as well as facilities for carrying out day to day minor work for the mill.

6. Auxiliary System Auxiliary systems - Oil hydraulic stations, centralized oil

lubrication stations, centralized grease lubrication systems

Water booster station for high pressure descaling unit

1 Set To meet the requirement at the descaling unit

Process description

A 100 t/h top and bottom fired walking beam type reheating furnace has been envisaged

for heating of continuous cast billets of 165 mm square and 12 m long. The cold billets will be charged to furnace charging grid by EOT crane in the billet storage bay. Hot Billets will be charged through Roller Table from Continuous Caster.

Billets after being heated properly in the Reheating furnace will be discharged from the furnace delivery end and fed to the first mill stand of the roughing mill group of stands after passing through de-scaler unit. It will pass through the 6-stands intermediate group of stands and subsequently through 6-stands finishing group of stands. Shears are provided after Roughing and intermediate mill groups for end cropping and also cobble cutting of bars in case of any problem in the downstream facilities.

EIA REPORT FOR




Rolled stock emerging from the finishing group of stands will be passed through cooling/quenching boxes before entering into the finishing block for rolling at low temperature. After rolling at low temperature in finishing block, the SBQ bars will cut to cooling bed length by Rotary dividing shear and transported to cooling bed for cooling of products.

The bars cooled in the Rake type cooling bed will be fed to the cold shear for cutting into the commercial length. The cut lengths will pass through bundling and binding station for bundle forming and binding operation to form 2 – 5 t bundles.

Finish bundles of SBQ bars will be weighed and transported to bundle unloading station.

From unloading station, bundles will be lifted by EOT crane and stored in the dispatch bay or loaded directly/indirectly into the railway wagons for shipment.

For the production of special quality wire rods in coil form, the rolled stock emerging from

the stand No. 18 will be diverted by means of switch table. The precise input size required to 10-stands finishing block mill will be rolled at low temperature in finishing group of stands after passing through water boxes. A horizontal looper will be provided in the wire rod line for tension free rolling. Before 10-stands finishing block mill, set of shears along with crop / cobble disposal system will be provided to crop and cobble cut in case of problem in the downstream facilities. The rod will pass through cooling boxes before rolling in 10-stands Finishing block mill. Finish rolled products leaving the 10-stand finishing block mill will again pass through water cooling boxes to control scale generation and micro structure before being laid in convolutes on the controlled cooling conveyor with the help of pinch roll and laying head. In case of re-bars, it will additionally pass through water boxes, where high pressure water is circulated to provide desired metallurgical structure and mechanical properties before being laid in convolutes on the controlled cooling conveyor with the help of pinch roll and laying head. Convolutes laid on the conveyor will then be subjected to controlled air cooling for which air blowers will be provided below the cooling conveyor.

A coil reforming station will be provided at the end of the conveyor to convert the

convolutes into coil. The coil will be collected on the vertical pallet, it will then be discharged on the horizontal power and free hook conveyor for further cooling during travel on the conveyor. Cooled coil will be compacted and tied at coil compacting stations and then weighed and tagged before unloading at the unloading stations. Coils will then be lifted by overhead cranes/forklifts for placement in the dispatch bay for shipment.

Bar & rod mill will be provided with level-2 automation having features of interaction with

PPC computer, product tracking and process control functions. The automation will provide the following major advantages:

Lower manpower requirement Reduced scale and crop losses resulting in improved yield Reduced time for campaign change

EIA REPORT FOR




Reduced time for mill setting Elimination of human error Increased mill availability Increased mill productivity

Auxiliary facilities Auxiliary system will be provided for the mill. Auxiliary facilities such as hydraulic systems, lubricating oil systems, grease lubrication systems, water systems, air control systems etc., have been envisaged which will be required for continuous operation of the mill. High pressure water booster station for the descaling unit will also be provided inside the mill premises.

Roll and Repair shop A Roll and repair shop has been envisaged for the mill where grooving of new rolls, redressing of used rolls, dismantling/assembly of bearings, preparation of templates, grinding of tools etc., as well as minor repair job will be carried out. The roll and repair shop building will be located by the side of the mill bay building and will house various type of machine tools such as turning lathes, shear blades and roll grinders, chock and bearing tanks and cleaning equipment, roll storage racks, drilling machine, template cutting machine required for the above purposes. To facilitate transportation of rolls/ rolls with chocks from mill and repair shop transfer car is also provided.

2.8.3 Cold Rolling Mill Complex:

1300 mm Push Pull Pickling Line

One No. 1300 mm push pull pickling line is provided for pickling of HR coils before cold reduction. The technical characteristics of the line are furnished below:

Description Entry Delivery

Coil ID (mm) 610 / 762 508 Coil OD (mm) 2000 (max.) 2000 (max.) Width of the strip (mm) 600 - 1300 600 - 1300 Coil weight (t) 25(max.) 25 (max.) Strip thickness (mm) 1.6 to 5.0 1.6 to 5.0 Line speed (mpm) 90 Threading speed (mpm) 15-30

The above Pickling Line will be capable to pickled 300,000t/yr. HR coils in available 320 days. Hydrochloric acid (HCL) will be used as a acid media for pickling. Major facilities in Pickling Line are described below:

EIA REPORT FOR





1. Uncoiler 1 No. Uncoiler will be used to load the HR coils for processing in pickling line

2. Pinch Roll Flatner 1 No. To level the HR strip for further processing 3. Shear 1 No. To cut the head and tail portion of coil 4. Pre-wash cabin 1 No. For removing the foreign particles from surface. 5. Squeezing Rolls 6 Set To remove the water/acid from the strip

surfaces 6. Acid Tank 4

Nos. Generally 3 No. of acid tank will be used. Space Provision for 4th Number will be kept.

7. Rinsing Tank 1 No. Water will be used to remove the acid patches from the surface.

8. Hot Air Dryer 1 No. To dry the strip surface after rinsing 9. Edge Trimmer 1 No. For trimming the edge (both side) which are

over pickled/under pickled 10. Re-coiler 1 No. To re-coils the pickled strips.

The above pickling line will come at +3.0 m level where as uncoiler and recoiler will be at ±0.0 level. The other auxiliary facilities for the pickling line will be at ±0.0 level. An acid regeneration plant of capacity 1900 ltrs/hr has been envisaged considering 0.5 pickling lose.

6-Hi Cold Reduction Mill (CRM)

The 6-Hi Cold Reduction Mill has been envisaged to process hot rolled pickled coils. The coils will be directly transferred to mill unit. The above CRM will be designed to produce 250,000t/yr cold rolled coils. This result will be achieved on the basis of 3-shift per day working.

Input HR pickled coil:

Strip Thickness : 1.6 to 5.0 mm Strip Width : 600 to 1300 mm Coil ID : 610 mm Coil OD : 2000 mm (max.) Coil Weight : 25 t

Output CR Coil: Strip Thickness : 0.2 to 2.5 mm Strip Width : 600 to 1300 mm Coil ID : 508 mm Coil OD : 1000~2000 mm (max.) Coil Weight : 25 t

EIA REPORT FOR




Rolling Parameters:

Rolling Speed : 1200 mpm at min roll dia Rolling Force : 1200 tons Drive : Work Roll Driven Bending : WR/IR Shifting : IR

End Products Applications:

The product from the mill is commercial quality steel and drawing quality steel especially for profiling purposes and roofing as mentioned below: Products with final thickness of 0.30 mm, 0.50 mm and 1.20 mm will satisfy the

nominal market request in terms of final products of roofing. The profiling materials for construction purposes will have a thickness value between

0.70 mm and 1.00 mm in order to better adapt to the market requirement.

Edge Trimming cum Rewinding Line

A edge trimming cum rewinding line has been envisaged to trimmed CR coils of capacity 230,000t/yr.

The material description for the above line are described below: Entry Material: Steel Grade : CR Coils Coil ID : 508 mm Coli OD : 2000 mm (max.) & 1000 mm (min.) Thickness of the sheets : 1.8 mm to 2.5 mm Coil Weight : 25 t

Exit Materials:

Coil ID : 508 mm Coil OD : 2000 mm (max.) & 1000 mm (min.)

Coil Weight : 25 t Line Speed : 200 mpm (max.) Threading Speed : 15 mpm No. of Slit : Only edge trimming

Hot Dip Continuous Galvanizing Line (CGL) A hot dip continuous galvanizing line of capacity 230,000 t/yr has been envisaged to produce galvanized coils of both hard and soft.

EIA REPORT FOR




Material Specification for Galvanizing Line:

Material- Cold rolled mild steel (low carbon) annealed or un- annealed, not degreased for commercial, D, DQ, Full hard grade.

Incoming coil data: Strip Thickness : 0.20-1.2 mm Strip Width : 600-1250 mm Coil Inner Dia : 508 mm Coil OD : 2000 mm (max.) and 1000 mm (min.) Coil Weight : 25t Outgoing Coil Data: Coil Inner Dia : 508-610 mm on sleeve (over re-winding) Coil OD : 2000 mm (max.) and 1000 mm (min.) Coil Weight : 5~25t

Coating Strip Surface : With Spangle, skin pass or tension leveled Coating Type : 100% Zn Galvanized(GI) Coating Thickness Range : 75-400grms/m2 (total both side for GI) Line Speed : 180 mpm Threading Speed : 30-60 mpm

Major facilities in CGL are described below:


1 Coil Saddle 1 No. Coils waiting to be galvanized can be stored on this.

2 Coil Car 4 Nos. 2 Nos. at Entry side and 2 Nos. at exit side. 3 Uncoiler 2 Nos. Overhung Mandrel Type, Hydraulically

operated. 4 Pinch Roll 5 Nos. Having top & bottom rolls, pneumatically

operated for opening and closing of roll 5 Shear 3 Nos. 2 Nos. at entry side and 1 No. at exit side 6 Welding Machine 1 No. For seam welding of tail end to head end of

strips to be processed 7 Briddle Rolls 7 No. To maintain proper tension in line 8 Deflector Rolls 4 Nos. For deflecting the strip vertically/Horizentally

towards steering 9 Vertical Accumulators 2 Nos. For accumulating strip for uninterrupted

operation (1 No. in entry section and 1 No.

EIA REPORT FOR





in exit section 10 Tensiometer 1 No. To measure the tension of the strip in the

furnace 11 Non-ox Furnace 1 No. To heat the strip upto 1300°C for burning of

coolants and foreign particles 12 Radiant Tube Furnace 1 No. For production of soft grade materials 13 Soaking Furnace 1 No. To achieve the annealing properties in strip 14 Zinc Pot 1 No. To accumulate the zinc bath for galvanizing 15 Sink roll & Stabilizer

rolls 1 Set To sink and stabilize the strip in zinc bath

16 Jet Wiper Pair 1 Set To wipe off excessive zinc from strip surface 17 Cooling Tower with

cooling pendant 1 Set For cooling the coated strip

18 Water Quench Tank 1 No. To cool the strip 40-50°C. 19 Tension Leveller 1 No. For removal of residual stress from soft

grade materials 20 Chromatic Equipment

along with dryer 1 No. For passivation of strip from oxidation

21 Recoiler 1 No. Overhung type.

The galvanized coils are directly dispatch to market as per requirement. Also, the above coils are feed materials for CTL, Corrugation machine and colour coating line.

Colour Coating Line (CCL)

Two Nos. of colour coating line of capacity 150,000t/yr each has been envisaged to produce 300,000t/yr colour coated coils.

Line and Material data are as described below:

Input Material : Cold rolled low carbon steel Galvanized and galvalume of strip Strip Width : 600-1250 mm Strip Thickness : 0.20-1.00 mm Coil max outside diameter : 2000 mm (entry) 500 mm (exit) Entry Coil Weight : 25t (max.) Exit coil weight : 12t (max.) Line Speed

Entry section maximum speed : 130 mpm Process section maximum speed : 100 mpm Exit section maximum speed : 130 mpm

EIA REPORT FOR




Maximum Threading speed : 30 mpm (adjustable)

Coating Types:

RMP, SMP, HSDR, HGP, PVDF. No. of coats- 2 Dry Film Thickness (DFT) Prime top : 10 micron Bottom : 10µm Finish Top : 25µm Bottom : 10µm % Solids : 45%

Paint Curing Temperature (PMT) Prime : 230°C Finish : 250°C Pre-painted steel will be available in thickness range of 0.20 to 1.00 mm.

Pre-painted profiles- Applications

Roofing Wall Cladding Facades

Pre-painted coils and sheets- Applications White good segment Ducting Home Appliances Furniture Electrical and Light Fittings Boxes Agricultural Equipments

Major facilities in CCL are described below:

Equipment/Facilities Unit Technical feature

Coil Storage Saddles - To store the coils for processing in CCL Coil Car - Pit type Uncoiler - Single Mandrel to process the strip Shear Unit - Dual Type

EIA REPORT FOR




Equipment/Facilities Unit Technical feature Deflector rolls with Drive roll - For deflection of strip Verically/Horizontally. Pre cleaning section with Dryer - For clean the strip and drying. Briddle Rolls - To provide the tension in the strip Tension Leveller - To achieve the optimum flatness Cleaning sections with brush rolls and squeeze rolls

- -

Rinsing sections To rinse the strip Air Dryer Mist blower Horizontal chemical coater Chemical oven Prime coater Prime oven Finishing coater and oven Final Quench with squeezes & Dryer

Coating thickness gauge Exit vertical accumulator Swing type belt wrapper unit

The colour coated coils will be directly sell into the market. Also, it will be sold by profile making and cut to length in sheets form as per market demand.

Cut to Length Line

A Cut to Length line of 120,000t/yr capacity has been envisaged.

Entry Material: Steel Grade : Colour coated coils Strip Width : 600-1300 mm Coil ID : 508 mm Coil OD : 2000 mm (max.) Thickness of the sheet : 1.8 upto 2.5 mm Exit Material Data: Length of cut sheet : 1000~4000 mm No. of cuts : 40 cuts/min. (max. 2000 mm) Reject piler : 1 No. Prime piler : 1 No. Pack Count : 2 Nos. Pack Height : 200 mm Pack Weight : 5t (max.)

EIA REPORT FOR




Drum type corrugation Machine

A corrugation machine has been envisaged to produce 60,000 t/yr profile sheets.

Sheet Specifications:

Length : 4000 mm Width : 1250 mm (max.) Thickness : 0.5 mm (max.) Drum Speed : 10 rpm Loading/Unloading : Manual 2.8.4 H saw Spiral Pipe Mill

A H-SAW spiral pipe mill of capacity 250,000t/yr. has been envisaged to produce spiral pipe of dia. 18’’ to 42’’. The commercial length of the pipe will be 120000 mm. The HR coils will be loaded to a motorized trolley, which carries the coil into coil-loading stand. This is driven by gearbox and electric motor. The trolley travels at a fixed speed into the coil loading area. The coil loading stands will be able to be moved horizontally to accommodate the full width range of coils required for this mill. Once, supported within the coil-loading stand, to ensure that the strip being fed into the straitening rollers is kept at a constant level. A seven-roll arrangement for flattening the strip with three freewheeling to rollers and four free wheeling lower rollers are positioned after the ancillary drive station. Each roller is mounted in the spherical roller bearings within substantial bearing housing. Equipment for preparing, aligning, and welding of the new coil tongue to the old coil tail consists of a substantial mobile carriage operated by a longitudinal hydraulic cylinder. A plasma cutting torch and an automatic tandem sub-merged arc welding head are mounted on a common motorized carriage which runs on a transverse beam which ensures that each coil is cut at right angles, there ensuring ideal cutting and welding parameters. A secondary station of leveling rollers are mounted immediately after the coil joining station consisting of two bottom rollers which are in a fixed position and one top roller which is hydraulically operated. Spiral forming of the pipe from the incoming strip will be carried out by the three-roll bending method. The incoming strip passes over the set of rollers, and then the strip passes under the boom mounted rollers. The front and back set of rollers are mounted on the wedge shaped steel beams both of which can be moved laterally by motor operated mechanical screw jacks, in order to obtain required pipe diameter. A proportional valve assisted hydraulic cylinder is mounted at the end of the pay off table to adjust the position of the pay off table radically relative to the formation table for correcting the welding gap at the internal weld point.

EIA REPORT FOR




Process Flow of pipes

The spiral weld pipe from the spiral weld pipe machine flows to the internal pipe cleaning device where the loose slag and flux from the weld seam are removed and collected in a bin. The clean pipes are flow through pipe rotating device for manual visual inspection of the pipe interior. The internal visual inspection of pipes are only possible form 20’’ dia pipes and above. Pipes further flow through station where weld seam is inspected visual from outside. The defects indicated by the automatic ultrasonic testing machine on the spiral weld pipe machine proper will be further screened in this station with the help of a manual ultrasonic testing device to check the nature and genuineness of the defect within the permissible limits of API specifications. Good quality pipes flow through the station in which the interior of the weld from either and of the pipe ground upto a distance of 150 mm in accordance with the requirement of API specification. The good quality pipe further flow through hydro tester and pipe storage rack to the end beveling machine. Pipes which required complete non-destructive testing of the weld seam as per the specifications other than API flow through the five head automatic ultrasonic testing probe station before reaching the final X-ray station. In the final X-ray station, the pipe ends are radio graphed in accordance with the requirement of API specification and then reach the work inspection station where the following activities are carried out: Measurement of circumferential variation at the pipe ends. Diameter tolerances measured from the circumference of each pipe. Arriving at the weight tolerances or length of pipe variation for each pipe. Check on the finished pipe diameters viz., wall thickness, maximum and minimum

diameter. Measurement of edge bevel angle. Inspection of the outer surface of the pipe and weld bead dimensions. Interior inspection of the weld seam and pipe surface.

The pipe, if necessary, passes the customers neutral inspection to undergo similar activities as mentioned in the works inspection station. The pipes are then weighed in electronic weighing machine and rolled out on the discharge skid into the finishing bay for final shipment.

Major facilities in Spiral Pipe Mill


1 Tack Welder 1 No. For welding of coils to coils 2 Welding Machine

a) Internal Welding b) External Welding

8 Nos. For pipe welding

3 End Expander 1 No. - 4 Hydro tester 1 Stn. For Hydro testing of pipes 5 End Beveling 1 Stn. For Beveling Purpose 6 UT for Coil 1 No. For full width coil UT online

EIA REPORT FOR





7 FUT M/c 1 Stn. For Pipe weld UT test 8 X-ray 1 Stn. For radiography test 9 UTS 1 No. For Mechanical properties testing 10 Impact testing 1 No. For Mechanical properties testing 11 Hardness testing M/c 1 No. For Hardness testing 12 Manual UT M/c 1 No. OFF line UT testing 13 Spectrometer 1 No. For chemical properties testing

2.8.5 Calcination Plant

2.8.5.01 General

The lime and dolomite plant will comprise of 2 nos vertical shaft kilns of capacity 350 t/day each for lime calcination and 1 no. vertical shaft kiln of capacity 150 t/day for dolomite calcination.

2.8.5.02 Production Capacity

The lime plant will have the production capacity as given below:

Item Quantity (t/year)

Lime of size 10-55mm for SMS & LF 162010 Undersize Lime for UGML Sinter pant 28590 Calcined Dolomite of size 10-55mm for SMS 44832 Calcined Dolomite fines to sinter plant 7912

2.8.5.03 Technological Parameters

Lime and Dolomite Calcination Unit

i) No. of lime kilns - 2 Nos. ii) Lime Kiln Capacity - 350 tpd iii) No. of Dolomite kiln - 1 No. iv) Dolomite Kiln capacity - 150 tpd v) Kiln feed size, mm - 25-55 vi) Calcination temp. °C - 1050-1150 vii) Fuel to be use - Mix gas (BF+CO) viii) CV of fuel - 1900Kcal/Nm3 ix) Specific consumption of fuel - 920 Kcal/kg of burnt lime & dolomite

EIA REPORT FOR




2.8.5.04 Operating Condition Lime stone/dolomite of size 25-55mm will be charged into vertical shaft kiln for calcination. The undersize (0-25mm) limestone/dolomite in the charge will be separated out before feeding to the kiln. Limestone and dolomite will be subjected for calcination at a temp. 1050-1150°C to achieve soft burnt reactive lime/dolomite for steel making.

2.8.5.05 Requirement of Raw Material

Item Requirement t/yr Lime stone 333550 Dolomite 105488

2.8.5.06 Plant Facilities

Raw material storage building (RMSB) Daybin building (DBB) Vertical shaft kilns for calcining lime stone and dolomite Calcined product building (CPB) Waste gas cleaning systems Weigh hoppers Dedusting systems Blower house Hydraulic room MCC and control room for kiln & transformer room Air conditioning and ventilation facilities Passenger-cum-freight lift

2.8.5.07 Process Flow

Limestone and dolomite of size 25-55mm will be received from mines and stored in raw material storage yard. Limestone and raw dolomite from raw material storage yard will be conveyed to raw material storage building. Material will be extracted from the RMSB bunkers through Vibro-feeders and fed by belt conveyors to the Day bin building (DBB) as per plant requirement. Through screens located on top of DBB, raw materials will be classified as per kiln designer’s specification. Separate bunkers will be provided for different grain fractions. Undersize bunkers will be evacuated periodically and transported to sinter plant. Sized fractions are extracted, weighed and fed to the kiln by skip/vertical conveyor.

EIA REPORT FOR




Limestone and dolomite will be calcined at temperature of 1050-1150°C. Calcined products emerging from the kiln bottom shall be discharged upon belt conveyors and transported to the Calcined Product building (CPB). Screens will be provided on top of the CPB for classification of calcined product into -10mm & +10mm size & stored in separate bunkers in CPB. Lime and dolomite of size 10-55mm will be conveyed to SMS through belt conveyor. Undersize lime and dolomite of size 0-10mm will then be transported to sinter plant. The waste gas, which is coming out from the kiln, will be cleaned in waste gas cleaning system to vent out the clean gas to atmosphere. The dust load at clean gas will be less than 50mg/Nm3. The dust extraction systems will be provided for raw material storage building, day bin building, calcined product building, junction houses and crusher building to keep dust free atmosphere in the lime/dolomite calcinations plant area.

2.8.6 Raw Materials

The annual raw material requirement for the production units / facilities up to 2.0 MTPA is given below:

Gross Annual Raw Material Requirement

Sl. No Raw Material Requirement (in T/yr) Mode of Transport 1. Hot Metal 537,600 Road 2. Pig Iron 50400 Road 3. Slabs 413,044 Road 4. Lime stone 354,740 Rail/Road 5. Dolomite 93,450 Rail/Road 6. DRI 1249293 Rail/Road 7. Scrap 142,348 Rail / Road 8. Zinc 11,190 Road 9. Carbon Powder 5,314 Road 10. HR Coils 115959 Road 11. Calcium Carbide 1,566 Road

DRI is received at the plant through rail or truck. DRI received through wagons will be unloaded manually and transported to DRI storage building through trucks. Also, space provision is kept in the DRI storage building for storage of DRI bags. The above storage shed will be provided with EOT crane along with grab bucket & hook for handling of DRI / DRI bags.

EIA REPORT FOR




Approx. 30 m x 350 m size storage building is envisaged for storage of DRI and 30,000 T of DRI (catering to 15 days requirement) can be stored in the above DRI storage shed. A truck unloading station is proposed with two nos. unloading hoppers along with vibro-feeders mounted below the same. Also, two nos. truck tipplers are envisaged for unloading DRI from trucks. DRI stored in DRI storage building can also be reclaimed using the front end loader and fed to the truck unloading hoppers from ground level. DRI bags stored in DRI storage building will be shifted to truck unloading station using mobile hydra crane and unloaded in unloading hoppers using the crane provided in truck unloading station. DRI will be conveyed to the bunkers in EAF shop from truck unloading station through a system of conveyors. A building of approx. 20 m x 75m size is proposed for storage of lime and dololime bags. Lime and Dololime bags will be unloaded in self discharging container using EOT crane provided in the above building. These self discharging containers will be transported to EAF shop in trucks / trailers and unloaded & discharged into the bunkers using EOT crane in EAF shop. A ferro-alloy storage building of approx. 30 m x 60 m size is proposed for storage of various ferro-alloys. This building will be provided with EOT crane for handling ferro-alloy bags & self discharging containers. Ferro-alloys in self discharging containers will be transported to EAF shop in trucks / trailers and unloaded & discharged into the bunkers using EOT crane in EAF shop. A building of approx. 20m x 60m size is envisaged for storage of scrap. EOT crane with magnet attachment will be provided in the above building for handling scrap.

2.8.7 Compressed Air Plant

In steel plant compressed air will be required for operation and control of various pneumatically operated equipments, instruments, control valves, cleaning of various bag filters, repairs & maintenance works and general purpose cleaning. A separate air compressor station to cater the compressed air requirement for the upcoming SMS, Caster, Bar & Rod mill, new CRM complex, colour coating line and pipe mill of the proposed steel plant expansion.

Design Parameters of Air Compressor Station

To meet the compressed air requirement of various units/subunits of the steel plant expansion, a new compressed air station shall be planned. The details of the same are tabulated below:

EIA REPORT FOR




Air Compressor Station (ACS)

Sl. No. Description Unit Qty Remarks 1. No of centrifugal compressors Nos. 4 3W+1S 2. No. of refrigerant dryers Nos. 4 3W+1S 3. No. of desiccant dryers Nos. 2 1W+1S 4. No. of receivers Nos. 3 5. Under slung crane Nos. 1 6. Total Area Required for ACS m 50m x 16m

Air Compressors Station

The air compressor station will be located in non dusty area common to SMS, Caster and Rolling Mill Complex. The air compressor station building shall be structural building with brick walls up to 3 meters. It caters to the plant air and instrument air requirement of various consumers of respective complex. Air compressor station will house air compressors & dryers. Air receivers & suction filters for centrifugal compressors will be installed out door. For handling in centralised air compressor station during maintenance (only) an under slung crane is envisaged.

Compressed Air Distribution

Dry compressed air will be supplied to all consumers of steel plant through a network of pipelines. The pipelines will be routed overhead along the building columns / walls for in-shop pipelines and on stockades for inter shop pipelines. Isolating valves drain traps and compensators will be provided in pipeline network as per the process requirements. Isolation valves will be provided at the entry of building. Platforms, access ladders, hand railing, etc. will be provided for operation and maintenance of valves, instruments and controls provided in the compressed air pipeline network. Piping layout shall follow good engineering practices.

2.9 POWER REQUIREMENT

The estimated power requirement of the existing & proposed plant is as follows:

A. EXISITNG PLANT

Maximum Demand : 73 MW Annual energy consumption of the Existing plant : 561.0 MU

B. PROPOSED PLANT

Maximum Demand : 78 MW Annual energy consumption of the Proposed plant : 635.0 MU

EIA REPORT FOR




Source of Power The power supply for the proposed expansion project is considered to be drawn from the 220kV MSETCL substation which is approximately 1kM away. The power shall be brought through single circuit overhead line. The bus configuration of main switch yard proposed is two bus with one Main Bus and Transfer Bus.

The power from 220kV MSETCL Substation is considered to be received at Main Receiving Sub-Station (MRSS) within the plant boundary. This 220 kV power supply will be stepped down to 33 kV level at MRSS to meet the power requirements of the plant. 220kV outdoor type air insulated switchyard is planned for 1 Incomer bay, 4 Power Transformer bays & 1 Bus coupler bay. Two nos. of 40MVA, ONAN, 220/34.5kV power transformers & 2 nos. 75/90MVA, ONAN/ONAF, 220/34.5kV power transformers with associated indoor metal clad air insulated 33kV switchboard have been envisaged at MRSS.

Power from 220kV level at MRSS switchyard shall be stepped down to 33kV level, which will serve as primary distribution level in the plant. 33kV will be further stepped down to 6.6kV level at various load block substations (LBSS) to meet the medium voltage requirements at the plant. A number of 33/6.6kV sub-station has been envisaged at different load centers for the above. The LBSS will be connected to the 33 kV switchboard through XLPE cables. LT power requirement shall be met at 415V level by stepping down the power from 6.6kV to 415V as per requirement at respective load centers (LCSS).

2.10 WATER SUPPLY SYSTEM

Source of water UVSL is having a permission for drawl of 3.65 MGD of water from Dham river, for the existing plant. Copy of sanction letter attached at the end of this chapter. The source is located at a distance of 10 km from the existing plant. After consumption of around 2.75 MGD, balance will be utilised for the proposed plant. UVSL to obtain fresh approval for any further additional requirement of water for the proposed facilities from the concerned authorities. Requirement of water The total make-up water requirement for the existing and proposed expansion plant units is estimated as indicated below:

EIA REPORT FOR




WATER REQUIREMENT

Sl. No. Shop/Consumer

Existing- Fresh Make-up water

(m3/ h)

Proposed- Fresh Make-up water

(m3/ h) 1 EAF and LF 180 180 2 Slab caster 150 Billet caster 140 3 Hot Strip mill 90 50 Bar and rod mill 85 4. Cold rolling mill complex

35

Exis

ting

Pickling cold rolling mill CR Trimmer line Galvanizing line Corrugation machine

prop

osed

Pickling 60 cold rolling mill CR Trimmer line Galvanizing line Colour coating Pipe mill

5 Fire water loss 15 15 6 Portable water 50 50

Sub Total 520 580 Total 1100

The specific water consumption after expansion will be 4.22 m3/t. Water conservation schemes In order to conserve water to the maximum possible extent, closed recirculating cooling system have been adopted using re-circulating soft water as the primary cooling media and air or industrial water as secondary cooling media in heat exchangers. For some users, the industrial water will be used directly/ indirectly as primary cooling media. The hot re-circulating industrial water will be cooled in cooling towers. To minimise water loss, blow down from the cooling tower of clean circuit will be fed as make-up to cooling circuit of dirty cycle. Contaminated dirty circuit will comprise necessary pressure filtration system.

Rain water harvesting schemes will be included in the proposed project as part of water conservation measures.

EIA REPORT FOR




Water pollution control system In order to combat the industrial pollution and to comply with the guidelines (CPCB / MPCB norms), treatment units to control water pollution have been considered for the direct cooling water (DCW) circuit and re-circulating industrial water. Major pollutant in DCW circuit are scales in suspension, oil, grease & temperature. Cooling tower has been considered for removing heat from both industrial water & DCW in circulation. For treatment of contaminated DCW, scale pit, oil skimmer, pressure filters, thickener and sludge drying beds have been considered. Filtrate from sludge drying bed will be reused in the system. Dry sludge will be disposed off in a suitable manner. Detailed water balance diagram is enclosed as Fig. No. 2-3.

2.11 FUEL REQUIREMENT

Furnace oil & LDO are the fuel oil used in the plant. Furnace oil storage system is designed to store furnace oil in aboveground vertical tank in dyke with fencing, pump house and unloading areas to cater the requirement of oil in the steel plant. The total consumption of the furnace oil is 3500 kg/hr for RHF. Storage capacity is designed to meet the oil requirement of 10 days for the steel plant. LDO storage system is also designed to store LDO in aboveground vertical tank in dyke with fencing, pump house and unloading areas to cater the requirement of oil in the steel plant. The total consumption of the LDO is 950 kg/hr for Laddle Heating & Caster. Storage capacity is designed to meet the oil requirement of 10 days for the steel plant.

Storage system for FO & LDO consists of the following

Product stored : Furnace oil Storage tank : 2 Nos. Tank Size : 9 m Diameter x 8 m Ht (500 KL) Type : CRVT Product stored : LDO Storage tank : 1 Nos. Tank Size : 7.5 m Diameter x 8 m Ht (250KL) Type : CRVT

The system will be provided with necessary unloading, transfer pumps, with distribution piping network.

EIA REPORT FOR




LPG STORAGE & DISTRUBUTION SYSTEM LPG required for Caster, Continuous Galvanising Line & Colour Coating Line in the steel plant. The estimated total requirement of LPG is 44 Tons/day. LPG will be stored in 3 x 250 MT mounded bullets. Storage capacity is designed to meet the LPG requirement of 15 days for the steel plant. The storage & distribution system will be provided with required no. of unloading units, booster units, vaporization unit and distribution piping network. Energy Balance for the plant is computed and indicated in a Table at the end of this chapter.

2.12 MANPOWER

The requirement of manpower for the proposed new facilities has been estimated to be 764. The estimate covers the top management; middle and junior level executives and other supporting staff. However, the manpower estimate excludes the manpower required for outsourcing of major repair and maintenance jobs of the plant and also does not cover the personnel for township, medical facilities, etc.

2.13 CAPITAL COST Cost of expansion plant is estimated at Rs. 3325.90 crores including foreign exchange component of Rs.475.10 crores.

2.14 DESCRIPTION OF MITIGATION MEASURES INCORPORATED INTO THE PROJECT TO MEET ENVIRONMENTAL STANDARDS AND ENVIRONMENTAL OPERATING CONDITIONS OR OTHER EIA REQUIREMENTS The following mitigation measures have been envisaged for the expansion plant which will meet the relevant environmental standards. Air Pollution Control Measures: The facilities planned for controlling the air pollution are summarised below.

Proposed facilities for control of air pollution

Sl. No.

Shop/ unit No. Proposed facilities

1. Steel melting shop ESP/ Bag filters, gas coolers, and chimney 2. Lime and dolomite Bag filters, cyclone, chimney etc, 3. Reheating furnace of Rolling mill Chimney

EIA REPORT FOR




Water Pollution Control Measures:

The pollutants present in the wastewater will be reduced to acceptable levels by adoption of the following schemes in general:

- Recirculating water in the process whereby the discharge volume is considerably

reduced. - Providing adequate treatment units for removal of the suspended and colloidal

matter. - Neutralization of acidic water by lime. - Removal of oil and grease from the contaminated water by means of oil traps and

skimming devices. - Treatment of faecal sewage in a sewage treatment plant and removal of sludge after

biological treatment.

Waste handling & Noise Control Measures:

Solid waste generated will be reused/sold and rest will be disposed off as per statutory guidelines

Noise level with in the shop will be less than 85 dB (A) at 1 m distance from the source

UVSL is also proposing to install a slag granulation plant and make briquettes or pellets to be used in road laying / paving of areas, which is in practice in some of the east Asian countries.

Many operations in the steel plant will produce objectionable level of noise, which may not be practicable to eliminate entirely, but in most areas it can be brought down to the acceptable level. The major noise generating areas are power and blowing station, compressed air station, oxygen plant, blast furnace plant, steel melting shop, etc. Various measures proposed to reduce the noise pollution include reduction of noise at source, provision of acoustic lagging for the equipment and suction side silencers. Selection of low noise equipment, isolation of noisy equipment from working personnel is planned. In some areas where due to technological process, it is not feasible to bring down the noise level within acceptable limits, personnel working in these areas will be provided with noise reduction aid such as ear muffler and also the duration of exposure of the personnel will be limited as per the norms.

All the emissions / effluent quality parameters will be kept within the stipulated norms. These are being taken as guaranteed parameters with suppliers for ensuring compliance.

2.15 ASSESSMENT OF NEW & UNTESTED TECHNOLOGY FOR THE RISK OF TECHNOLOGICAL FAILURE The technology envisaged for the project is not new and is available & working elsewhere in India / World.

EIA REPORT FOR




Fig. 2.1 LOCATION OF SITE

EIA REPORT FOR




©

Fig. 2-2 : MATERIAL FLOW CHART

EIA REPORT FOR




Fig. 2-3 : WATER BALANCE

EIA REPORT FOR




Energy balance

SL. NO.

UNIT

PRODUCT

ANNUAL PRODUCTION

(T/YR)

ANNUAL HOURS OF

OPERATION (H/YR)

SPECIFIC YIELD / CONSUMPTION

(Gcal/T)

CV (Kcal/kg)

HOURLY FUEL SUPPLY/CONSUMPTION (Gcal/H) FUEL REQUIREMENT IN Kg/Hr

MIX Gas

LPG LDO FURNACE OIL

TOTAL TOTAL Mixed Gas LPG LDO FURNACE OIL

1 SMS- Ladle drier & Tundish

preheating - LDO

LIQUID STEEL 531407.00 7680.00 0.14 10000.00 9.41 9.41 941.03 941.03

2 BAR & Rod MILL

- Reheating furnace - Furnace Oil

Bar & Wire 500000.00 5900.00 0.41 10000.00 34.75 34.75 3474.58 3474.58

3 CALCINED LIME & DOLO PLANT -MIX gas from

UGML

Calcined Lime and Dolo Lime

1200000.00 7920.00 0.47 1900.00 70.45 70.45 37081.34 37081.34

4 Hot Dip

Galvanising Expansion - LPG

Galvinised

Products

232035.00 7680.00 0.39 11900.00 11.78 11.78 990.17 990.17

5 Colour coating facility - LPG

Colour coated sheets

300000.00 7680.00 0.39 11900.00 15.23 15.23 1280.20 1280.20

TOTAL HEAT REQUIREMENT

114.61 43767.32

37081.34 2270.37 941.03 3474.58

EIA REPORT FOR




No : BKS 3886/724-Si.[vy] Irrigation Division Mantralaya, Mumbai – 400 032 Date : 28th August 1986 Intimation :=-

Subject :- Regarding sanctioning use of water for proposed strip rolling Complex at Wardha Integrated Steel Limited

Orders are given to me to intimate the Chief Engineer, Irrigation Division, Amravati

regarding Government intimation No BKS 3886/197-Si.[p] dated 17/6/86 and regarding M/s Uttam Galva metallics Ltd Integrated Steels Limited’s letter No SRC/Water/86/195 dated 27/6/86 (Copy is attached alongwith this) that –

Govt has accorded its approval that instead of yearly 2.555 tenlakhscubicmetre water supply sanctioned earlier to M/s Integrated Steels Limited for their proposed Steel Rolling Complex at Wardha now yearly 3.65 tenlakhs cubicmetre (at the rate of per day 10,000 cu.m.) water supply from time to time from Unneyi weir will be let in the weir of Maharashtra Industrial Development Board at Pavnar step by step subject to all the terms of the Government Works. In the said matter to proceed further as per the prevailing rules.

As per the order and ………. of the Governer of Maharashtra

Sd/- [S.S. Shinde]

Government’s Upper Secretary Copy alongwith above copies of letter to Superintendent Engineer, Wardha Irrigation Board, Wardha Executive Engineer, Wardha Irrigation Division Wardha For information and for all necessary ……… Copy to Si [vy] for records

EIA REPORT FOR



© 2015 MECON Limited. All rights reserved 3 - 1

3.0 DESCRIPTION OF THE ENVIRONMENT

3.1 INTRODUCTION

3.1.1 General

EIA is the most important aspect of overall environment management strategy. EIA needs a datum on which the prediction can be done. Information on the existing baseline environmental status is essential for assessing the likely environmental impacts of the proposed expansion project. For studying the existing baseline environmental status the following basic steps are required:

Delineation of project site and study area. Delineation of the environmental components and methodology Delineation of study period. Delineation of the location of proposed Steel Plant and description of its

surroundings based on secondary data.

After delineation of the above for the present case the following studies were conducted:

Baseline data generation / establishment of baseline for different environmentalcomponents

3.1.2 Project Site and Study Area

The area where the proposed expansion plant activities will be concentrated is designated as the project site or core zone. The study area or buffer zone for the present study is taken as 10km radius around the proposed expansion plant site. The location of the core zone & buffer zone is marked in Drg. No. MEC/Q725/11/S2/01.

3.1.3 Environmental Components and Methodology

The environmental components studied and methodologies followed for the preparation of EIA report are given in Table 3.1a.

3.1.4 Study Period

The baseline environmental data generation and other field studies for the preparation of Environmental Impact Assessment were completed in 2013 (Continuously for 13 weeks) during summer season.

EIA REPORT FOR




Table 3.1a: Environmental Components and Methodologies Adopted For the Study

3.1.5 Location of the Steel Plant and its Surroundings

The proposed site is located at Bhugaon- Barbadi- Selukate in Wardha district of Maharastra state between latitude 20°42'37” N and longitude 78°37'32” E. The State highway No. SH-243 joining Wardha and Vaygaon passes about 2 km away from site on the West side. The site is approximately 5 km South of Wardha Town. The Wardha railway station of central railway is located 7 km from the site. The site is at an elevation varying from 270 to 280 m above MSL. The total plant area is 220 hectare and proposed expansion will be done in existing spare land of 105 hectare. No national park, wildlife sanctuary, tiger reserve or biosphere reserve is located within 10 Km distance. The district of Wardha forms the western part of the Nagpur plains or the Wardha-Wainganga basin. The ' Payanghat' or the Berar plains adjoins it to the west, while the scarps of the Satpudas rise sharply to its immediate north. The entire district lies in the valley of the Wardha river on its left bank and is enclosed by it on three sides. The district occupies more or less a central position in the Vidarbha or the Nagpur division of the State. It is bounded on the west and north by the Amravati district, on the south by Yeotmal district, on the southeast by Chandrapur district and on the east by Nagpur district. The entire district falls within the Wardha drainage; it naturally divides itself into two parts, the north and northeast forming a hilly spur projecting south and southeastwards from the Satpudas, while the southern parts form an undulating plain and broad valley floor dissected by streams and dotted with a few residual hillocks rising from the valley floor. The general slope is southwards and gentle towards the Wardha river in the south, but tends to become steeper in the northern uplands. The entire district falls within the drainage basin of the Wardha and one of its larger tributaries, the Wunna.

The district, smallest in the State, is agriculturally very productive and its prosperity is mainly based upon agricultural income, especially cotton and wheat. However, the agricultural economy is based essentially upon the single kharif crop and is mostly rain-

SN Area Environmental Components

Parameters Methodology*

1

Study Area Air Meteorology Field Monitoring Ambient Air Quality (prescribed

parameters by CPCB). Noise Levels

2 Study Area Water Water Quality Ground (parameters as per IS: 10500) Surface ( parameters as per IS: 10500)

Field Monitoring

3 Study Area Soil Soil Quality (Physico-chemical characteristics)

Field Monitoring

4 Study Area Ecological Features Flora & Fauna Field Study / Secondary Data 5 Study Area Geology & Hydrology Formation of rocks

Water use and impact Field Monitoring / Secondary Data

* Detailed in respective sections

EIA REPORT FOR




fed. The yields are fair, compared to State average. At present, irrigation is only rudimentary although measures are afoot to increase area under irrigation. True industrialisation is yet to take root in the district. Only agro-industries based upon cotton, sunflower, wheat, oranges and bananas can be developed to some extent.

There are 22 big & medium industries within 10 km radius of the proposed expansion project. Some of the major industries are listed below:

1. Uttam Galva Metallics , Bhugaon, Wardha Rolled steel products2. Pee Vee Textile Limited N.H No. 7, Jam,

SamudrapurArtificial staple fibers

3. R.S.R. Mohata Weaving Mills LimitedHinganghat, Wardha

Cotton yarn

4. Bapurao Deshmukh SugarFactory Limited, Wela, Hinganghat

Sugar

5. Gimatex Industries Pvt. LimitedHinganghat, Wardha

Viscons, Polyster & cotton yarn

6. Lanco Vidarbha Thermal Power LimitedMandua, Seloo, Wardha

2x660 MW coal based power plant

The climate of this district is characterised by a hot summer and general dryness throughout the year except during the southwest monsoon season. The year may be divided into four seasons. The winter is from December to February. The hot season is from March to the middle of June. This is followed by the southwest monsoon season which extends upto the first week of October. The rest of October and November constitute the post monsoon season.The annual rainfall in the district was between 900 and 1400 mm (35.43" and 55.12") in 37 years in the fifty year period.

Temperatures increase steadily from about the beginning of March. May is the hottest month of the year with the mean daily maximum temperature at about 42°C and the mean daily minimum, at about 28°C. With the onset of the southwest monsoon by about the middle of June, there is an appreciable drop in day temperatures and the weather becomes pleasant. With the withdrawal of the southwest monsoon by about the first week of October the day temperatures increase slightly and there is a secondary maximum in day temperatures in October. The night temperatures, however, decrease progressively after September. After October both day and night temperatures decrease rapidly till the end of December, which is the coldest month with the mean daily maximum temperature at about 28°C and the mean daily-minimum at about 15°C .

The air is generally dry over the district except during the southwest monsoon season when the humidities are generally above 70 per cent. The summer months are the driest when the relative humidity goes down to about 20 per cent in the afternoons. Winds are generally light to moderate with some strengthening in force during the latter part of the hot season and during the southwest monsoon season. In the post-monsoon and cold seasons winds blow mainly from directions between north and east. In the summer season wind directions are variable, winds from the southeast and east being the least common. During southwest monsoon season winds blow mostly from directions between southwest and northwest.

EIA REPORT FOR




As per IMD's climatological data monitored at Wardha during 1966 to 1990, the seasonal temperature varies from 7.0°C to 48.4°C. The humidity of the region varies from 41 - 58%. The average rainfall in the region is 1048 mm. The South –West monsoon contributes nearly total rainfall in the area. Annually the predominant wind directions are shown in Table 3.1b.

Table 3.1b: Pattern of Annual Winds in Study Area

Wind N NE E SE S SW W NW Calm Annual % Frequency 8.5 14 11.5 5 3.0 12.5 19.5 12.5 13.5 Predominance Sequence 6th 2nd 5th 7th 8th 4th 1st 3rd

3.2 BASELINE DATA GENERATION/ESTABLISHMENT OF BASELINE FOR

ENVIRONMENTAL COMPONENTS In order to get an idea about the existing state of the environment, various environmental attributes such as meteorology, air quality, water quality, soil quality and noise level were studied/monitored in core as well as buffer zones of 10 km radius around the proposed plant expansion area. Baseline data was generated by M/s Nilawar Laboratories, Nagpur. Besides additional data/information regarding water availability, ecology and demographic pattern conditions were collected from various central and state government agencies.The present report covers environmental data generated during 15th March 2013 to 12th June 2013 in respect of above for the expansion project. Details of Environmental Attributes & Frequency of Monitoring are explained below:

EIA REPORT FOR




ENVIRONMENTAL ATTRIBUTES AND FREQUENCY OF MONITORING

Sr. No.

Environmental Component

Sampling Locations Sampling Parameters

Total Sampling

Period Sampling Frequency Detection Limit Methodology

1. Meteorology One Central location

Wind Speed, Wind Direction

3 months Hourly WS: +/- 1 m/sec WD: +/- 3 degrees

The meteorology parameters were recorded using continuous recording meteorological instrument of Davis Instrument, Hayward, California (Model No. - Vantage Pro2TM) for wind speed, wind direction, temperature, relative humidity & rain fall.

Rainfall, Cloud Cover 3 months Daily RF: 0.2 mm Temperature and Relative Humidity

3 months Twice & Thrice Daily

Temp: +/- 0.5°C RH: +/- 3%

2. Ambient AirQuality

Nine locations

PM10, PM2.5, SO2, NOX, O3, CO, NH3, C6H6, B(α)P, Haevy Metal e.g. Lead, Arsenic Nickel, Hg & Free

Silica

Two days per week for 13

weeks

24 hourly PM10: 5 μg/m3 PM2.5: 5 μg/m3 SO2: 4 μg/m3

NOX: 10 μg/m3 O3: 4 μg/m3

CO: 57 μg/m3 NH3: 0.075 μg/m3

C6H6: 0.319 μg/m3 B(α)P: 1 ng/ m3

Lead: 0.007 µg/ m3 Arsenic: 0.007 µg/ m3 Nickel: 0.007 µg/ m3

Gravimetric method for PM10 and PM2.5 particulates. Modified West & Gaeke method for SO2 (IS-5182 part-II 1969) using Tetrachloro mercurate. Jacob-Hochheiser method (IS-5182 part-IV 1975) for NOX using Sodium Arsenate 0.01 N absorbing solution.

3. Water Quality 08 Surface &08 Ground

water locations

As per IS -10500:2012 for ground water &

surface water samples

Grab sampling

Once during study period

EC: 1 μS/cm TSS/TDS: 0.5 mg/l

DO: 0.5 mg/l BOD: 1.0 mg/l COD: 5 mg/l

As per IS & APHA methods. The odour, taste, pH, conductivity & temperature were analysed at

site and rest of parameters were analysed at M/s Nilawar Laboratories - Nagpur.

4. Noise Eight locations

Ld, Ln & Ldn 24 hourly composite


SPL: 0.1 dB(A) Integrated on hourly basis.

5. Soil Four locations

Physical and Chemical constituents, Suitability for agricultural growth

Composite sample


EC: 1 μS/cm N, P, K: 0.1 mg/kg

Analysis was carried out as per IS 2720 Soil chemical analysis.

EIA REPORT FOR




3.2.1 Meteorology

Meteorology plays a very important role in the environmental impacts of industrial project. Meteorological conditions govern the dispersion (and hence dilution) of air pollutants. Hence Meteorological studies form an integral part of environmental impact assessment studies.

The Central Monitoring Station (CMS) equipped with continuous monitoring equipment was installed at site plant guest house at a height of about 10 m above ground level to record wind speed, wind direction, temperature, relative humidity & rain fall. The meteorological monitoring station was located in such a way that it is free from any obstructions.

The continuous recording meteorological instrument of Davis Instrument, Hayward, California (Model No. - Vantage Pro2TM) has been used for recording the data of wind speed, wind direction, temperature, relative humidity & rain fall. The accuracy of the equipment is as given below:

ACCURACY OF METEOROLOGICAL EQUIPMENT

Sr. No. Sensor Accuracy1. Wind speed Sensor ± 1 m/s 2. Wind direction Sensor ± 3 degrees 3. Temperature Sensor ± 0.5°C

One hour’s values of wind speed, wind direction, temperature, relative humidity and rainfall were recorded continuously with monitoring equipment. All the sensors were connected to the filter and then logged on to datalogger. The readings were recorded in a memory module, which was attached to datalogger. The memory module was down loaded in computer through WeatherLink software.

During the sampling period hourly wind speed and wind directions were recorded. The results of wind speed and 16 wind directions are depicted in the Fig.- 3.1 as wind rose.

EIA REPORT FOR




Fig. 3.1: Wind-Rose at Wardha during Summer: Day & Night (Overall)

It was observed that about 9.0 % of total time, the wind was calm i.e. the speed was less than 1 km/hr. The predominant wind directions were from W (21.6%), NW (14.5%) and SW (12.9%). Average wind speed was 5.9 km/hr and most of the time wind speed was between 1 to 5 km/hr.

The minimum and maximum values for Temperature and Humidity observed during monitoring period are presented in Fig.3.2 and 3.3.

EIA REPORT FOR




Fig.3.2: Temperature variations during study period

Fig.3.3: Relative humidity variations during study period

It has observed that the temperature varied between a minimum of 21.4°C to a maximum of 46.8°C indicating significant temperature differences. Relative humidity was in the range of 17 to 48%. The observed value of Relative humidity indicates moist weather. No rain fall was observed during monitoring period.

EIA REPORT FOR




Thermal Inversion Frequency

Ground based inversions were collected from IMD publications for Nagpur to have an idea about the dilution of pollutants in the area and are given below:

Months Ground level inversions in %5.30 17.30

January 31 4 February 25 1 March 26 2 April 19 3 May 14 3 June 4 2 July 5 2 August 3 1 September 11 3 October 23 1 November 30 2 December 31 1

3.2.2 Ambient Air

General

In order to evaluate the resultant air quality around the expansion project site, it is necessary to determine the existing air quality in terms of Respirable Particulate Matter (PM-10), PM-2.5 , Sulphur–di–oxide (SO2), Oxides of Nitrogen (NOx), Carbon Monoxide (CO). Accordingly these parameters were monitored at selected Ambient Air Quality (AAQ) monitoring stations.

Selection of Monitoring Stations

For locating the ambient air quality (AAQ) monitoring stations, the evaluation area may be considered a circle of radius 50 times the maximum stack height. Since the maximum stack height for the proposed expansion project is 120 m, the evaluation area is a circle of radius 6.0 km. However, as the project site is large, so to have a conservative approach the monitoring stations has been fixed in a radius of 10km around the proposed expansion plant taking mid point of project site as centre.

To select the locations of the ambient air quality monitoring stations, information published by India Meteorological Department (IMD) was used. The IMD observatory nearest to plant site is at Nagpur about 70 km from the project site.

The main objective of AAQ data generation / establishment of baseline for AAQ is to assess the future scenario of the surrounding environment by superimposing the predicted pollution levels on the existing pollution levels. Thus it will be possible to

EIA REPORT FOR




identify the location where maximum concentrations of pollutants are likely to occur due to emissions from the proposed expansion plant. The location of AAQ stations were finalised with the help of screening models, which were run with actual source inventory and meteorological data. The predominant wind direction of nearest IMD observatory at Nagpur was identified with the help of wind frequencies. The predominant annual wind frequencies of Nagpur are W (19.5%), NE (14.0%), NW (12.5%) and SW (12.5%).

The locations of AAQ stations are given in Table 3.2. The AAQ stations were located in the upwind and downwind direction of annual winds with respect the proposed expansion plant site and by considering the additional points mentioned below:

1. Location of AAQ stations within 10 km radius around the proposed expansion plant.2. Approachability to and habitation near the monitoring stations.

Table 3.2: Location of AAQ Monitoring Stations

Sr. No.

Description of monitored stations

Sample code

Distance from proposed plant

expansion

Direction Remark

1. Plant Gate A-1 Within Core zone 2. China Colony A-2 2.0 km NW Upwind 3. Bapukuti Sewagram Area A-3 7.0km NE Downwind 4. Mandavgarh Village A-4 3.5km E Downwind 5. Bhugaon Village A-5 2.0km S Downwind 6. Kurjhadi Village A-6 8.0km SW Upwind 7. Salod Village A-7 10.0km WNW Upwind 8. Borgaon Village A-8 6.0km NW Upwind 9. Wardha (Anand Nagar) A-9 7.0km NNW Upwind

Methodology

As per the CPCB guidelines on methods of monitoring & analysis, 9 (nine) AAQ monitoring stations were selected. These stations are marked in Drg. No. MEC/Q725/11/S2/01.

Ambient air quality (AAQ) samples were collected on basis of 24-hour sampling and twice a week at each site. The ambient air quality samples were collected for continuous 13-weeks beginning from 15th March-2013 to 12th June-2013. The samples were preserved and analyzed as per the standard methods recommended by Standard Operating Procedure (SOPs) of Central Pollution Control Board (CPCB 2011). Ozone (O3) and Carbon Monoxide (CO) were monitored by randomly collecting the gas through one hour sampling procedure. Samples for Ammonia (NH3) were randomly monitored for its presence.

The methods of sample collection, equipment used and analysis procedure as followed are given in Table 3.3.

EIA REPORT FOR




Table 3.3: Methodology of Sampling and Analysis for AAQ Monitoring

Sr. No. Parameter Technique Technical

Protocol Minimum

Detectable Limit (μg)

1. PM10 APM 550 - Dust Sampler (Gravimetric Method)

IS-5182 (part-IV) 5.0 μg/m3

2. PM2.5 APM 550 - Dust Sampler (Gravimetric Method)

IS-5182 (part-IV) 5.0 μg/m3

3. Sulphur dioxide APM 433 - Gaseous Sampler (Chemical Absorption)

IS-5182 (Part-II) 4.0 μg/m3

4. Oxides of Nitrogen

APM 433 - Gaseous Sampler (Chemical Absorption)

IS-5182 (Part-VI) 10.0 μg/m3

5. Carbon Monoxide CO Analyser IS-5182

(Part-22) 57 μg/m3

6. Ozone APM 433 - Gaseous Sampler (Chemical Absorption) IS-5182 2.0 ppb

7. Other Gaseous samples [NH3, Benzene & B(α)P]

Low volume sampling pump connected to Adsorption Tube / Tedlar bags

USEPA method TO-1 or TO-2

0.1 ppb

8. Heavy Metals [Lead, Arsenic & Nickel]

APM 550 - Dust Sampler (AAS Method) IS-5182 0.1 ppb

Results of Ambient Air Quality

The summarised AAQ results are given in Tables 3.4a & 3.4b. The results have been compared with Central Pollution Control Board (CPCB) norms.

Table 3.4a: Summarised Results of AAQ Monitoring during summer around Wardha

Parameters Results (µg/m 3) Plant Gate

(A1) China Colony

(A2)

Bapukuti Sewagram Area (A3)

Mandavgarh Village (A4)

Bhugaon Village

(A5)

Kurjhadi Village

(A6)

Salod Village

(A7)

Borgaon Village (A8)

Wardha (Anand

Nagar) (A9) PM -10 Max 70.3 63.8 62.6 63.8 66.3 53.4 62.8 69.2 77.2

Min. 59.8 50.2 40.5 51.8 53.5 44.5 48.8 58.6 58.4 C98 70.1 63.2 59.2 62.6 66.2 52.8 62.4 68.4 76.4 Avg. 65.1 57.0 50.5 59.5 59.9 49.1 56.2 63.3 68.7

PM -2.5 Max 42.6 43.7 22.4 24.6 34.5 21.4 26.4 33.4 38.9 Min. 32.6 36.9 14.6 18.1 26.5 16.5 17.6 24.9 26.5 C98 42.2 42.9 21.9 24.4 32.9 21.2 24.6 31.4 37.4 Avg. 38.3 40.6 18.5 21.5 30.3 18.6 21.4 28.0 32.6

SO2 Max 19.6 16.7 13.1 10.4 17.6 11.8 11.3 13.8 18.6 Min. 15.4 13.2 8.6 7.2 13.6 8.9 8.6 10.2 14.8 C98 19.2 16.3 12.9 10.1 17.2 11.4 11.2 13.6 18.2 Avg. 17.2 15.1 11.3 8.7 15.8 10.1 10.0 12.1 16.6

NOX Max 35.4 26.4 28.0 22.4 33.9 23.3 21.3 30.1 36.9 Min. 18.3 15.9 11.6 10.4 18.4 11.0 10.9 13.4 17.4

EIA REPORT FOR





(A1) China Colony

(A2)



Bhugaon Village

(A5)

Kurjhadi Village

(A6)

Salod Village

(A7)


Wardha (Anand

Nagar) (A9) C98 30.8 24.3 24.8 20.2 31.6 21.2 21.1 28.3 34.9 Avg. 23.6 19.7 18.7 15.1 24.8 15.9 14.9 19.4 26.4

CO Max 2162 1362 1264 1518 1432 1358 1643 1431 1649 Min. 1352 896 892 627 856 862 762 852 984 C98 1961 1230 1165 1245 1324 1159 1365 1354 1411 Avg. 1696 1087 1071 993 1123 1053 1183 1138 1238

O3 Max 41.0 40.0 43.2 53.2 41.5 42.3 42.8 40.9 41.3 Min. 27.2 27.4 29.7 29.9 28.5 28.2 28.4 26.7 28.0 C98 40.0 37.6 43.1 53.0 41.3 42.1 42.7 40.8 41.2 Avg. 34.1 33.7 36.4 41.5 35.0 35.2 35.6 33.8 34.6

NH3 Max 12.6 11.8 12 11.4 11.2 9.2 10.2 10.8 13.4 Min. 6.5 4.2 3.9 3.4 5.6 1.4 2.6 4.7 6.5 C98 11.6 10.8 11.6 11.0 10.4 8.4 10.5 10.5 12.8 Avg. 8.9 7.7 7.9 6.7 8.2 4.8 6.1 7.2 9.4

Pb Max 0.046 0.032 BDL BDL 0.03 BDL BDL 0.031 0.052 Min. 0.016 0.014 BDL BDL 0.014 BDL BDL 0.014 0.016 C98 0.045 0.031 BDL BDL 0.024 BDL BDL 0.028 0.048 Avg. 0.0 0.0 BDL BDL 0.0 BDL BDL 0.0 0.0

As ng/m 3

Max 1.24 1.09 BDL BDL 1.2 BDL BDL 1.21 1.64 Min. 0.43 0.36 BDL BDL 0.38 BDL BDL 0.45 0.48 C98 1.23 1.06 BDL BDL 1.16 BDL BDL 1.06 1.56 Avg. 0.82 0.69 BDL BDL 0.8 BDL BDL 0.8 1.0

Ni ng/m 3


BaP Max ND ND ND ND ND ND ND ND ND Min. ND ND ND ND ND ND ND ND ND C98 ND ND ND ND ND ND ND ND ND Avg. ND ND ND ND ND ND ND ND ND

Benzene Max ND ND ND ND ND ND ND ND ND Min. ND ND ND ND ND ND ND ND ND C98 ND ND ND ND ND ND ND ND ND Avg. ND ND ND ND ND ND ND ND ND

BDL = Below detection limit ND = Not Detected

EIA REPORT FOR




Table 3.4b: Average AAQ Monitored Values during Summer Season as Compared with CPCB Norms

AAQ Station/ CPCB Standards Ambient Air Quality PM-10 (µg/m3)

PM- 2.5 (µg/m3)

SO2 (µg/m3)

NOX (µg/m3)

CO* (µg/m3)

Plant Gate (A1) 65.1 38.3 17.2 23.6 1696 China Colony(A2) 57.0 40.6 15.1 19.7 1087 Bapukuti Sewagram Area(A3) 50.6 18.5 11.3 18.7 1071 Mandavgarh Village(A4) 59.5 21.5 8.7 15.1 993 Bhugaon Village(A5) 59.9 30.3 15.8 24.8 1123 Kurjhadi Village(A6) 49.1 18.6 10.1 15.9 1053 Salod Village(A7) 56.2 21.4 10.0 14.9 1183 Borgaon Village(A8) 63.3 28.0 12.1 19.4 1138 Wardha (Anand Nagar) (A9) 68.7 32.6 16.6 26.4 1238 Industrial, Residential, Rural and other area (24hr./*1hr.Av)

100 60 80 80 4000

Note: 24/8 hourly values should be met 98% of the time in a year. However 2% of the time it may exceed but not on 2 consecutive days; * 1 Hour

On the basis of monitored values it may be concluded that the area under study meet NAAQ standards for PM-10, PM-2.5, SO2, NOX and CO.

Chemical characterization of RSPM as well as PAH in SPM were collected in locations A2, A5 and A8 for important parameters and the results are given in Table 3.4c.

Table 3.4c: Report on analysis of PAH and Characterisation of RSPM

Sl. No

Parameters China Colony (A2)

Bhugaon Village (A5)


Norms

01 Calcium 1.68 2.94 1.86 NS 02 Magnesium 1.32 1.81 0.87 NS 03 Flouride BDL BDL BDL NS 04 Mercury BDL BDL BDL NS 05 Sulphate 0.41 1.42 0.62 NS 06 Benzo-a-pyrene BDL BDL* BDL* 10 ng/m3

DETECTION LIMIT: F= 10 µg/m3, Hg = 0.02 µg/m3 & Benzo-a-pyrene = 1 ng/m3

All values have units µg/m3 except Benzo-a-pyrene. * Sample analysed for Benzo-a-pyrene using HPLC method as per CPCB.

EIA REPORT FOR




Noise

Selection of Monitoring Locations

A total of six noise monitoring stations were selected to cover all type of areas as given in Table 3.5.

Table 3.5 : Noise Monitoring Locations

Sr. No.

Description of monitored stations

Sample code

Distance from proposed plant

expansion

Direction Type of area

1. Plant Gate N-1 Within - Industrial 2. China Colony N-2 2.0 km NW Industrial3. Bapukuti Sewagram Area N-3 7.0km NE sensitive

4. Mandavgarh Village N-4 3.5km E Residential

5. Bhugaon Village N-5 2.0km S Residential

6. Kurjhadi Village N-6 8.0km SW Residential

7. Salod Village N-7 10.0km WNW Residential

8. Borgaon Village N-8 6.0km NW Residential

9. Wardha (Anand Nagar) N-9 7.0km NNW commercial

Methodology

To have an idea of the present background noise level of the project site, a detailed measurement of noise level was carried out at 9 locations once during the monitoring period. Precision integrated sound level meter (type 2221 of Bruel & Kjaer of Denmark) was used for measurement of noise level for the study. The measurements were carried out for 24 hours. Hourly readings were recorded by the operating instrument for 15–20 minutes in each hour at one-hour intervals in which leq. dB(A) have been measured.

Results

The results of ambient noise monitoring are given in Table 3.6. The results have been compared with MOE&F norms (Noise (Regulation & Control) Rules, 2000) given in Table 3.7. The result shows that at all locations, the noise levels are below the norm for residential areas.

Table 3.6 : Results of Noise Monitoring

Stn No.

Location Day (0600-2200 hr.) Night (2200-0600 hr.) Max. Min. Mean* Max Min Mean*

N1 Plant Gate 56.8 37.5 52.4 51.6 44.2 49.2 N2 China Colony 53.5 36.2 47.9 44.9 39.9 41.9 N3 Bapukuti Sewagram Area 47.2 37.6 43.4 41.7 37.6 40.3 N4 Mandavgarh Village 46.2 36.0 42.6 41.4 39.0 40.2 N5 Bhugaon Village 52.5 38.5 48.3 46.6 41.2 44.7

EIA REPORT FOR




Stn No.

Location Day (0600-2200 hr.) Night (2200-0600 hr.) Max. Min. Mean* Max Min Mean*

N6 Kurjhadi Village 45.7 37.0 42.6 42.0 39.5 42.0 N7 Salod Village 56.8 39.9 51.6 48.7 40.2 42.0 N8 Borgaon Village 46.9 39.9 44.3 41.0 39.9 42.0 N9 Wardha (Anand Nagar) 55.0 40.5 50.6 45.4 40.6 42.0 Day - 0600 to 2200 hrs.; Night - 2200 to 0600 hrs.; All values in dB(A); * Logarithmic Averages.

Table 3.7: Ambient Air Quality Norms in Respect of Noise

Type of Area Day (0600-2200 hrs) Night (2200-0600 hrs) Industrial Area. Commercial Area. Residential Area. Silence zone.

75 65 55 50

70 55 45 40

All values in dB (A)

3.2.3 Geology

The major part of the district is underlain by Deccan lava flows of upper cretaceous to Eocene age, whereas Alluvium is restricted along the banks of Wardha river and Yashoda river. Deccan trap basalt represents a thick pile of nearly horizontal flows within these piles seven flows have been deciphered down to the depth of 120m.

The study area of Inzapur is covered under Chikhli formation Sahayadri group. The rock type composition represents volcanic formation of horizontally bedded basaltic igneous rock of deccan trap. The geological age extending from late cretaceous to paleogene. The nature & charecteristic of rocks area dark grey, fine grained with compact and massive clinkery surface.

The maximum and minimum altitude of 355m and 241 m is observed in the south west and south part of the study area respectively. The surface contours reveals the slope is very gentle and towards southern part of the study area. There are several discontinued hill ranges, have been identitfied and there are characterized basaltic rock and their maximum altitude 355m is observed at south western part of the study area. Barring these hillocks the core zone area is represented by flat topography sloping towards north east.

In order to understand underground features like major fault, lineaments, drainge pattern and signatures of various physical charecters which are very usefull in groundwater studies, a satellite view of the study area has been taken out from Google Earth and the same is shown below. From the imageries it can be seen that the study area is drainned by river Wardha and flow towards west w.r.t to the proposed site.

EIA REPORT FOR




Satellite view of the site at 35,000m altitude

The picture also reveals that the green patches around the sites indicate that the portion falls under agriculture land. The relatively lighter green tones indicates either fallow land/ or hillock/urban area. It also indicates presence of shallow soil depth below the earth. The closer view of the satellite imageries indicates that there are several drainge markings arising from the site and merged into the river. These lineaments are indicating existence of fault and availability of groundwater in the fractured zone. On observing the drainge pattern of the area, it corroborates that the area is marked by dentritic pattern of drainage and uniformity in occurrence of soil cover. The satellite picture also reveals that uniformity in erosion and gentle slope towards south. No major fault or no major geological features like fractures are observed from the satellite imageries which may cause for earth quack or land slides

The geology of Wardha district basically consists of Deccan Trap lava flows with some patches of Gondwana formations, Lametas and the alluvium along the major river courses. This lava flows in entire area of the district in 400 meter depth. It can be easily found by comparing the difference between minimum MSL height of highest and lowest surface area of North -East part of the district. The well developed sequences of the rock lower Permian to recent age is seen in the ditrict. The basement rocks are over lained by upper cretaceous and by recent alluvium. The geologic map of the Wardha district area has been shown below. The geologic sucession of the study area is detailed below.

EIA REPORT FOR




AGE FORMATION LITHOLOGY Recent Alluvium Silt, sand and gravels Upper Cretaceous To Eocene Deccan Trap Massive and vesicular basalt Upper Cretaceous Lameta Group Sandstone and Limestone Carboniferous to Lower Permian Gondwana Super Group

The sedimentary rocks of the Gondwana Super Group are seen to occur as inlayers in the eastern extremity of the district. A small patch of Lametas occur in the east - southeast art of the district. The Deccan Traps cover about 95% of the area and comprise rocks of basaltic composition. The alluvial deposits are restricted to the banks of the Wardha river and it’s tributaries. The thickness is reported to be 15-20m. The prominent trend of lineaments is NW-SE. The Wardha and Pothara rivers seem to be structurally controlled; there is a probable ENE-WSW shear zone south of Hinganghat.

The various landforms in the district are of three types : Structural, Denudational and Fluvial. Dissected Basaltic Plateau (Highly, Moderately or Slightly Dissected) is a major geomorphic unit and characterised by flat topped hills, terraced features. Denudational hills comprise Gondwana group of rocks and occur as low relief hills east of Samudrapur. Alluvial plains along the river Wardha and it’s tributaries are gently sloping.

Site

EIA REPORT FOR




It also reveals that the recent alluvium does not have average distribution in either way. (ie in horizontally and vertically).

Site specific geology and petrography

The study area of Inzapur is covered under Chikhli formation Sahayadri group. The rock type composition represents volcanic formation of horizontally bedded basaltic igneous rock of Deccan trap. The geological age extending from late cretaceous to paleogene. The nature & characteristic of rocks area dark grey, fine grained with compact and massive clinkery surface.

The classification of the samples obtained from site bores and pits indicates the following soil stratification.

Layer Stratum Depth from GL Top layer Clayey soil Min.0.1m to max. 0.5m Second layer Highly weathered Basalt Min GL Max. up to 2 m Third layer Weathered Basalt with boulders Min GL Max. up to 2 m Fourth layer Fractured Basalt Min. 3m Max. up to 6 m Fifth layer Basalt rock Min. 6m Max. up to 7 m

Degree of weathering and fractured nature of rock shows variations. This has resulted in difference in core recovery and rock quality designation. The petrological characteristics of the rock area as follows:

Geological properties Results Texture Compact Structure Homogeneous Composition Non calcareous Colour Blackish/dark grey colour Grain size Fine grained Petrography Plagioclase Feldspar, Quartz Geological name of the rock Basalt (Igneous rock)

Lithology of the site

A geotechnical survey has been carried out to find out the rock bearing capacity of the site. About 30 boreholes have been drilled at the proposed sites. The lithogy as occurred at the site has been shown below.

EIA REPORT FOR




From the litholog it can be seen that the proposed site located on a thin soil cap ranges from 0.25m to maximum of 2m.The soil cover underlain by weathered basalt rock which is in the range of 1.5 to 6m. Below 6m fresh basalt rocks are occurring.

Hydrology

In-order to understand the hydro geology of the area, hydrology of the area is to be studied which is having direct bearing on the under groundwater. Hence a detailed study has been carried out and the results are enumerated in the subsequent paragraphs.

The study area forms a part of Dham river sub basin except few sq.km of south of the study area which falls in the catchment area of Yashoda nadi. The northern part of study area is mainly drained by Dham river and flows north west to south east at 10 km from the site. Whereas the Yashoda nadi flows in the southern part of the study area and drains the southern part of the study area. The eastern part of the study area is drained by Bhadadi nadi which is a tributary of Yashoda nadi. Both the rivers are NW to SE indicating lineaments in northwest and south east. Other than these rivers no noteworthy streams are indentified in the study area. Dentritic pattern of drainage is recorded in the study area.

The proposed plant area drains into Dham river through a unnamed minor stream. This stream joins into Dham river in the eastern direction. Similarly western portion of the study is also witnessed by dentritic pattern of drainage and joins Bhadadi nadi. The confluence point of Bhadadi nadi with Yashoda nadi occurs at about 11 km in southwest direction and then the water flows towards south east.

The entire area of corezone is devoid of any stream but few initial stage drainage impressions are observed and the lenth of the drainage at proposed site will be about 0.5 km in length.

EIA REPORT FOR




Hydrometeorology:

The climate of the district is chracterised by a hot summer and general dryness throughout the year except during south west monsoon season i.e., June to September. The mean minimum temperature is 12.1°C and mean maximium temperature is 42.8°C.

The average rainfall varies from 985 mm to 1100 mm. The average annual rainfall progressively increases from western to south eastern part of the district. The average annual rainfall of ten years in the district varies from 832.4 mm to 1131.48 mm.

Soil type

The soil type of the study area derived from Deccan trap Basalt and almost entire district consist of black or dark brown soil over a sheet of Deccan trap Basalt. The soil varies in depth from few centimeters to 3 m with average thickness being about 0.75m. The soils of the district can be grouped under four main local categories viz., Kali, Morand, Khardi and Bardi. The proposed site is covered under caly (kali) soil.

Water shed & drainage:

The study area (10 km radius) drains in to two rivers. The proposed site and northern part of the study area falls in Dham river sub basin and the south part is drained to Yashoda nadi. The surface water divide exists in the middle part of the study area and take diversion in the eastern part and rising towards north. The major portion of the 10 km study area drains in to Yashoda nadi, south eastern part of the proposed plant site. There are four numbers of macro level water sheds existing. All the water sheds are marked by dendritic type of drainge system and forms the micro level water shed. It reveals that the area is undulated and characterized by hillocks.

While studying the drainage pattern, it was observed; by and large the study area has a distinct dendritic pattern drainage system owing to development of undulating terrain. The core zone drains to north east side. There are few initial stage drainage impressions are observed in core zone. It indicates that the proposed site is not undulated and covered by clayey soil.

The drainage density at core and buffer zone are as follows:

Location Drainage density in km/ Sq. km Core zone 1.31/sq.km Buffer zone 3.31 km/sq km at Inzapur Average 2.31 km/sq.km

From the above table, it is clear that the drainage density is very less in core zone when compared to normal density of 1 to 1.5 km/sq.km should exist in a plateau cum undulating region. At buffer zone it is higher but the land use pattern is relatively non flat when compared to core zone. The hydrographs were drawn for the water shed falling in the study area to observe the discharge pattern. It was observed that the area is mainly

EIA REPORT FOR




possessing fan shaped hydrographs. Almost all water sheds in the study area, exhibits fan shaped hydrograph. It implies that the peak discharge of flood will occur relatively longer period during rainy season. The water sheds and drainage features of the study area are shown below.

Hydrogeology:

Core zone

Hydrogeologically the area can be grouped under sedimentary cum metamorphosed rocky terrain underlain by Deccan traps of basalt aquifers. In the core zone the top layer consist of clayey soil. In some place particularly at proposed coke oven area weathered basalt rocks are exposed.

To understand the water table, attempts have been made to measure the available dugwells at core zone and buffer zone with the intension of establishing groundwater map for the study area. Core zone is flat area and do not have any habitations. Hence presence of wells and dugwells are ruled out. However, numerous villages are located nearer to the proposed site. They are Barbadi, Nadora, Sondlapur, Karanjil kajl, Pujal, and Narayanpur. Quite handsome numbers of dugwells are identified in these villages. The groundwater levels have been measured and the measured levels are shown below.

Buffer zone:

When compared to core zone, the buffer zone has been in encouraging and convincing situation. The alluviam area is endowed with considerable amount of groundwater in water table condition. Obviously the availability of drinking water favors for livable condition and more habitations are noticed in these area. These habitations are mainly dependent of groundwater for their livelihood. Nowadays conducting groundwater studies is trouble some due to two factors. One is municipal supply of water to the habitant and another is depletion of groundwater table to deeper level in the dug wells. In the first case, the water is available at their courtyard of the consumers, hence most of dug wells are defunct or filled with dirt. Another factor which is impeding the study is, advent of hand bore wells. As a rare phenomena in this area both type of wells are in use and the available dug wells were measured to draw the groundwater table. The villagers are also using the hand borewell provided by the government. It was reported by the villagers that the hand bore wells are drilled up to 80 metres and the water level is static at 2 to 14 m from bgl. Their statement should be correct, because the measured water levels in dug well are also in the same range. Other wise the hand pumps would be defunct or mal functioning if groundwater is occurring at very deep.

About 25 wells have been inventoried in the buffer zone and data like total depth, depth to water and their location were collected during the study. The locations of the inventoried wells are shown in the Physiography & Drainage map. The hydrogeological details of the measured wells are shown below. From the data, it is evident that the water levels are almost in 4.0 to 10.9 m bgl and maintains static flow.

EIA REPORT FOR




Hydrogeological data of wells inventoried from the surrounding villages

Well No.

Name of the village Reduced level in meter

Height of water table from

surface in meter

Height of water table

with respect to msl

01 Plant site 275 6.0 269 02 Barbadi 258 5.5 252.5 03 Nadora 253 4.2 251.65 04 Karagl bhoge 248 4.15 243.95 05 Sondlapur 247 4.0 243 06 Karanjil kaji 242 4.1 237.9 07 Pujal 244 08 Narayanpur 256 09 Dhanble 258 10 Bhugaon village 257 11 Salekote 258 5.4 252.6 12 Keslapur 250 13 Bhankhera 256 14 Yesamba 251 15 Sonegaon 252 16 Ashta 257 4.0 246 17 Bhugaon 257 18 Sivapur 245 19 Valhapur 238 20 Vaygaon 248 4.1 243.9 21 Paloti 261 22 Selsura 241 23 Wardha 291 24 Salod 255 4.3 250.7 25 Varud 249 26 Mandavgarh 259 5.9 253.10 27 Nagapur 253 4.11 248.90 28 Pawni 245 4.0 241 29 Dham river 234 - - 30 Injapur 279 6.5 272.5 31 Neri 246 4.1 241.9 34 Pipri 283 7.0 276.0 35 Karla 264 6.6 257.4 36 Yelakeli 263 10.9 252.1

Remarkable fluctuation in the water table is observed/reported in terms of draw down is concerned. Several villagers in the study area reported that no fluctuation in water table even during peak summer. However, exception are also reported at villages Karanjl kajl, Pujal where the fluctuation is about two meters. These villages are located at alluviam

EIA REPORT FOR




aquifers and the Dham River is flowing very near to the village. In general, the measurement of water table level indicates that in most of the villages the aquifer is recharged immediately by the interconnectivity of the rocks and higher storitivity due to weathering properties of the rocks. The aquifers are mostly composed of fragmented highly weathered rocks. The pheratic aquifer provides sufficient yield which meets the villager’s day to day consumption. This may be a result of (i) Continuous recharge of groundwater either by rain or by the streams (ii) Extraction/draft of groundwater is lesser than the recharge quantity (iii) Thin population, non use of groundwater for agro and horticulture.

The reported water levels during the study period vary from 4.0 m bgl to 10.9 m bgl depending on the ground elevation. Although, a minimum of 1 and maximum of 3 wells were measured in each village of the study area with the intension to establish groundwater contour map, presence of sudden elevation of ground up to 320 m creates problem in giving continuity of measured water table. These intermediate speroidal elevations of ground impeding the groundwater map of the study area. Hence, cross-sections were taken at suitable locations to know the movement of groundwater. Two section profiles have been taken and the sections are depicted below. The location of the profiles are recognized in such a way that to represent a parallel representation to the proposed site and one perpendicular section to proposed covering core and buffer zones. From the profiles it can be seen that the groundwater table is encountered at a depth of about 2m bgl.

Groundwater path & Perpendicular profile (East – West) to proposed site

A perpendicular profile Section EW with respect site was selected in such a way that i) the number of groundwater readings are more in order to give better representation of groundwater table and ii) to cover the buffer zone and the flat terrain along with the proposed plant area. At the proposed site the ground elevation is about 263m. In the eastern part of the buffer zone where the section was taken the ground level is in the range of 280 to 285 m. About 17m fall is there at site which is sufficient to know the ground water movement. Further, the plant site is witnessed by flat with moderate slope towards river ie towards NW. From groundwater point of view (in this section) the site is considered as mound. The section EW is shown below.

200 M

210 M

220 M

0

SECTION ALONG E-W

LOCATION PLAN

1 KM 2 KM 3 KM 4 KM 5 KM 6 KM 7 KM 8 KM 9 KM 10 KM 11 KM 12 KM

Ground Water Flow Towards East Direction

230 M

240 M

250 M

260 M

270 M

280 M

290 M

300 M

BARBADINANDORA

PIPRI

SALAD

WARDHA

YELAKELI

INJAPUR

PLANT SITENAGAPURI

KARANGL BHOGE

SONDALPURAPAWNI

KARANJIL KAJIKARLA

SURFACE PROFILE

GROUND WATER LEVEL PROFILE

LEGEND:

EIA REPORT FOR




It is evident from the perpendicular profile that east & western part of buffer zone (where the profile was taken) is featured by sloping terrain. It also reveals from the profile that the ground elevation is in the range of 260m – 280m AMSL. The groundwater is relatively shallow at proposed site. The ground elevation would be one of the main reasons for this phenomenon. The ground elevation is dipping slowly towards east direction. The trend is similar till it reaches Salod in the west. The section area is a mound and ground slope and groundwater slope is towards northwest.

Eventually from the perpendicular profile the following points are observed.

a. Groundwater is occurring in water table condition at the proposed site.b. Generally in this area, when the ground level increases there is a phenomenal

increase of drainage pattern which leads to formation of early stage nallah.c. Existence of feeble drainge impression at site indicates that the soil is porous which

has recharge potential.

Groundwater path & Parallel profile North - South (NS)

One more section, which is a longitudinal profile Section NS with respect to proposed site was also taken to assess the groundwater occurrence. Here too, the similar method was observed while choosing the section but the difference is, the section will cut proposed site longitudinally. As stated earlier, the buffer zone in the southern side is marked by undulating terrain and partially drains towards south. There is no noteworthy nala is flowing in this section as well as in the study area. However, Yashoda river flows just 10 Km radius of the study area which is not covered in the section but well visible in the locator map.

It is apparent from the figure that the northern part of buffer zone (where the profile was taken) is marked by hillocks with flat land where as in the south is sloping terrain towards south. The peak of the hill is about 345m AMSL where as the proposed site is about 263m AMSL. A surface water divide is located at middle of the study area. The proposed site falls in the Dham rivers water shed where as the extreme southern part of buffer zone falls in the wardha river water shed.

The groundwater is occurring at an average level of 3 m bgl. Uniformity of the groundwater level is observed in this section reveals that aquifers are interconnected in this stretch and dipping towards river, i.e. towards NW. It appears that the groundwater is almost flat in the site area and diping towards east. While correlating with the buffer zone data with core zone study, it is understood that the controlled recharge is taking place in either side of river.

EIA REPORT FOR




0

SECTION ALONG N-S

LOCATION PLAN

1 KM 2 KM 3 KM 4 KM 5 KM 6 KM 7 KM 8 KM 9 KM 10 KM 11 KM

Ground Water Flow Towards South Direction

200 M

210 M

220 M

230 M

240 M

250 M

260 M

270 M

280 M

290 M

300 M

MANDAVGARHSELUKATE

NERI

VAYGAON

SURFACE PROFILE

GROUND WATER LEVEL PROFILE

LEGEND:

The section indicates that (i) Pheratic aquifer is appearing at 3 m bgl and merging in the river bed ii) The groundwater flow is towards northwest.

Isobath – Groundwater contour for study area

The groundwater contours and isobaths have also been drawn based water table measurements inspite of elevated ground observed at the northern part of the proposed site and the same is shown below. From the water table contour map, it can be seen that the regional groundwater table is dipping towards south. In the eastern side of the study area the groundwater table terminates at Dham river. At study area, the river is influent i.e. receiving groundwater at the surface of the river and the river continued the flow towards north east.

CGWA/SGWA notification

As per groundwater resources estimation all the taluks in Wardha district fall under safe category. Till now the area has not been notified either by CGWA or by SGWA. The overall groundwater development for the district is only 28%.

Further, at plant area it has been planned to recharge the groundwater. It is expected the recharge would help to improve the groundwater potential in the plant water shed area.

Rainwater harvesting and recharge

The average rain fall in this area is about 835 mm per year. Hence, this area is considered as one of the potential area to do rain water harvesting as well as recharge in order to reduce water consumption as well as to increase the groundwater potential. The proposed plant will occupy about 100 ha. The foot prints of the plant will be about 1000000 m2. Out of this, about 600000 m2 is available as an effective area for rainwater harvesting. Since these area are covered by structural roof, a run-off co-efficient is considered as 0.9. Based on the run off co-efficient, it is estimated about 540000 m3/yr

EIA REPORT FOR




of water will be available through rainfall. Considering loses, about 80% of harvested water about 432000 m3/yr will be available per year. Again out of this, about 21600 m3/yr is planned to recharge the groundwater through various recharge pits planned in the storm water drains.

A suitable sump along with pump will be provided to collect this rainwater from various places and will be used in the respective system. It has been planned, to use this water as make – up water for cooling tower.

Conclusion:

From the hydrological studies the following conclusions are drawn.

1) The existing groundwater is in water table condition encountered at an averagedepth of 3m to 4m bgl and in pheratic aquifer condition.

2) The pheratic aquifer is semi confined and extended upto the depth of 30 m.

3) It has been planned to utilise excess surface water for the project which will haveminor impact on the surface water flow when compared to massive flow available inthe river.

4) Taping of groundwater is not envisaged for the project hence the existinggroundwater equilibrium will not be affected due to plant operation.

5) The terrain is favorable for groundwater recharge; hence the authorities are planningfor groundwater recharge from the proposed plant structures. It is expected that thegroundwater depletion due to increase in population will be taken care by rainwaterrecharge.

6) The study reveals that project area is located on a basaltic terrain and groundwaterrecharge would be difficult.

7) Plant operation may not have any impact on drainage pattern and the existingpattern is expected to remain as it is.

8) The study area is bestowed with surface water which is nullifying/minimizing thegroundwater impact due to green field operation of the proposed plant.

3.2.4 Water Environment

Water quality monitoring was carried out with the following objectives:

To collect baseline data on existing water quality. To assess the raw water quality to be used by the proposed expansion project.

EIA REPORT FOR




Selection of Sampling Locations

A total of sixteen water-sampling locations were selected for the present study. Eight surface water sampling location were selected in the vicinity of study area. Eight ground water sampling locations were selected up gradient and down gradient of proposed expansion plant.

Water monitoring locations is marked in Drg. No. MEC/Q725/11/S2/01.

Methodology

In order study the existing water quality within the study area, grab samples of water were collected from sixteen (16) locations, as given in Table 3.8. Ground water samples were analysed for different parameters as per IS: 10500. The water samples were analysed for different parameters as per American Public Health Association (APHA), 2005 - "Standard Methods for the Examination of Water and Waste Water" and IS: 10500 1993 (reaffirmed 2003).

Table 3.8: Location of Water Monitoring Station

SN Station No. Location Type 1 Dham river near Pavnar Village SW 1 Surface Water 2 Stream near Karanji Bhonge Village (Nagpur Nala) SW 2 Surface Water 3 Bhadadi river near Waygaon Village SW 3 Surface Water 4 Pond water Salod Village SW 4 Surface Water 5 Stream near Bhugaon Village SW 5 Surface Water 6 Nalla Near Borgaon Village SW 6 Surface Water 7 Nalla Near Inzapur Village SW 7 Surface Water 8 Pond Water Near transformer (Tower-09) SW 8 Surface Water 9 Hand Pump Bhugaon Village GW 1 Ground Water 10 Hand Pump Mandavgarh Village GW 2 Ground Water 11 Dug well Bapukuti GW3 Ground Water 12 Dug Well Salod Village GW 4 Ground Water 13 Hand Pump Borgaon Village GW 5 Ground Water 14 Hand Pump Inzapur Village GW 6 Ground Water 15 Dug Well Kurzadi Village GW 7 Ground Water 16 Dug Well China Colony GW 8 Ground Water

Results of Surface Water Quality

The result of analysis of Surface Water is given in Tables 3.9a & 3.9b. The surface water quality was compared with CPCB norm for surface water, as given in Table 3.9c. The surface water quality is not within the norms for Classes A, B, C, D, and E (Table 3.9c). The results indicate that surface water is not fit for drinking purposes.

EIA REPORT FOR




Table 3.9a: Surface Water Quality

Sr. No. Parameters Units SW1 SW2 SW3 SW4

Physical Parameters 1 Ambient Temperature °C 27.8 28.5 28.6 28.8 2 Colour Hazen 1 1 2 1 3 Odour - AG AG AG AG 4 Turbidity NTU 2 16 2 23 5 pH at 25 0C - 8.1 8.4 8.3 8.0

Inorganic Parameters 6 Electrical Conductivity μS/cm 339 1536 410 182 7 Total Dissolved Solids mg/l 220 845 226 118 8 Total Alkalinity as CaCO3 mg/l 178 106 172 70 9 Carbonate as CO3 mg/l 0 8 0 0 10 Bicarbonate as HCO3 mg/l 178 98 172 70 11 Total Hardness as CaCO3 mg/l 180 348 192 80 12 Calcium Hardness as CaCO3 mg/l 80 156 84 60 13 Calcium as Ca++ mg/l 32.0 62.4 33.6 24.0 14 Magnesium as Mg++ mg/l 24.0 46.1 25.9 4.8 15 Sodium as Na mg/l 20.0 195.0 13.0 15.0 16 Potassium as K mg/l 1.0 33.0 3.3 0.0 17 Chlorides as Cl mg/l 19.9 266.0 25.8 12.2 18 Sulphates as SO4 mg/l 17.6 181.2 16.4 26.0 19 Nitrates as NO3 mg/l BDL BDL BDL BDL 20 Fluoride as F mg/l 0.5 0.4 0.3 0.5 21 Dissolved Oxygen mg/l 6.0 5.8 5.2 5.4

Pollutants 22 Amonical Nitrogen as NH3-N mg/l BDL BDL BDL BDL 23 Nitrite Nitrogen as NO2-N mg/l BDL BDL BDL BDL 24 Total Phosphate as PO4-P mg/l BDL 0.22 0.10 0.12 25 B O D 3 days 27 0C mg/l BDL 10.6 5.4 4.2 26 C O D mg/l BDL 40.0 18.2 14.6

Heavy Metals 27 Aluminium as Al mg/l BDL BDL BDL BDL 28 Arsenic as As mg/l BDL BDL BDL BDL 29 Boron as B mg/l BDL BDL BDL BDL 30 Cadmium as Cd mg/l BDL BDL BDL BDL 31 Chromium as Cr6+ mg/l BDL BDL BDL BDL 32 Copper as Cu mg/l BDL 0.04 BDL 0.04 33 Iron as Fe mg/l 0.12 0.2 0.08 0.16 34 Lead as Pb mg/l BDL BDL BDL BDL 35 Manganese as Mn mg/l 0.05 0.12 BDL 0.09 36 Selenium as Se mg/l BDL BDL BDL BDL 37 Zinc as Zn mg/l BDL 0.04 BDL BDL

Microbiology 38 Coliform MPN/100 ml >1100 1100 >1100 460

Note:- BDL is Below Detectable Limit ; Minimum Detectable Limit For parameters tested are as Under (NO2-0.1,PO4-0.05,BOD-1,COD-5,Al-0.02,AS-0.02,B-0.01,Cd-0.01,Cr+6-0.05,Cu-0.03,Fe-0.05,Pb-0.05, Mn-0.02,Zn-0.01, Se =0.005 ) (Unit mg/l) (NTU - nephalometery turbitity unit;; NR - no relaxation; MPN - most probable number UO - unobjectionable: AG - agreeable; NA- not applicable)

EIA REPORT FOR




Table 3.9b: Surface Water Quality Sr. No. Parameters Units SW5 SW6 SW7 SW8

Physical Parameters 1 Ambient Temperature °C 27.2 28.4 28.5 28.3 2 Colour Hazen 1 2 3 1 3 Odour - AG AG AG AG 4 Turbidity NTU 2 2 2 8 5 pH at 25 0C - 7.6 8.3 8.3 8.4

Inorganic Parameters6 Electrical Conductivity μS/cm 3240 672 636 434 7 Total Dissolved Solids mg/l 1944 370 382 282 8 Total Alkalinity as CaCO3 mg/l 62 112 104 52 9 Carbonate as CO3 mg/l 0 0 0 8

10 Bicarbonate as HCO3 mg/l 62 112 104 44 11 Total Hardness as CaCO3 mg/l 1932 240 184 220 12 Calcium Hardness as CaCO3 mg/l 888 112 96 108 13 Calcium as Ca++ mg/l 355.2 44.8 38.4 43.2 14 Magnesium as Mg++ mg/l 250.6 30.7 21.1 26.9 15 Sodium as Na mg/l 97.0 32.5 48.8 14.0 16 Potassium as K mg/l 55.0 26.4 37 0.0 17 Chlorides as Cl mg/l 1350.0 160 158.8 79.4 18 Sulphates as SO4 mg/l 52.8 7.2 7.6 82.8 19 Nitrates as NO3 mg/l BDL BDL BDL BDL 20 Fluoride as F mg/l 0.3 0.4 0.3 0.6 21 Dissolved Oxygen mg/l 5.2 5.2 5.4 6.0

Pollutants 22 Amonical Nitrogen as NH3-N mg/l BDL BDL BDL BDL 23 Nitrite Nitrogen as NO2-N mg/l BDL BDL BDL BDL 24 Total Phosphate as PO4-P mg/l 0.05 0.10 0.10 0.10 25 B O D 3 days 27 0C mg/l 11.9 4.6 6.8 5.7 26 C O D mg/l 36.4 14.6 21.8 18.2

Heavy Metals 27 Aluminium as Al mg/l BDL BDL BDL BDL 28 Arsenic as As mg/l BDL BDL BDL BDL 29 Boron as B mg/l 0.21 BDL BDL BDL 30 Cadmium as Cd mg/l BDL BDL BDL BDL 31 Chromium as Cr6+ mg/l BDL BDL BDL BDL 32 Copper as Cu mg/l 0.07 BDL BDL 0.08 33 Iron as Fe mg/l 0.22 BDL BDL 0.17 34 Lead as Pb mg/l BDL BDL BDL BDL 35 Manganese as Mn mg/l BDL 0.06 BDL 0.09 36 Selenium as Se mg/l BDL BDL BDL BDL 37 Zinc as Zn mg/l BDL BDL BDL BDL

Microbiology 38 Coliform MPN/100 ml 1100 460 1100 >1100


EIA REPORT FOR




Table 3.9c: Central Pollution Control Board (CPCB) Surface Water Quality Criteria

SN Parameters Class A Class B Class C Class D Class E 1. pH 6.5–8.5 6.5–8.5 6.0-9.0 6.5–8.5 6.5–8.5 2. Dissolved oxygen (as O2), mg/l, min 6 5 4 4 - 3. BOD, 5 days at 20 C, max 2 3 3 - - 4. Total coliform organism, MPN/100 ml, max 50 500 5000 - - 5. Free ammonia (as N), mg/l, max - - - 1.2 - 6. Electrical conductivity, mhos/cm, max - - - - 2250 7. Sodium absorption ratio, max. - - - - 26 8. Boron (as B), mg/l, max. - - - - 2

Class A :Drinking water source without conventional treatment but after dis-infection Class B :Outdoor bathing (organised) Class C :Drinking water source after conventional treatment and after dis-infection Class D :Propagation of Wild life and Fisheries Class E :Irrigation, Industrial Cooling, and Controlled Waste Disposal Below E:Not meeting A, B, C, D & E Criteria Results of Ground Water Quality The results of ground water quality are given in Table 3.9d & 3.9e. In absence of any specific norms for Ground Water Quality, the results have been compared with drinking water norms (IS: 10500). All the parameters at the eight locations are well within the permissible limit of norm (IS: 10500, 2012).

Table 3.9d: Ground Water Quality

Sr. No. Parameters Units GW1 GW2 GW3 GW4 As Per IS 10500 of 2012

Acceptable* Permissible** Physical Parameters

1 Ambient Temperature °C 28.5 28.6 28.0 27.9 - - 2 Colour Hazen 1 1 1 1 5 25 3 Odour - AG AG AG AG AG AG 4 pH at 25 0C - 7.2 7.3 7.4 7.2 6.5-8.5 NR

Inorganic Parameters 5 Electrical Conductivity μS/cm 1777 766 1251 1116 - - 6 Total Dissolved Solids mg/l 1066 460 876 670 500 2000 7 Total Alkalinity as CaCO3 mg/l 300 286 348 352 200 600 8 Carbonate as CO3 mg/l 0 0 0 0 - - 9 Bicarbonate as HCO3 mg/l 300 286 348 352 - -

10 Total Hardness as CaCO3 mg/l 968 432 480 564 300 600 11 Calcium Hardness as CaCO3 mg/l 192 128 44 80 - - 12 Calcium as Ca++ mg/l 76.8 51.2 17.6 32.0 75 200 13 Magnesium as Mg++ mg/l 186.2 73.0 104.6 116.2 30 100 14 Sodium as Na mg/l 43.0 11.0 130.0 48.0 - - 15 Potassium as K mg/l 7.0 6.0 38.0 7.0 - - 16 Chlorides as Cl mg/l 490.0 73.5 230.3 160.0 250 1000 17 Sulphates as SO4 mg/l 70.0 74.0 130.4 86.8 200 400 18 Nitrates as NO3 mg/l 11.1 9.8 8.8 11.1 45 100 19 Fluoride as F mg/l 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.3 1 1.5 20 Sodium Percent (%Na) % 0.006 0.003 0.006 0.004 - -

EIA REPORT FOR





Acceptable* Permissible** 21 Sodium Absorption Ratio SAR - 0.740 0.514 1.064 0.737 - -

Pollutants22 Nitrite Nitrogen as NO2-N mg/l BDL BDL BDL BDL - - 23 Ortho Phosphate as PO4-P mg/l 0.12 0.09 BDL 0.07 - - 24 C O D mg/l 7.3 7.3 BDL 10.9 - -

Heavy Metals 25 Aluminium as Al mg/l BDL BDL BDL BDL 0.03 0.2 26 Arsenic as As mg/l BDL BDL BDL BDL 0.05 NR 27 Boron as B mg/l 0.25 BDL 0.22 0.17 1 5 28 Cadmium as Cd mg/l BDL BDL BDL BDL 0.01 NR 29 Chromium as Cr6+ mg/l BDL BDL BDL BDL 0.05 NR 30 Copper as Cu mg/l BDL 0.04 BDL BDL 0.05 1.5 31 Iron as Fe mg/l BDL BDL 0.06 BDL 0.30 1 32 Lead as Pb mg/l BDL BDL BDL BDL 0.05 NR 33 Manganese as Mn mg/l BDL 0.06 BDL BDL 0.1 0.3 34 Selenium as Se mg/l BDL BDL BDL BDL 0.01 NR 35 Zinc as Zn mg/l 0.14 0.09 BDL 0.03 5 15


Table 3.9e: Ground Water Quality


Acceptable* Permissible** Physical Parameters

1 Ambient Temperature °C 28.7 28.9 27.6 27.5 - - 2 Colour Hazen 1 1 1 1 5 15 3 Odour - AG AG AG AG AG AG 4 pH at 25 0C - 7.3 7.0 7.5 7.3 6.5-8.5 NR

Inorganic Parameters 5 Electrical Conductivity μS/cm 797 1144 673 794 - - 6 Total Dissolved Solids mg/l 527 744 370 516 500 2000 7 Total Alkalinity as CaCO3 mg/l 154 178 220 316 200 600 8 Carbonate as CO3 mg/l 0 0 0 0 - - 9 Bicarbonate as HCO3 mg/l 154 178 220 316 - - 10 Total Hardness as CaCO3 mg/l 356 452 340 408 200 600 11 Calcium Hardness as CaCO3 mg/l 160 100 44 64 - - 12 Calcium as Ca++ mg/l 64.0 40.0 17.6 25.6 75 200 13 Magnesium as Mg++ mg/l 47.0 84.5 71.0 82.6 30 100 14 Sodium as Na mg/l 51.0 143.0 36.0 60.0 - - 15 Potassium as K mg/l 6.0 8.0 4.0 5.0 - - 16 Chlorides as Cl mg/l 123.1 222.3 63.5 96.0 250 1000 17 Sulphates as SO4 mg/l 136.0 126.4 40.8 78.4 200 400 18 Nitrates as NO3 mg/l 9.8 11.0 7.9 5.2 45 NR 19 Fluoride as F mg/l 0.3 0.2 0.4 0.4 1 1.5 20 Sodium Percent (%Na) % 0.004 0.006 0.004 0.003 - - 21 Sodium Absorption Ratio SAR - 0.823 1.018 0.799 0.600 - -

Pollutants22 Nitrite Nitrogen as NO2-N mg/l BDL BDL BDL BDL - - 23 Ortho Phosphate as PO4-P mg/l BDL 0.21 0.30 0.23 - - 24 C O D mg/l 7.3 BDL 10.9 7.3 - -

EIA REPORT FOR




Sr. No. Parameters Units GW5 GW6 GW7 GW8

As Per IS 10500 of 2012 Acceptable* Permissible**

Heavy Metals 25 Aluminium as Al mg/l BDL BDL BDL BDL 0.03 0.2 26 Arsenic as As mg/l BDL BDL BDL BDL 0.05 NR 27 Boron as B mg/l BDL BDL BDL BDL 1 5 28 Cadmium as Cd mg/l BDL BDL BDL BDL 0.01 NR 29 Chromium as Cr6+ mg/l BDL BDL BDL BDL 0.05 NR 30 Copper as Cu mg/l BDL BDL BDL BDL 0.05 1.5 31 Iron as Fe mg/l 0.07 BDL BDL 0.09 0.30 1 32 Lead as Pb mg/l BDL BDL BDL BDL 0.05 NR 33 Manganese as Mn mg/l 0.03 BDL BDL BDL 0.1 0.3 34 Selenium as Se mg/l BDL BDL BDL BDL 0.01 NR 35 Zinc as Zn mg/l 0.16 0.08 BDL 0.04 5 15


* Requirement (Desirable limits)** Permissible limits in the absence of alternate source*** Through out any year, 95 % of samples should not contain any coli-form organism and that no

sample should contain more than 10 MPN/100 ml of coli-form organism and further no coli-formorganism should be detectable in any two of the consecutive samples.

3.2.5 MONITORING OF TRAFFIC DENSITY

To quantify the impact of the proposed steel plant and allied activities on traffic, it is necessary at first to evaluate the existing load of vehicular traffic near plant site. The major transport of finished products/ raw material passes thorough these roads. There is one major road near by the proposed expansion plant. The plant traffic along with major Maharastra city traffic and inter state transport passes through these junctions. Twenty-four hours monitoring were done for traffic density once at the following junction:

i) SH -243 near plant turning

Monitoring results depicted in Table 3.10 indicate that during 04.00 to 20.00 all type of vehicles are maximum. Maximum VCV category vehicles maximum at this junction is due to inter city and inter state buses are also crossing this junction.

Table 3.12: Results of Traffic density Monitoring

Time Two Wheeler LMV HMV 10.00 -11.00 AM 120 32 23 11.00 -12.00 PM 150 50 15 12.00 -13.00PM 110 72 20 13.00-14.00PM 100 68 12 14.00 – 15.00PM 90 41 11 15.00 – 16.00 PM 106 74 15 16.00 – 17.00 PM 124 54 13 17.00 -18.00 PM 142 62 10

EIA REPORT FOR




Time Two Wheeler LMV HMV 18.00 – 19.00 PM 115 52 9 19.00 – 20.00 PM 84 32 8 20.00 – 21.00 PM 38 24 11 21.00 – 22.00 PM 11 21 7 22.00 – 23.00 PM 6 24 6 23.00 – 00.00 AM 15 21 10 00.00 – 01.00 AM - 8 9 01.00 – 02.00 AM - 5 11 02.00 – 03.00 AM - 11 12 03.00 – 04.00 AM - 15 10 04.00 – 05.00 AM 11 19 9 05.00 – 06.00 AM 32 20 8 06.00 – 07.00 AM 56 34 7 07.00 – 08.00 AM 84 42 10 08.00 – 09.00 AM 122 45 5 09.00 – 10.00 AM 118 36 16

3.2.6 Soil

Selection of Sampling Location

The soil sampling locations were selected with the following objective:

To assess the background / baseline soil quality of the region.

A total of five sampling locations as marked in Drg. No. MEC/Q725/11/S2/01 were selected for the study. The selected locations are given in Table 3.11.

Table 3.11: Selection of Soil Sampling Locations

Sr. No. Sampling Sites Station

Code Distance from proposed plant expansion Area

Direction

1. Waste Land Near Plant Site S – 1 Core zone - 2. Agriculture Land In Bhugaon Village S – 2 4.0km S 3. Agriculture Land In Inzapur Village S – 3 1.5km W 4. Waste Land Near Dump Area S – 4 Core zone -

5. Waste Land Near Dump Area (Last Plant) S – 5 1.6km S

Methodology

In order to have an idea about the baseline soil quality in the study area, samples of topsoil were collected from the five locations once during the study period. The soil samples were marked, brought to laboratory, air-dried and analysed for different physico-chemical characteristics by following the methodology of IS: 2720 & Methods of

EIA REPORT FOR




Soil Analysis, Part-1, 2nd edition, 1986 (American Society for Agronomy and Soil Science of America).

Results of Soil Analysis

The results of analysis are given below:

Sr. No. Parameters Unit S-1

00.0 - 30.0 cm

30.0 - 60.0 cm

60.0 - 90.0 cm

A. PHYSICAL PROPERTIES 1 Color -- Gray Gray Gray 2 Soil Texture -- Clay Loam Clay Loam Clay Loam 3 Grain Size Distribution % Gravel 36 39 26

Sand 20 22 20 Silt 22 16 29

Clay 22 23 25 4 Natural Moisture Content % 3 4 4 5 Bulk Density gm/cc 1.77 1.80 1.74 6 Liquid Limit % 55 56 60 7 Plastic Limit % 25 25 26 8 Porosity % 57.61 55.44 66.90 9 Water Retention Capacity % 60.73 49.83 49.06

B. CHEMICAL PROPERTIES 1 pH - 8.16 8.25 8.15 2 Electrical Conductivity mmhos/cm 0.34 0.35 0.35 3 Organic Matter % 0.77 0.81 0.72 4 Calcium as Ca++ mg/kg 216.0 227.2 372.8 5 Magnesium as Mg++ mg/kg 75.8 72.9 108.9 6 Chlorides as Cl mg/kg 218.4 184.7 194.6 7 Sulphates as SO4 mg/kg 533.5 177.8 222.3 8 Total Nitrogen as N kg/ha 311.1 330.6 291.7 9 Total Phosphorous as P kg/ha 12.7 11.7 11.7 10 Total Potassium as K kg/ha 228.5 161.3 147.8


00.0 - 30.0 cm

30.0 - 60.0 cm

60.0 - 90.0 cm

A. PHYSICAL PROPERTIES 1 Color -- Gray Gray Gray

2 Soil Texture -- Silty Clay Loam

Silty Clay Loam

Silty Clay Loam

3 Grain Size Distribution % Gravel 2 2 2 Sand 16 18 13 Silt 49 46 51

Clay 33 34 34 4 Natural Moisture Content % 3 4 4 5 Bulk Density gm/cc 1.59 1.61 1.60 6 Liquid Limit % 53 56 58

EIA REPORT FOR





00.0 - 30.0 cm

30.0 - 60.0 cm

60.0 - 90.0 cm

7 Plastic Limit % 25 26 26 8 Porosity % 54.82 55.19 54.40 9 Water Retention Capacity % 59.85 63.80 61.11

B. CHEMICAL PROPERTIES 1 pH - 8.04 8.03 8.06 2 Electrical Conductivity mmhos/cm 0.45 0.50 0.45 3 Organic Matter % 1.10 1.05 0.96 4 Calcium as Ca++ mg/kg 355.2 268.8 252.8 5 Magnesium as Mg++ mg/kg 111.8 131.2 77.8 6 Chlorides as Cl mg/kg 486.5 464.7 448.8 7 Sulphates as SO4 mg/kg 150.5 99.2 136.8 8 Total Nitrogen as N kg/ha 447.2 427.8 388.9 9 Total Phosphorous as P kg/ha 17.5 12.7 9.7

10 Total Potassium as K kg/ha 645.1 577.9 551.0


00.0 - 30.0 cm

30.0 - 60.0 cm

60.0 - 90.0 cm

A. PHYSICAL PROPERTIES 1 Color -- Gray Gray Gray

2 Soil Texture -- Silty Clay Loam

Silty Clay Loam

Silty Clay Loam

3 Grain Size Distribution % Gravel Nil Nil Nil Sand 8 10 9 Silt 56 55 55



EIA REPORT FOR





00.0 - 30.0 cm

30.0 - 60.0 cm

60.0 - 90.0 cm

A. PHYSICAL PROPERTIES 1 Color -- Yellowish Yellowish Yellowish 2 Soil Texture -- Loam Silty Loam Silty Loam 3 Grain Size Distribution % Gravel 60 80 73

Sand 19 14 20

Silt 18 5 6

Clay 3 1 1 4 Natural Moisture Content % 2 2 3 5 Bulk Density gm/cc 1.89 1.98 1.97 6 Liquid Limit % NL NL NL 7 Plastic Limit % NP NP NP 8 Porosity % 47.23 49.71 43.25 9 Water Retention Capacity % 20.83 27.03 22.12



00.0 - 30.0 cm

30.0 - 60.0 cm

60.0 - 90.0 cm

A. PHYSICAL PROPERTIES 1 Color -- Gray Yellowish Yellowish 2 Soil Texture -- Clay Loam Clay Loam Clay Loam 3 Grain Size Distribution % Gravel 31 52 50

Sand 22 18 17

Silt 23 15 15


B. CHEMICAL PROPERTIES 1 pH - 8.38 8.36 8.26 2 Electrical Conductivity mmhos/cm 0.20 0.19 0.15

EIA REPORT FOR





00.0 - 30.0 cm

30.0 - 60.0 cm

60.0 - 90.0 cm

3 Organic Matter % 1.53 1.92 1.39 4 Calcium as Ca++ mg/kg 260.8 280.0 228.8 5 Magnesium as Mg++ mg/kg 42.8 56.4 51.5 6 Chlorides as Cl mg/kg 39.7 25.8 29.8 7 Sulphates as SO4 mg/kg 229.1 153.9 123.1 8 Total Nitrogen as N kg/ha 622.2 777.8 563.9 9 Total Phosphorous as P kg/ha 6.8 9.7 15.6 10 Total Potassium as K kg/ha 241.9 241.9 215.0

Waste land soil is little deficient in nutrients concentration. Whereas, all two agricultural land soils are moderately suitable for cultivation of climatic crops and have good fertility.

3.2.8 Land Use Pattern in the Study Area

Existing land use in the study area has been studied through Satellite image processing with Satellite data of 23.5 m resolution. Existing land uses of the study area are given in Table 3.12. Land use coverage is shown in Drawing No. MEC/Q725/11/S2/02.

Table 3.12 : Approximate land Use in the Study Area

Sr. No. Land Feature Area in Sq.Km Area in Hectres Percentage 1 Agriculture 231.280 23128.023 73.859 2 Barren Land 28.370 2836.997 9.060 3 Dual Road 2.613 261.279 0.834 4 Fallow_Land 5.824 582.378 1.860 5 Habitation 29.673 2967.329 9.476 6 Canal 0.519 51.874 0.166 7 Industrial Area 9.0 898.4 2.9 8 Marshy Land 0.164 16.440 0.053 9 Mining Area 0.163 16.253 0.052 10 Nala 0.781 78.110 0.249 11 Plantation 1.641 164.118 0.524 12 Pond 0.910 90.982 0.291 13 Quarry 0.866 86.648 0.277 14 Railway 0.283 28.272 0.090 15 Railway Property 0.568 56.786 0.181 16 River 0.501 50.098 0.160

Total 313.139 31313.948 100.000

3.2.9 Biological Environment The present study was undertaken with the following objectives:

EIA REPORT FOR




To assess the nature and distribution of vegetation in and around the project sitewithin the study area;

To assess the type of wild animals within the study area;

To assess the biodiversity of natural system present in the study area;

To ascertain migratory routes of fauna and possibility of breeding grounds withinthe study area;

Methodology of the Ecology Study

The study area taken for the study is 10 km radius with the EAF site as center. The different methods adopted were as follows:

Inventorisation of flora / fauna: The list of Flora and Fauna found in the ForestDivision (Wardha) was collected from the Working Plan of the division for reference.The list of flora and fauna found in the region was prepared by conducting fieldsurvey and by discussions with concerned Forest Department personnel using thelist available in the Working Plan as a base.

Discussion with local people so as to elicit information about local plant and animals.

The present study is based on field studies conducted during summer season March - May 2013. The biotic environment can be described under following heads.

Project Site Study Area

3.2.9.1 Project Site

The project site lies within the existing plant premises of UVSL. The land on which the proposed project is coming is within the existing premises of UVSL. Most of which is barren with occasional shrubs and on the periphery is planted with greenbelt.

3.2.9.2 Study Area

The study area covers 10km radius around the project site. The area exhibits plain topography. The plant species found in the study area is given in Table 3.13. The study area falls under Tropical Wet and Dry climate region and the agro-climate is characterised by hot, dry, and subhumid bioclimate with dry summers and mild winters. The area is plain and predominantly with agro-ecosystem and poor irrigation facilities. There is no forest area, wildlife and bird sanctuary within the study area. The soil in the area has low to medium fertility with reference to its agricultural production potential. In the study area, no rare, threatened or endangered plant species have been encountered.

EIA REPORT FOR




Table 3.13: List of plants growing in study area

SN Common Name Scientific Name Habitat Family 1 Babool Acacia arabica Tree Fabaceae 2 Australian Acacia Acacia auriculiformis Tree Fabaceae 3 Khair Acacia catechu Tree Mimosaceae 4 Hirwar Acacia leucophloea Tree Fabaceae 5 Kurum Adina cordifolia Tree Rubiaceae 6 Bel Aegle marmelos Tree Rutaceae 7 Mahaneem Ailanthus excelsa Tree Simaroubaceae 8 Siris Kala Albezzia lebbeck Tree Mimosaceae 9 Siris Safed Albezzia procera Tree Mimosaceae 10 Dhaura Anogeissus latifolia Tree Combretaceae 11 Hari Champa Artabotrys odoratissimus Tree Annonaccae 12 Neem Azadirachta indica Tree Meliaceae 13 Bans Bambusa arundinacea W. Grass Poaceae 14 Semal Bombax ceiba Tree Malvacease 15 Salai Boswellia serrata Tree Burserraceae 16 - Bothriochloa sp. Grass Poaceae 17 Palas Butea monosperma Tree Fabaceae 18 Madar Calotropis spp Shrub Apocynaceae 19 Karaunda Carissa carandas Shrub Apocynaceae 20 Amaltas Cassia fistula Tree Caesalpiniaceae 21 Tarota Cassia tora Herb Caesulpinaceae 22 Suru Casuarina equisetifolia Tree Casuarinaceae 23 Sadabahar Catharanthus roseus Shrub Apocynaceae 24 Losara Cordia myxa Tree Boraginaceae 25 Croton Croton sp Herb Euphorbiaceae 26 - Cymbopogon sp. Grass Graminae 27 Dub grass Cynodon dactylon Grass Poaceae 28 Sisu Dalbergia sisso Tree Papilionaceae 29 Gulmohar Delonix regia Tree Fabaceae 30 - Dendrocalamus strictus Grass Gramineae 31 - Desmodium sp. Herb Fabaceae 32 Tendu Diospyros melanoxylon Tree Ebenaceae 33 Aonla Embelica officinalis Tree Euphorbiaceae 34 Pani ghas Eragrostis sp Grass Poaceae 35 - Euphorbia hirta Herb Euphorbiaceae 36 - Evolvulus sp. Herb Convolvulaceae 37 Kathbel Feronia elephantum Tree Rutaceae 38 Vad Ficus bengalensis Tree Moraceae 39 Pakar Ficus infectoria Tree Moraceae 40 Peepal Ficus religiosa Tree Moraceae 41 - Ficus retusa Tree Moraceae 42 Kakad Garuga pinnata Tree Burseraceae

EIA REPORT FOR




SN Common Name Scientific Name Habitat Family 43 Anjan Hardwickia binata Tree Caesalpiniaceae 44 - Heteropogon sp. Grass Asilidae 45 Korai Hollarhena antidyssentrica Tree Apocynaceae 46 Chilbil / ainasadada Holoptelea integrifolia Tree Ulmaceae 47 - Imperata sp. Grass Poaceae 48 Behya Ipomea carnea Shrub Convolvulaceae 49 Moghra Jasminum sambac Tree Oleaceae 50 Jatropha Jatropha gossypiifolia Shrub Euphorbiaceae 51 Putus Lantana camara Shrub Verbenaceae 52 Putus Lantana indica Shrub Verbenaceae 53 Ban Tulsi Leonotis sp. Shrub Lamiaceae 54 Subabool Leucaena leucocephala Tree Fabaceae 55 Mootha Lipocarpha sphacelata Grass Cyperaceae 56 Mahua Madhuca indica Tree Sopotaceae 57 Aam Mangifera indica Tree Anacardiaceae 58 Akas Neem Millingtonia hortensis Tree Bignoniaceae 59 Karam Mitragyna parvifolia Tree Rubiaceae 60 Shevga Moringa oleifera Tree Moringaceae 61 Bada Champa Plumeria rubra Tree Apocynaceae 62 Karanja Pongamia pinnata Tree Papillionaceae 63 Arendi Riccinus communis Shrub Euphorbiaceae 64 - Saccharum sp. Grass Poaceae 65 Reetha Sapindus laurifolia Tree Fabaceae 66 Rohan Soymida febrifuga Tree Meliaceae 67 Jambu Syzigium jambolana Tree Myrtaceae 68 Imli Tamarindus indica Tree Caesalpiniaceae 69 Sagon Tectona grandis Tree Lamiaceae 70 Arjun Terminalia arjuna Tree Combretaceae 71 Bahara Terminalia bellirica Tree Combretaceae 72 Desi Badam Terminalia catappa Tree Combretaceae 73 Harre Terminalia chebula Tree Combretaceae 74 Matti Terminalia crenulata Tree Combretaceae 75 Saj Terminalia tomentosa Tree Combretaceae 76 Kaner (Yellow) Thevetia peruviana Tree / shrub Apocynaceae 77 Parash Wrightia tinctorea Tree Apocynaceae 78 Dudhi Wrightia tomentosa Tree Apocynaceae 79 - Xanthium strumarium Herb Asteraceae 80 Ber Ziziphus jujube Tree Rhamnaceae 81 Iroini Zizyphus oenoplia W. Climber Rhamnaceae

The ecological features of the study area can be described under following heads:

i) Agricultural landii) Vegetation around Human Settlements

EIA REPORT FOR




iii) Wild life and avi-fauna

i) Agricultural land

The agriculture is basically dependent on rain. The prevalence of traditional agriculture is common in the area. Major crops grown are Soyabean, Cotton, Pigeonpea, Wheat, Chickpea, Groundnut, Sugarcane and Sorghum. The crop productivity in the area is given in Table 3.14. Palas & babul dott the agricultural land and imli, ber, babul and mango trees occupy the bunds of some fields.

Table 3.14: Agricultural pattern and productivity in the area

SN Crop Productivity (Kg/ha.)

SN Crop Productivity (Kg/ha.)

1 Soybean 660 5 Chickpea 750 2 Cotton 250 6 Groundnut 1400 3 Pigeonpea 807 7 Sugarcane 1850 4 Wheat 1500 8 Sorghum 1005

ii) Vegetation Around Human Settlements

Near the villages, the vegetation pattern slightly changes from that what it is seen in the agricultural areas. The species commonly found are given in Table 3.15 are mostly of economic importance and used in day to day life. Among the fruit trees, which are common are Mango, Guava, Drumstick, Jackfruit, Bel, Jamun, Ber, Neebu, Banana, Papaya, etc. Among the non-fruit trees the common ones are Neem, Karanj, etc.

Table 3.15: List of common trees/shrubs growing in and around human settlement

SN Scientific Name Common Name 1 Aegle marmelos Bel 2 Albezzia lebbeck Siris 3 Azadirachta indica Neem 4 Bambusa arundinacea Bans 5 Bougainvellea spectabilis Bougainvellea 6 Carica papaya Papita 7 Citrus lemon Nimbu 8 Delonix regia Gulmohar 9 Embelica officinalis Aonla 10 Eucalyptus spp Eucalyptus 11 Ficus bengalensis Vad 12 Ficus religiosa Peepal 13 Madhuca indica Mahua 14 Mangifera indica Mango 15 Moringa oleifera Shevga 16 Musa sapientum Banana

EIA REPORT FOR




SN Scientific Name Common Name 17 Pongamia pinnata Karanj 18 Syzigium jambolana Jamun 19 Tamarindus indica Imli 20 Zyziphus sp. Ber

iii) Wild life and avifauna

There is no suitable habitat for occurrence of ecologically important fauna in the area. Most of the avifauna that is found is associated with agriculture and human habitation and dominated by granivores, insectivores and omnivores. Since there are no forests around, the trees and shrubs on field bunds and roadsides provide important resting, breeding and perching sites. The trees Ficus and Neem provide important feeding and resting sites for birds especially when no food is available elsewhere in summer.

The list of wild and domestic animals as well as avifauna observed in the area are given in Table 3.16 and Table 3.17. No endangered species have been reported in the study area. The mammalian fauna is limited and does not show much diversity. They mainly constitute domesticated animals and rodents. The area harbours granivores avian fauna because agricultural grains in the field provide food for such birds (Table 3.17).

Due to lack of any forest area and biotic interference the only animals found in the study area are few rodents, reptiles and birds. Due to human interference, in general the availability of animals in the study area is low.

Table 3.16 : List of Wild life species in the study area

S N

Common Name / Local Name

Scientific Name Schedule of Wild Life Protection Act in Which Listed

Mammals 1 Common Mongoose Herpestres edwardsii II 2 Kuji Neula Herpestres javanicus II 3 Palm Squirrels Funambulus spp IV 4 Common house Rat Rattus rattus V 5 Jungle Cat Felis chaus II 6 Indian hare Lepus nigricollis ruficaudatus IV 7 Indian Field Mouse Mus booduga V 8 Common Langur Presbytis entellus II 9 Rhesus Macaque Macaca mulatta II

10 Indian Mole Rat Bandicota bengalensis IV Reptiles

1 Common Krait Bungarus caeruleus - 2 Russel’s Viper Vipera russelii II 3 Cobra / Gokhra Naja naja II 4 Yellow Rat Snake Plyas mucosus II

EIA REPORT FOR




S N

Common Name / Local Name

Scientific Name Schedule of Wild Life Protection Act in Which Listed

5 Banded Krait Bungarus fasciatus IV 6 Chameleon Chameleon zeylanicus II 7 Common Skink Mabuya carinata - 8 Garden Lizard Calotes versicolor -

Table 3.17 : List of common birds found in the region

SN Common Name Scientific Name Schedule of Wildlife Protection Act in which listed

1 Cattle Egret Bubulcus ibis IV 2 Little Egret Egretta garzetta IV 3 Red Jungle Fowl Gallus gallus IV 4 Common Mynah Acridotheres tristris IV 5 Red Vent Bulbul Pycnonotus cafer IV 6 Pied Crested Cuckoo Clammator jacobinus IV 7 Common Crow Corvus splendens V 8 Blue Rock Pegion Columba livia IV 9 House Sparrow Passer domesticus -

10 Pied Mynah Sturnus contra IV 11 Pond Heron Ardeola grayii IV 12 Doves Streptopelia spp. IV 13 Crow Pheasant Centropus sinensis IV 14 Partridge Francolinus spp. IV 15 Jungle Bush Quail Perdicula asiatica IV 16 Koel Eudynamis scolopacea IV 17 Bank Myna Acridotheres ginginianus IV 18 Shikra Accipiter badius IV 19 Painted spur-fowl Galloperdix lunulata IV 20 Wagtail Motacilla spp. IV 21 White-necked Stork Ciconia episcopus IV

3.2.10 BASELINE STATUS OF EXISTING UVSL STEEL PLANT

Uttam Value Steel Limited (UVSL), a group company, is operating a 1.0 Mt/yr hot rolled coil plant at Bhugaon, District Wardha, Maharashtra. Hot-rolled coils are converted into cold-rolled coils and thereafter to GP/GC sheets. The company has a technology collaboration with reputed technology providers. M/s. Uttam Value Steels limited (UVSL), Wardha has Hot rolling, Cold rolling and galvanising facilities.

EIA REPORT FOR




Consent to operate the HRM & CRM from MPCB is enclosed at the end of the chapter which is valid till 30.04.2015 and 31.08.2015 respectively. Certified copy of the report of the status of compliance of the conditions stipulated in the environmental clearance by Regional Office of Ministry of Environment, Forests and Climate Change is also enclosed at the end of the chapter. To establish the baseline scenario for different environmental components in the project site, data generation has been done with respect to the followings:

Stack emissions of the existing units of UVSL. Solid waste characterisation. Ambient air quality of existing units of UVSL. Waste water discharge quality at different outlets of UVSL.

UVSL is regularly monitoring the stack emission, work zone air & noise quality and effluent quality. Average Value of Monitored data from March 2013 to August 2013 has been presented below. Stack Emissions Selection of Stacks for Monitoring Stack emissions of the existing units (process and de-dusting stacks) were monitored. Methodology Monitoring was done monthly so that all the stacks are covered in three months. The methodology adopted is given in Table 3.18.

Table 3.18: Methodology Adopted for Stack Monitoring SN Parameter(s) Apparatus Used Method Reference Analysis

Method 1. Particulate Matter (PM) Envirotech APM 610

Stack Sampling Kit As per CPCB Gravimetric

2. Sulphur Di-oxide (SO2) -do-; Titration As per CPCB Titrimetric 3. Oxides of Nitrogen

(NOx) -do-; Spectro-photometer

Phenol di-sulphonic Acid (EPA), ASTM

Colorimetric

Results In Table 3.19 the results of the stack monitoring are presented, from the Table it is inferred that all values are with in the specified norms of CPCB.

EIA REPORT FOR




Table 3.19 : Stack Monitoring Results of Existing Units of UVSL

Sl. No.

Name of the stack Height Dia T (°C)

Velocity (m/s)

Flow (Nm3/hr)

PM (mg/m3)

So2 (mg/m3)

Nox (mg/m3)

Acid Mist (mg/m3)

1 Reheating Furnace 80 4.0 145 8.5 277000 24.7 68.5 51.1 - 2 ARP 25 0.4 - - - 30.1 3 Pickling 30 0.8 - - - 39.8

Norms: PM = 100 mg/Nm3 Solid Waste

Generation Solid waste generated from UVSL from its different units and its re-utilisation and disposal is given in Table 3.20. Table 3.20: Solid Waste Generation and Disposal for the Existing Plant Facilities

Sl. No

Waste Units in which waste is generated

Utilized in Total Generation Utilization

1 Slag EAF Sold 58419 t - 2 Flue Dust From Pollution Control facility Reused 3581 t 3581 t

Total 62000 t 3581 t Characterisation Solid waste sample of the existing UVSL operation, were collected for analysis. The sample was analysed for chemical composition and heavy metals as per standard analytical procedures. The results of EAF slag sample is given in Table 3.21.

Chemical composition result of EAF slag

Chemical Composition Unit EAF Slag Silica (as SiO2) % 40.41 Calcium (as CaO) % 32.38 Magnesium (as MgO) % 6.41 Iron ( as Fe2O3) % 6.065 Aluminium (as Al2O3) % 2.6 Sodium (as Na2O) % 0.54 Pottasium (as K2O) % 0.06 Titanum (as TiO2) % BDL Phosphorous (as P2O5) % 2.18 Zinc (as ZnO) % 0.005 Sulphur % 1.24

EIA REPORT FOR




TCLP RESULT OF SOLID WASTE SAMPLES AS PER EPA 1311

Metals Contaminant Unit EAF Slag Regulatory Level

Arsenic mg/L BDL (DL: 0.1 mg/L) 5.0 mg/L Barium mg/L 0.16 (DL: 0.1 mg/L) 100.0 mg/L Cadmium mg/L BDL (DL: 0.1 mg/L) 1.0 mg/L Chromium mg/L 0.69 (DL: 0.1 mg/L) 5.0 mg/L Lead mg/L 0.00 (DL: 0.1 mg/L) 5.0 mg/L Mercury mg/L BDL (DL: 0.1 mg/L) 0.2 mg/L Selenium mg/L BDL (DL: 0.1 mg/L) 1.0 mg/L Silver mg/L BDL (DL: 0.1 mg/L) 5.0 mg/L

Volatile Organic Compound Contaminant Unit EAF Slag Regulatory Level

Benzene mg/L BDL (DL: 0.02 mg/L) 0.5 mg/L Carbon tetrachloride mg/L BDL (DL: 0.02 mg/L) 0.5 mg/L Chlorobenzene mg/L BDL (DL: 0.02 mg/L) 100.0 mg/L Chloroform mg/L BDL (DL: 0.02 mg/L) 6.0 mg/L 1,2-Dichloroethane mg/L BDL (DL: 0.02 mg/L) 0.5 mg/L 1,1-Dichloroehylene mg/L BDL (DL: 0.02 mg/L) 0.7 mg/L Methyl ethyl ketone mg/L Absent 200.0 mg/L Tetrachloroethylene mg/L BDL (DL: 0.02 mg/L) 0.7 mg/L Trichloroethylene mg/L BDL (DL: 0.02 mg/L) 0.5 mg/L Vinyl chloride mg/L BDL (DL: 0.02 mg/L) 0.2 mg/L

PesticidesContaminant Unit EAF Slag Regulatory Level

Chlorodane mg/L BDL (DL: 0.001 mg/L) 0.03 mg/L Endrin mg/L BDL (DL: 0.001 mg/L) 0.02 mg/L Heptachlor (and its epoxide) mg/L BDL (DL: 0.001 mg/L) 0.008 mg/L

Lindane mg/L BDL (DL: 0.001 mg/L) 0.4 mg/L Methoxychlor mg/L BDL (DL: 0.001 mg/L) 10.0 mg/L Toxaphene mg/L Absent 0.5 mg/L

Semi-Volatile Organic Compounds Contaminant Unit EAF Slag Regulatory Level

o-Cresol mg/L BDL (DL: 0.001 mg/L) 200.0 mg/L m-Cresol mg/L BDL (DL: 0.001 mg/L) 200.0 mg/L p-Cresol mg/L BDL (DL: 0.001 mg/L) 200.0 mg/L Cresol mg/L BDL (DL: 0.001 mg/L) 200.0 mg/L 1,4-Dichlorobenzene mg/L BDL (DL: 0.02 mg/L) 7.5 mg/L 2,4-Dichlorotoulene mg/L Absent 0.13 mg/L Hexachlorobenzene mg/L BDL (DL: 0.001 mg/L) 0.13 mg/L

EIA REPORT FOR




Hexachlorobutadiene mg/L BDL (DL: 0.02 mg/L) 0.5 mg/L Hexachloroethane mg/L BDL (DL: 0.001 mg/L) 3.0 mg/L Nitrobenzene mg/L Absent 2.0 mg/L Pentachlorophenol mg/L BDL (DL: 0.001 mg/L) 100.0 mg/L Pyridine mg/L Absent 5.0 mg/L 2,4,5-Trichlorophenol mg/L BDL (DL: 0.001 mg/L) 400.0 mg/L 2,4,6-Trichlorophenol mg/L BDL (DL: 0.001 mg/L) 2.0 mg/L

Herbicides Contaminant Unit EAF Slag Regulatory Level

2,4-D mg/L Absent 10.0 mg/L 2,4,5-TP (Silvex) mg/L Absent 1.0 mg/L

The above sample results are compared with schedule (I) & (II) for Iron and Steel plant as per The Hazardous wastes (Management and Handling) Rules, 1989 as amended in September’2008 and hence are non hazardous.

Hazardous Waste

Hazardous Wastes produced from UVSL, re-cycling and disposal practices are given in Table 3.22.

Table 3.22: Hazardous Waste Generated from UVSL

Sl No

Process Category No

Category Quantity KL or t / Year

Treatment

1 Industrial operations using mineral / synthatic oil as lubricant in hydraulic or other applications

5.1 Used Oil 123 t / Year Reused and balance sold to authorised party approved by CPCB & MSPCB

2 Chemical sludge from waste water treatment

34.3 ETP Sludge

446.84 t/y Send to VEPL ( Vidarbha Enviro Protection Ltd) Land Fill site

Work Zone Air Quality

Selection of Monitoring Locations

Monitoring of work zone air quality was carried out at various locations spread over all the units of the plant. Parameters monitored were Respirable Suspended Particulate Matter (RSPM – PM10) and Total Particulate Matter (TPM).

Methodology

The Methods of Sampling and Analysis, Equipment used is given in Table 3.23.

EIA REPORT FOR




Table 3.23: Method of Sampling and Analysis of Work Zone Air Quality

Sl. No

Parameters Instruments / Apparatus used

Method followed

1 Respirable Particulate Matter (RPM)

Respirable Dust Sampler (RDS), Balance

Gravimetry

2 Nitrogen Oxides (NOx) RDS/HVAS with Impinger tubes, Spectrophotometer

Jacobs and Hochheiser modified (Na-arsenite) Method

3 Sulphur di-oxide (SO2) RDS/HVAS with Impinger tubes, Spectrophotometer

Improved West & Gaecke Method

Results of Work-zone Air Quality

The work-zone air quality of various areas are shown in Table 3.24, the monitored values are compared with Factories Act norm (as amended in 1994). The following is inferred from the table: At all the monitoring locations the values of different parameters are below the

Factories Act norms.

Table 3.24 : Work-zone Air Quality of Different Shops/Units of UVSL

Sl. No.

Air Quality - work area PM 10 TPM mg/m3 mg/m3

1 Near Weight Bridge 0.22 0.32 2 Near Canteen 0.12 0.24 3 Near Bulk Material Office 0.32 0.52 4 Near HRCTL work Room 0.12 0.24 Norms of Factories Act as amended 1994 5mg/m3 10mg/m3

Work Zone Noise Work zone noise levels were monitored and the monitoring details in different units of UVSL are given in Table 3.25. From the results it can be seen, the noise level in some work zone is below the norm as prescribed by OSHA norm for eight hours.

Table 3.25: Work Zone Noise

Sl. No.

Noise - Work area Noise level dB(A)

1 EAF-I Area 79.6 2 EAF-II Area 80.4 3 Hot Rolling Mill Area 80.1 4 Compressor Room Area 81.3 5 Reheating Furnace Area 81.0 6 Finishing Mill Area 78.0 7 Roughing Mill Area 79.2 OSHA Norm for eight hours 90

EIA REPORT FOR




Effluent Quality & Sewage Effluent

No effluent is discharged outside plant boundary by UVSL.

Sampling Locations Effluent samples were collected for effluent quality analysis from ETP of UVSL (both inlet & outlet) and STP outlets.

Methodology Grab effluent samples were collected for analysis every month during 2013 and were analysed for different parameters. Samples were analysed for different parameters as required by MOE&F, Wastewater Discharge Standard. Samples were analysed for different parameters as per American Public Health Association (APHA), 1995 - "Standard Methods for the Examination of Water and Waste Water" and IS: 3205 (Part 39) 1990 (reaffirmed 1996). Results The average values of effluent characteristics as observed in the samples collected from ETP which receives effluents from different plant units during monitoring period are found to be within the norms for different parameters as specified by MSPCB as given in Table 3.26 below:

Table 3.26 :Effluent Analysis report for UVSL (Average value)

Sl. No.

Parameter ETP Inlet

ETP outlet

STP outlet 1

STP outlet 2

1 pH 4.6 8.3 8.2 8.2 2 Suspended Solids 131.8 77.6 12.2 15.9 3 Oil and Grease N.D. N.D. N.D. N.D. 4 Dissolved Oxygen - 6.08 5.6 5.3 5 Biochemical Oxygen Demand (3 Days

27°C) 46.67 27.8 10.5 11.8

6 Chemical Oxygen Demand 146.7 110.17 30.3 34.0 7 Chromium (as Cr) 0.165 <0.1 - - 8 Zinc (as Zn) 0.17 0.12 - - 9 Total Dissolved Solids 5749.8 3228 359 361.8 10 Chloride (as Cl) 3724.5 1397.3 44.9 55.6 11 Sulphate (as SO4) 276 77.7 30.5 32.4 12 Iron (as Fe) 35.47 2.4 - -

Petrological & Chemical Analysis of Raw Materials

UVSL is using various raw materials for their operations in the steel plant. GPS locations

EIA REPORT FOR




and Petrological & Chemical analysis of various raw materials are given below:

GPS locations of raw materials sources

Sl No

Raw Material Location Mode of transport

Co-ordinates

1 Dolomite Mandla (Madhya Pradesh)

Korpana (Maharashtra)

By Truck 22° 35' 52.52''N 80° 22' 16.99'' E

19° 44' 21.03'' N 78° 59' 25.18'' E

2 Limestone Jodhpur (Rajasthan)

Wardha (Maharashtra)

Katni (Madhya Pradesh)

By Truck 26° 14' 20.21''N 73° 1' 27.51'' E

20° 44' 43.15''N 78° 36' 7.9'' E

23° 50' 9.89'' N 80° 23' 43.69'' E

Chemical & Trace metal analysis of raw materials used in steel making

Element Unit Limestone Lumps

Limestone (Fine)

Dolomite (Lumps)

Dolomite (Fine)

Ni (%) 0.003 0.0012 0.0016 0.00074 As (%) 0.00003 0.00002 0.00009 0.00005 Pb (%) 0.00016 0.00063 0.00069 0.00090 Zn (%) 0.0200 0.00170 0.00028 0.00048 Hg (%) BDL BDL BDL BDL Se (%) BDL BDL BDL BDL

SiO2 (%) 7.00 7.21 4.12 2.19 Fe (%) 1.343 0.559 1.27 1.049

FeO (%) 1.728 0.720 1.636 1.350 Fe2O3 (%) 1.92 0.800 1.82 1.50 Al2O3 (%) 1.19 1.27 0.59 0.54 MgO (%) 1.45 0.79 23.46 21.08 CaO (%) 47.88 49.67 40.6 34.03 K2O (%) 0.186 0.3147 0.1241 0.1363 Mn (%) 0.0219 0.0219 0.018 0.025

MnO (%) 0.0283 0.0283 0.0232 0.0323 S (%) 0.011 0.022 0.0043 0.0068 P (%) 0.036 0.089 0.02 0.02

P2O5 (%) 0.082 0.204 0.0458 0.046 Moisture (H2O) (%) 0.0486 0.062 0.032 0.043

LOI (CO2) (%) 36.10 39.05 48.23 44.24

The amount of the trace elements present in the raw materials is minimal and they do

EIA REPORT FOR




not pose any risk to environment or human health.

3.2.11 Occupational Health Status

Occupational Health of the workers in UVSL is looked after by Occupational Health Centre which is managed by Factory Medical Officer, staff nurses and ward assistant under the supervision of chief of medical and health services.

Occupational health service activities being followed in the existing plant is as follows:

1.Pre-employment medical examination of employee

Employees recruited for employment undergo necessary pre employment medical examination for fitness for the job. In this way, right persons are selected for right job.

2. Periodical medical examination of employees:

Periodic medical examination of employees is being conducted regularly and necessary feed back is being provided to individuals. They undergo lung function test, audiometry test, X-ray chest, E.C.G., blood & urine examination and clinical examination. Current year data is given below.

3. Industrial hygiene survey:

Industrial hygiene survey is being conducted at UVSL through OHC to assess the nature and level of hazards inside the plant and for necessary planning & action to reduce these hazard levels. Due to very nature of operation in the plant, there were few incidences of noise. However, because of the excellent engineering control measures and hearing conservation programme like periodic audiometry examination, motivating employees to use personal protective equipments like ear muff & ear plugs, noise induced problems are negligible.

4. Eye check up for the employees:

Crane operators and drivers undergo eye check up for refractory error by Ophthalmologist once in two years. Current year data is given below.

5. Food handlers hygiene check-up:

Food handlers in canteen undergo hygiene check up once in six months since they may be a source of infection to others. All of them undergo stool examination for ova and cyst. Treatment is given accordingly. All of them are given one dose of Albendazole 400 mg under direct supervision. They are given fitness certificate (Form 40) after ensuring fitness.

In addition to the above, first aid training & treatment and maintenance of first aid boxes are also looked after by the Occupational Health Services.

EIA REPORT FOR




There is no evidence of Occupational disease at UVSL.

OCCUPATIONAL HEALTH AT UVSL SITE (2012-2013) SL. NO.

NAME OF THE EXAMINATION UVSL

1 Total Health Examination 603 2 Health complaint 29 3 Found major complaint (colour blindness) 09 4 Found Minor Complaints, Diabetes - 08, Hypertension- 03, Prostate-03,

Renal Stone - 03, Ectopic Kidney - 01, diminished Hearing - 02 20

3.2.12 SODAR Monitoring at site

The lower part of the atmosphere, called Atmospheric Boundary Layer (ABL), around us is the domain of life and all human activities are confined within it. Increased urbanization and industrialization deteriorate the quality of air that we breathe. Therefore, it is essential to maintain air quality for healthier living. In pursuit of the same, Mother Nature has gifted us with naturally occurring atmospheric processes which provide adequate means of natural dispersion of pollutants and thereby maintain the air quality for healthy living. Therefore, in order to strike a balance between the industrialization for economic growth and at the same time management of air quality, it is essential to understand the working mechanism of those atmospheric processes so as to plan strategies in relation to quality management. In this context, processes such as radiational cooling of ground after sunset lead to stable ABL conditions characterized by ground based temperature inversion lead to trapping / or accumulation of pollutants while on the other hand processes favoring unstable ABL conditions such as solar heating of the ground or strong surface winds provide natural dispersion or ventilation of the pollutants. These processes are known to occur alternatively on diurnal scale in accordance with the occurrence of day after the night. Thus accumulation of pollutants during the night time stable ABL is taken care of in a natural way by the atmospheric ventilation provide by solar heat during the day. Pollution problems emerge when the accumulation dominates over the ventilation factor. Such conditions do occur when the local or synoptic weather conditions such as cold winter, dense fog etc. support persistence of inversions for longer periods. Thus, for an effective environment management, a balance must be maintained to regulate our pollution concerned activities in accordance with the ventilation or cleaning capacity of the atmosphere in a natural way.

Therefore, study of atmospheric processes which provide air quality control measures is an important parameter of consideration to plan activities that are likely to degrade air quality. In pursuit of the same, carrying out Environment Impact Assessment (EIA) studies in respect of setting up new industries, expansion of existing industries, site for industrial zone etc. is recommended by the environment protection agencies worldwide. In view of the growing industrialization etc., strict environmental laws have been enforced for protection of the environment. In several cases it is now mandatory to seek environmental clearance for specific industries, from the official agencies such as

EIA REPORT FOR




Central / State Pollution Control Boards.

When it comes to undertaking EIA, local study of air pollution meteorology and the characteristics of atmospheric process which govern air quality are vital input parameters of consideration in dispersion modeling for EIA. These inputs are derived via monitoring of the atmospheric boundary layer (ABL), which is the lowest part of the atmosphere, extending from earth surface up-to the height at which the thermal forcing from the earth can reach. In this context, the direct measurable parameter of relevance to air quality is the inversion and mixing heights which respectively indicates the accumulation and ventilation capacity of the ABL.

The mixing height is, practically, the height up-to which emissions near the ground get mixed up vertically in the atmosphere during day time unstable ABL conditions. On the other hand, inversion height is the height up-to which pollutants get trapped during night time static stability conditions of the atmosphere. These outcomes (inversion / mixing height) are the results of upward / downward heat exchange between earth surface and the atmosphere. Since local meteorological parameters and topographical features play a significant role in such heat exchange and they vary from place to place, the inversion / mixing heights become site specific parameters. Therefore, air pollution meteorological studies for EIA call for site specific parameterization of mixing / inversion height.

Several remote sensing and in-situ conventional techniques, with relative merits and demerits are in use to study mixing height. However, Sodar is considered as the meritorious and economical choice to provide site specific continuous data in real time.

Longer period Sodar observations have found potential application in air pollution meteorology. It makes possible to define meteorological conditions (ground based elevated inversion layer) responsible for pollution accumulation near the ground. This is a knowledge which is very useful in interpretation of pollution measurement data and particularly so in recognizing the responsibility for pollution episodes (growing emission or meteorology).

The use of Sodar derived mixing / inversion height is also recommended by CPCB guide lines for air quality dispersion modeling. In pursuit of the same, Sodar studies of inversion / mixing height have been undertaken at the project site at Wardha, Maharashtra.

Sodar study based on continuous observations pertaining to the study period (1st May to 31st May 2013) is presently carried out. The observations are analyzed to deliver required information on inversion level / mixing height.

Determination of inversion / mixing height

The basic data format is the facsimile chart giving three dimensional display of the intensity of atmospheric echoes from various heights in real time. Basically, data comprises of two types of echoes: thermal echoes and shear echoes. Thermal echoes indicating thermal convection are associated with solar heating of the ground during

EIA REPORT FOR




the day time and the shear echoes representing stable ABL or inversion associated with radiational cooling of the ground during night time.

Thermal Echoes In the case of thermal convection, during sunny periods (around noon hours), the earth’s surface is most heated due to direct solar radiation falling on the earth. With the result, the air close to earth becomes much warmer than the air aloft and thus it rises due to buoyancy. When this parcel of air rises, it expands and interacts with the background air all around its periphery. Thus, as it moves up, it becomes smaller and smaller in its original diameter and on Sodar, a cone shape structure with broad base and tapered column is formed. This typical structure, shown in Fig. 7, is commonly known as thermalplumes. The thermal plumes induce convective air currents which cause vertical mixing and all the pollutants near the surface of earth are carried up by these vertical currents in the air. Thus, the pollution density on the surface of earth gets reduced. Such thermals can be easily identified through pattern recognition and represent unstable atmosphere. Under thermal convection, the surface air temperature is much higher than the temperature of air aloft up to certain height, later on there is adiabatic fall of temperature.

Thermal plumes (on Sodar) representing free convection in ABL

Shear Echoes

In the evening, close to sun set, there is no heating of the surface of earth and earth losses its heat energy due to the radiative cooling. Thus a stage reaches when the temperature of air becomes homogenous. The ABL comes in near neutral state and it shows no signature or blank trace on Sodar facsimile chart, showing neutral stability or absence of turbulence in ABL.

With the progress of time after sunset, earth starts losing heat and becomes cooler than the air above it. This results in increase of temperature with height and temperature profile is inverse of what it was previously during solar heating of the ground. As a result, the air-mass close to the surface of earth cools off rapidly. This cool air being heavier than the over lying warmer air can not rise up and it rests, as stable air mass, on the ground surface. This part of the atmospheric layer which is warmer than underlying earth surface but cooler than over lying air mass is known as inversion layer within which the temperature increases with height or the temperature profile is inverse of day time temperature profile. Hence the name temperature inversion is acquired. On Sodar record it looks as thick band of layer with flat or spiky top and is called ground based

EIA REPORT FOR




inversion .

Sodar echogram of surface based inversion dynamics

At times elevated layers in addition to ground based inversion are formed due to wind shear, advection of warm air over the colder region, subsidence associated with frontal passage etc. These inversions lead to suppression of the vertical mixing and thereby leading to the enhancement of pollution below the inversion layer.

Determination of Inversion / Mixing Height

Sodar structural details of inversion are used to derive online information on nocturnal inversion level of stable ABL and mixing depth of thermal convective unstable ABL during day time solar heating of the ground. In case of Stable ABL, top of the ground based inversion layer gives a fairly good estimate of the inversion level for practical applications in dispersion modeling. This information about inversion level is available with every scan of 6 seconds during Sodar operation. However, hourly averaged value of inversion level, which is indeed required for practical application, can be read directly online from the Sodar facsimile records or can be computed (Offline) through software capabilities using stored digital data files.

In case of thermally convective unstable ABL, mixing height is determined through empirical relationship (Singal et. al., 1982) which is based on Sodar recorded height of the thermal plumes. The relationship: [mixing height = 4.25 x (thermal plume height) +95]: is the result of the R&D efforts of National Physical Laboratory, New Delhi-110012. It may be mentioned that the said relationship is the out come of detailed year long correlation studies of simultaneous observations made by Sodar and conventional radio sonde at IMD observatory located at Aya Nagar, Delhi. Since Sodar observations are manifestation of the net upward turbulent heat flux taking into account the effect of topographical features, the relationship is said to be embedded with topographical influence on mixing height and is useful for application for different sites. In pursuit of the

EIA REPORT FOR




same the relationship has been re-verified to hold good even for hilly terrain (Singal, 1998). Therefore, the said relationship has been used in the present work to compute mixing height for unstable ABL during the day time solar heating periods.

Results and discussion

The various characteristic thermal of ABL such as thermal plumes, ground based inversion, elevated inversions, eroding inversion which are normally observed at any site have been observed at the present site of Uttam Galva Metallics Limited at Wardha, Maharashtra as well.

Visual examination of the echograms (of study period) has revealed that onset of inversion formation begins around 1830 hours in the evening during the summer month (1st May to 31st May 2013). This time varies with season and prevailing weather conditions. It marks change of atmospheric stability from unstable to stable ABL.

The break of inversion (fumigation) is seen to start at around 0730 hours in the morning and lasts upto around 0900 hours. Complete changeover of stability, from stable to unstable ABL takes place around 0900 hours. The fumigation period varies in accordance with prevailing weather conditions and season. Fumigation period is seen to vary from half an hour to 90 minutes. Prolonged fumigation period (beyond 3 hours) indicates either strong inversion or adverse weather conditions for air pollution. Such situations are not seen during the present study period. The of study of onset and break up of inversion timings reveals availability of a good atmospheric ventilation period of about 10 hours ( 0800-1800 hours) during summer at Wardha. Further, The ABL stability is seen to vary from stability class A to E. The occurrence of strong stability condition (stability F) is seen to be insignificant during the present study. The moderate stability (stability E) condition is seen to be prevailing on almost all nights of observations. This indicates inversions gradients are not very strong during

VARRIOUS ABL THERMAL STRUCTURES OBSERVED AT WARDHA, MAHARASTRA

A: Onset of thermal plume and inversion formation

EIA REPORT FOR




B: Eroding Inversion

C: Low level Inversion Besides, elevated and wavy inversion layers are also not seen during the observational period.

The hourly averaged values of nocturnal inversion level and the day time mixing height have been computed based on the observed Sodar structural details on the facsimile records. The examination of data in the table shows variability of inversion/ mixing height in different hours on different days. This variability from hour to hour is associated with variations in the local micrometeorological conditions such as prevailing wind speed, wind direction, cloud cover, sunshine, humidity, incursion of mountain wind, land-sea breeze etc. Sudden increase in the inversion level is generally associated with the variation in the vertical component of increase in the wind speed. Vertical wind component induces mechanical mixing in the stable air mass of inversion and thereby increases the height of inversion level. Therefore, high values of inversion level in certain hours are presumed to be associated with higher wind speed or change in some other meteorological parameter causing increase in the vertical transfer of momentum during those hours. At times increased winds due to coastal fronts contribute significantly in inducing upward transfer of momentum flux causing mechanical mixing of air mass in the ground inversion and thereby leading to increase of inversion height.

The inversion build up is known to starts shortly after sun set due to nocturnal cooling of

EIA REPORT FOR




the ground. The inversion height increases in accordance with increased cooling of the ground with passage of time. Under calm and clear sky conditions it (inversion) attains maximum height during the period of maximum cooling (0300-0500 hours) at night. Therefore, the data pertaining to 0300-0500 can be been analyzed to know the variational trends and the monthly averaged height of inversion level.

The overall observational analysis shows that during the one month observational, period of 1st May to 31st May 2013, the ABL is seen to remain stable during the period 1900-0600 hour and unstable ABL is confined to the period the between 0900 hours to 1700 hours. The remaining hours are seen to exhibit transitional phases of stable ABL to unstable ABL in the morning ( breaking inversion) and reverse unstable to stable ABL ( inversion formation) in the evening.

The height of stable ABL (inversion) is seen to vary from a minimum of about 61m to a maximum of about 220m during the observational period (1800 hours to 0600 hours). However, the average inversion level is seen to be 129±63m.

Similar analysis of day time unstable ABL shows that the height of unstable ABL (free thermal convection) during course of the day (after the inversion dissipation) is seen to vary from a minimum of about 508m to maximum of about 1680 m during the observational period. However, the average mixing height is seen to be 941±272m.

The diurnal variation of ABL mixing height further shows that maximum of inversion height is in seen during periods of maximum ground cooling (0300-0500 hours) while maximum of day time maximum mixing height is observed around noon hours (1200-1400 hours) when the ground temperature is also maximum. These observations support the concept of the meteorological considerations that maximum inversion height and mixing heights are observed during periods of maximum cooling and heating of the ground.

EIA REPORT FOR




Diurnal variation of hourly averaged inversion /mixing height at Wardha

Diurnal variation of daily averaged inversion /mixing height at Wardha

EIA REPORT FOR




Diurnal variation of hourly Minimum, Average & Maximum inversion /mixing height at Wardha

Diurnal variation of daily Minimum, Average & Maximum inversion /mixing height at Wardha

EIA REPORT FOR




3.2.13 Litigation pending against the project

No litigation and / or any direction / order passed by any court of law against the project is pending.

However, show cause notice dated 16.03.2013 from MPCB has been served under Water (Prevention and Control of Pollution) Act, 1974 and Air (Prevention and Control of Pollution) Act, 1981. The reply of the same dated 09.04.2013 has already been submitted to MPCB.

Copy of show cause & reply is attached at the end of the chapter.

EIA REPORT FOR




EIA REPORT FOR




AAQ OBSERVATIONS A -1: Plant Main Gate

Week Date PM10

μg/m3

PM2.5

μg/m3

SO2 NOX O3 NH3 Pb As Ni BaP Benzene CO

μg/m3 μg/m3 μg/m3 μg/m3 μg/m3 ng/m3 ng/m3 μg/m3 μg/m3 μg/m3

W 1 15-03-2013 70.3 35.2 16.2 19.6 28.9 9.4 0.026 0.52 1.26 ND ND 1665

18-03-2013 59.8 33.6 15.8 19.2 33.7 6.7 0.029 1.19 0.96 ND ND 1434

W 2 22-03-2013 69.5 39.4 15.4 18.3 35.9 7.4 BDL 0.43 2.03 ND ND 1465

25-03-2013 68.8 40.1 16.3 20.3 38.7 8.3 0.016 0.69 1.45 ND ND 1375

W 3 29-03-2013 70.3 33.5 15.6 20.6 40 9.2 0.032 BDL 1.63 ND ND 1798

01-04-2013 61.8 32.6 17.2 21.6 34.8 6.5 0.021 1.23 2.31 ND ND 1702

W 4 05-04-2013 60.1 41.8 16.8 22.3 39.2 12.6 0.045 1.03 1.82 ND ND 1870

08-04-2013 63.4 40.3 15.6 19.8 36.3 8.4 0.032 0.58 0.98 ND ND 1961

W 5 12-04-2013 70.3 42.6 16.2 18.9 29.9 11.6 0.024 0.69 1.06 ND ND 2022

15-04-2013 65.2 38.4 17.6 20.8 34.5 9.3 0.04 1.12 2.45 ND ND 2051

W 6 19-04-2013 64.6 37.9 18.3 23.6 41 7.5 0.019 0.84 1.34 ND ND 1444

22-04-2013 66.9 39.4 16.6 21.7 33.8 6.9 0.02 0.63 2.08 ND ND 1755 W 7 26-04-2013 61.2 41.6 15.8 19.8 27.2 10.2 0.031 1.24 0.96 ND ND 1640

29-04-2013 62.5 42.2 16.3 26.5 31.8 9.1 BDL 0.96 1.45 ND ND 1465

W 8 03-05-2013 62.8 38.6 18.6 30.8 33.8 6.5 0.046 0.57 0.98 ND ND 2162

06-05-2013 63.9 36.4 19.2 28.9 31.8 7.6 0.022 0.46 2.05 ND ND 1685

W 9 10-05-2013 65.4 35.3 17.8 35.4 30.7 11 BDL 0.94 2.14 ND ND 1863

13-05-2013 70.1 40.3 17.4 25.4 35.6 10.3 0.038 0.81 2.36 ND ND 1870

W 10 17-05-2013 65.6 40.8 16.9 19.6 30.8 9.2 0.019 1.1 1.59 ND ND 1702

20-05-2013 64.5 39.2 18.3 22.3 33.1 8.3 0.023 BDL 1.87 ND ND 1584

W 11 24-05-2013 66.2 37.4 19.6 26.9 34.6 10.4 0.034 0.58 2.09 ND ND 1688

27-05-2013 63.2 38.2 17.8 30.4 37.9 8.4 0.024 0.96 2.56 ND ND 1352

W 12 31-05-2013 63.4 40.2 18.3 27.4 35.8 7.3 0.016 1.05 1.47 ND ND 1782

03-06-2013 62.6 36.1 18.9 24.9 36.2 9.8 0.029 BDL 1.36 ND ND 1456

W 13 07-06-2013 61.8 37.4 17.6 22.8 33.3 10.6 0.032 0.54 2.02 ND ND 1895

10-06-2013 68.2 36.6 18.2 26.9 27.6 8.9 BDL 0.68 1.84 ND ND 1409

A-1 Max. 70.3 42.6 19.6 35.4 41 12.6 0.046 1.24 2.56 ND ND 2162

Min. 59.8 32.6 15.4 18.3 27.2 6.5 0.016 0.43 0.96 ND ND 1352

Average 65.1 38.3 17.2 23.6 34.1 8.9 0.0 0.8 1.7 ND ND 1696

EIA REPORT FOR




AAQ OBSERVATIONS A – 2: China Colony

Week Date PM10

μg/m3

PM2.5

μg/m3



W 1 15-03-2013 58.3 38.6 13.6 17.3 27.4 7.5 0.016 0.36 0.84 ND ND 1034

18-03-2013 52.3 40.2 14.8 16.9 34.2 8.2 0.022 BDL 0.68 ND ND 896

W 2 22-03-2013 55.5 37.4 15.3 18.2 40 7.3 0.032 0.69 0.94 ND ND 1058

25-03-2013 58.2 38.9 14.4 19.2 37.5 9.4 0.026 0.91 0.53 ND ND 939

W 3 29-03-2013 57.8 40.5 13.2 15.9 33.8 5.9 0.019 1.02 1.02 ND ND 1024

01-04-2013 58.5 42.8 14.5 18.7 32.9 6.8 0.024 BDL 2.06 ND ND 1031

W 4 05-04-2013 60.3 43.6 13.6 19.2 37.5 4.2 BDL 0.59 1.47 ND ND 1134

08-04-2013 54.3 41.2 14.8 17.4 36.4 6.3 0.022 0.63 0.84 ND ND 942

W 5 12-04-2013 63.2 42.9 15.6 21.3 37.6 8.6 BDL 0.78 0.64 ND ND 1039

15-04-2013 55.8 39.8 16 19.6 34.9 10.8 0.031 1.06 1.25 ND ND 1126

W 6 19-04-2013 58.7 40.6 14.9 18.5 39 9.6 0.018 0.54 1.69 ND ND 1210

22-04-2013 56.2 42.6 13.9 16.7 30.8 8.3 0.022 1.09 2.13 ND ND 1095 W 7 26-04-2013 63.8 41.5 15.8 22.6 33.7 5.6 0.026 0.58 0.68 ND ND 1024

29-04-2013 55.8 40.6 16.3 24.3 31.8 4.9 0.019 0.98 0.93 ND ND 1013

W 8 03-05-2013 63.2 38.4 15.4 19.4 29.6 11.8 0.03 0.46 1.06 ND ND 1028

06-05-2013 53.1 36.9 13.8 18.3 31.7 6.8 0.021 0.38 1.14 ND ND 1085

W 9 10-05-2013 54.9 43.7 14.9 20.4 34.5 8.2 BDL BDL 0.84 ND ND 1026

13-05-2013 53.2 40.6 16.2 21.7 33.3 5.3 0.018 BDL 0.53 ND ND 1185

W 10 17-05-2013 55.4 42 16.7 23.8 34.9 6.8 BDL 0.69 2.03 ND ND 1042

20-05-2013 57.3 39.9 15.9 19.4 32.9 8.3 0.023 0.84 1.48 ND ND 1098

W 11 24-05-2013 56.9 40.6 15.8 18.4 34.8 7.9 BDL 0.93 0.59 ND ND 1113

27-05-2013 50.2 38.1 16.3 26.4 36.5 9.2 0.024 0.52 1.03 ND ND 1362

W 12 31-05-2013 54.9 41.6 15.2 19.2 32.6 5.3 0.03 0.48 2.13 ND ND 1165

03-06-2013 59.3 40.9 14.9 18.3 30.7 10.2 0.026 0.67 1.56 ND ND 1167

W 13 07-06-2013 58.6 42.3 16 20.7 29.8 6.8 0.018 BDL 2.08 ND ND 1197

10-06-2013 55.3 39.6 15.3 21.6 28.3 9.2 0.014 0.48 1.69 ND ND 1230

A-2 Max. 63.8 43.7 16.7 26.4 40 11.8 0.032 1.09 2.13 ND ND 1362

Min. 50.2 36.9 13.2 15.9 27.4 4.2 0.014 0.36 0.53 ND ND 896

Average 57.0 40.6 15.1 19.7 33.7 7.7 0.0 0.7 1.2 ND ND 1087

EIA REPORT FOR




AAQ OBSERVATIONS A – 3: Bapukuti Area Sewagram

Week Date PM10 μg/m3

PM2.5 μg/m3



W 1 16-03-2013 48.6 18.4 9.4 11.6 41.1 6.1 BDL BDL BDL ND ND 981

19-03-2013 53.8 17.9 10.3 14.2 40.9 7.6 BDL BDL BDL ND ND 1043

W 2 23-03-2013 40.5 14.6 9.9 13 40.1 10.2 BDL BDL BDL ND ND 1056

26-03-2013 43.6 15.8 9.3 14 38.7 6.4 BDL BDL BDL ND ND 988

W 3 30-03-2013 41.6 14.7 11.5 18 32.6 8.6 BDL BDL BDL ND ND 934

02-04-2013 50.3 18.2 12 21.3 30.7 11.5 BDL BDL BDL ND ND 1123

W 4 06-04-2013 54.8 19.6 9.6 19.7 35.6 5.4 BDL BDL BDL ND ND 1115

09-04-2013 48.6 21.4 11 18.2 43.1 6.8 BDL BDL BDL ND ND 1093 W 5 13-04-2013 51.8 18.3 10.5 19 38.2 8.4 BDL BDL BDL ND ND 1084

16-04-2013 53.8 17.4 11.5 21.1 34.6 6.9 BDL BDL BDL ND ND 1155

W 6 20-04-2013 47.9 19.2 12.3 24.8 38.3 8.1 BDL BDL BDL ND ND 1062

23-04-2013 49.3 22.4 11.5 18.3 36.2 5.8 BDL BDL BDL ND ND 1073

W 7 27-04-2013 54.7 20.4 12.5 22.8 38.1 6.3 BDL BDL BDL ND ND 1102

30-04-2013 50.6 18.3 13.1 24.2 40.3 9.4 BDL BDL BDL ND ND 1158

W 8 04-05-2013 54.3 16.7 12.7 28 29.7 12 BDL BDL BDL ND ND 1165

07-05-2013 42.6 19.6 12.6 21.8 39.5 5.4 BDL BDL BDL ND ND 1156

W 9 11-05-2013 53.4 18.4 11.5 15.3 43.2 9.8 BDL BDL BDL ND ND 1038

14-05-2013 50.8 17.9 10.6 14.2 38.1 6.7 BDL BDL BDL ND ND 1032

W 10 18-05-2013 51.7 18.7 12 19 34.3 10.3 BDL BDL BDL ND ND 956

21-05-2013 54.8 22.4 12.9 24.8 31.7 8.4 BDL BDL BDL ND ND 1082

W 11 25-05-2013 53.6 17.4 12.3 23.3 35.6 7.1 BDL BDL BDL ND ND 1037

28-05-2013 49.3 18.9 11.5 18 30.8 6.6 BDL BDL BDL ND ND 1026

W 12 01-06-2013 44.7 14.8 12.7 16.6 30.6 5.8 BDL BDL BDL ND ND 1002

04-06-2013 52.8 17.9 12.5 20.5 36.4 11.6 BDL BDL BDL ND ND 1264

W 13 08-06-2013 50.3 18.1 11 15.2 35.9 9.2 BDL BDL BDL ND ND 1122 11-06-2013 45.6 15.6 10.6 15.7 33.2 7.4 BDL BDL BDL ND ND 1126

W 13 09-06-2013 59.2 21.9 8.6 14.1 34.9 3.9 BDL BDL BDL ND ND 892

12-06-2013 62.6 22.4 9.4 17 37.6 8.4 BDL BDL BDL ND ND 1132

A-3 Max. 62.6 22.4 13.1 28 43.2 12 BDL BDL BDL ND ND 1264

Min. 40.5 14.6 8.6 11.6 29.7 3.9 BDL BDL BDL ND ND 892

Average 50.6 18.5 11.3 18.7 36.4 7.9 BDL BDL BDL ND ND 1071

EIA REPORT FOR




AAQ OBSERVATIONS A – 4: Madhavgarh Village

Week Date PM10

μg/m3

PM2.5

μg/m3



W 1 17-03-2013 52.6 19.5 9.2 14 34.8 4.6 BDL BDL BDL ND ND 713

20-03-2013 53.9 20.8 8.6 13.7 53 3.4 BDL BDL BDL ND ND 852

W 2 24-03-2013 51.8 18.1 8.8 12.6 39.7 6.9 BDL BDL BDL ND ND 965

27-03-2013 54.2 23.8 8.4 15.1 42.8 5.1 BDL BDL BDL ND ND 932

W 3 31-03-2013 54.7 20.6 8.2 13.2 49.8 7.9 BDL BDL BDL ND ND 1025

03-04-2013 63.6 23.4 7.2 12.2 46.5 10.1 BDL BDL BDL ND ND 978

W 4 07-04-2013 60.4 22.6 7.6 14.1 43.4 6 BDL BDL BDL ND ND 729

10-04-2013 59.3 20.4 9.2 17.3 53.2 3.8 BDL BDL BDL ND ND 936

W 5 14-04-2013 61.8 19.2 8.4 13.7 43.6 4.9 BDL BDL BDL ND ND 932

17-04-2013 63.6 22.6 8 15.2 46.3 6.8 BDL BDL BDL ND ND 832

W 6 21-04-2013 57.8 21.5 7.4 16.4 39.9 7.9 BDL BDL BDL ND ND 938

24-04-2013 62.4 24.4 9.6 19.1 37.7 5.2 BDL BDL BDL ND ND 935 W 7 28-04-2013 63.6 22.5 10.4 22.4 37.2 11.4 BDL BDL BDL ND ND 1155

01-05-2013 59.5 21 8.6 18.2 41.9 8.4 BDL BDL BDL ND ND 913

W 8 05-05-2013 61.4 19.5 9.3 17.7 39.2 9.3 BDL BDL BDL ND ND 1065

08-05-2013 57.9 21.6 8.1 13.5 48.2 3.8 BDL BDL BDL ND ND 933

W 9 12-05-2013 59.3 20.7 7.7 11.6 29.9 9.1 BDL BDL BDL ND ND 1518

15-05-2013 62.2 21.9 10.1 17.1 36.4 10.8 BDL BDL BDL ND ND 982

W 10 19-05-2013 63.8 22.5 10.4 15.5 39.2 5.8 BDL BDL BDL ND ND 1220

22-05-2013 60.4 20.3 9.7 20.2 40.1 4.2 BDL BDL BDL ND ND 627

W 11 26-05-2013 61.4 24.6 8.6 11.3 42.8 11 BDL BDL BDL ND ND 1366

29-05-2013 59.7 21.6 8.8 13.7 47.6 6.1 BDL BDL BDL ND ND 1245

W 12 02-06-2013 57.9 20.1 7.7 10.4 36.5 5.3 BDL BDL BDL ND ND 1036

05-06-2013 61.4 22.5 8.4 13.5 40.3 4.2 BDL BDL BDL ND ND 1185

W 13 09-06-2013 59.2 21.9 8.6 14.1 38.2 3.9 BDL BDL BDL ND ND 856

12-06-2013 62.6 22.4 9.4 17 31.8 8.4 BDL BDL BDL ND ND 949

A-4 Max. 63.8 24.6 10.4 22.4 53.2 11.4 BDL BDL BDL ND ND 1518



EIA REPORT FOR




AAQ OBSERVATIONS A – 5: Bhugaon Village

Week Date PM10

μg/m3

PM2.5

μg/m3



W 1 15-03-2013 56.2 28.3 15.3 23.4 33.5 6.8 0.024 0.52 0.69 ND ND 1033

18-03-2013 58.4 27.3 15 20.8 38.7 9.6 0.02 1.02 0.94 ND ND 1165

W 2 22-03-2013 65.8 29.9 14.9 21.6 40.7 10.4 0.019 0.69 1.26 ND ND 862

25-03-2013 66.2 29.6 16.5 26.9 32.7 8.4 0.02 0.38 1.06 ND ND 950

W 3 29-03-2013 62.5 31.6 15.8 18.9 32.9 7.2 0.022 BDL 1.14 ND ND 1032

01-04-2013 53.5 33.1 14.6 24.6 33.7 9.1 0.023 0.89 0.84 ND ND 1123

W 4 05-04-2013 63.2 28.5 13.6 30.9 36.5 10.2 BDL 0.52 0.92 ND ND 1254

08-04-2013 59.9 26.5 14 28.4 41.3 11.2 0.014 BDL 1.23 ND ND 1058

W 5 12-04-2013 57.8 32.3 13.8 31.6 31.1 5.8 BDL 1.16 1.43 ND ND 1026

15-04-2013 58.6 30.2 16.8 23.8 34.2 9.3 0.018 1.2 0.96 ND ND 1432

W 6 19-04-2013 56.2 31.5 17.2 29.4 37.7 6.2 0.03 0.69 1.58 ND ND 1126

22-04-2013 55.9 32.6 15.9 19.4 38.2 7 0.021 0.83 0.94 ND ND 1163 W 7 26-04-2013 59.2 30.8 16.9 25.7 32.6 5.8 0.024 0.91 1.29 ND ND 1045

29-04-2013 59.3 29.5 17.6 33.9 41.5 6.8 BDL 0.52 1.64 ND ND 1086

W 8 03-05-2013 58.7 27.3 16.4 28.7 28.5 7.4 0.021 0.64 0.82 ND ND 1195

06-05-2013 65.1 33.4 15.8 19.3 36.5 8.6 0.016 BDL 0.69 ND ND 1123

W 9 10-05-2013 59.3 30.9 14.9 18.4 33.5 10.2 0.019 0.38 1.09 ND ND 856

13-05-2013 58.8 28.5 16.3 24.6 36.4 5.6 0.023 0.92 1.12 ND ND 1324

W 10 17-05-2013 59.2 30.1 17 22.6 30.2 8.4 BDL 1.06 1.23 ND ND 1254

20-05-2013 66.3 34.5 16.9 26.4 31.6 9.9 0.03 0.84 1.81 ND ND 1135

W 11 24-05-2013 55.3 31.6 15.6 19.8 32.9 10.2 0.024 0.69 0.84 ND ND 1136

27-05-2013 61.3 32.9 16.3 31.2 35.4 6.3 0.015 BDL 0.96 ND ND 1195

W 12 31-05-2013 60.8 30.1 17.2 26.8 37.4 8.4 0.016 0.49 1.03 ND ND 1216

03-06-2013 59.7 29.6 15.9 22.6 37.2 9.2 BDL 0.68 1.15 ND ND 1135

W 13 07-06-2013 61.9 27.5 16.4 26.4 31.6 5.8 0.024 1.08 0.82 ND ND 1145

10-06-2013 57.3 30.9 15.2 19.8 32.6 8.3 0.017 0.82 1.29 ND ND 1130

A-5 Max. 66.3 34.5 17.6 33.9 41.5 11.2 0.03 1.2 1.81 ND ND 1432

Min. 53.5 26.5 13.6 18.4 28.5 5.6 0.014 0.38 0.69 ND ND 856

Average 59.9 30.3 15.8 24.8 35.0 8.2 0.0 0.8 1.1 ND ND 1123

EIA REPORT FOR




AAQ OBSERVATIONS A – 6: Kurjhadi Village

Week Date PM10

μg/m3

PM2.5

μg/m3



W 1 17-03-2013 46.8 17.4 9.3 14.4 33.2 3.4 BDL BDL BDL ND ND 1011

20-03-2013 49.3 18.6 9.1 12.3 35.6 1.6 BDL BDL BDL ND ND 924

W 2 24-03-2013 46.4 16.5 10.4 15.5 42.1 8.3 BDL BDL BDL ND ND 965

27-03-2013 50.3 19.2 8.9 11 30.8 6.9 BDL BDL BDL ND ND 988

W 3 31-03-2013 48.9 17.6 9.1 15.4 33.5 2.4 BDL BDL BDL ND ND 1358

03-04-2013 51.8 20.3 10.7 12.4 37.9 7.3 BDL BDL BDL ND ND 1123

W 4 07-04-2013 45.6 19.4 8.9 13.2 34.6 3.9 BDL BDL BDL ND ND 914

10-04-2013 49.3 18.3 9 14.1 37.1 1.9 BDL BDL BDL ND ND 989

W 5 14-04-2013 50.8 20.6 9.3 12.5 35.6 1.4 BDL BDL BDL ND ND 1148

17-04-2013 46.8 16.8 9.9 17 37.9 4.9 BDL BDL BDL ND ND 1023

W 6 21-04-2013 50.8 19.6 10.3 15.5 32.8 5.6 BDL BDL BDL ND ND 1089


01-05-2013 46.3 18.6 8.9 13.2 31.5 8.4 BDL BDL BDL ND ND 1024

W 8 05-05-2013 48.6 17.3 10 11.8 36.4 6.5 BDL BDL BDL ND ND 1096

08-05-2013 44.5 16.5 10.7 17.3 37.2 4.9 BDL BDL BDL ND ND 1036

W 9 12-05-2013 52.4 20.4 11.4 15.5 36.8 2.2 BDL BDL BDL ND ND 1025

15-05-2013 49.6 18.6 11.8 20.4 32.4 9 BDL BDL BDL ND ND 1041

W 10 19-05-2013 48.3 16.8 9.6 14.7 32.9 5.2 BDL BDL BDL ND ND 862

22-05-2013 51.6 18.9 10.4 13.5 32.6 4.2 BDL BDL BDL ND ND 1123

W 11 26-05-2013 52.8 20.3 11.3 20.9 34.2 2.8 BDL BDL BDL ND ND 1158

29-05-2013 50.7 21.2 9.9 23.3 35.1 1.6 BDL BDL BDL ND ND 1159

W 12 02-06-2013 49.1 18.3 10.4 20.5 28.2 6.4 BDL BDL BDL ND ND 1057

05-06-2013 48.7 17.6 11.5 21.2 31.3 3.7 BDL BDL BDL ND ND 1039

W 13 09-06-2013 46.8 16.9 10.9 18 36.8 4.8 BDL BDL BDL ND ND 1035

12-06-2013 50.3 19.2 10.3 15.3 37.3 5.6 BDL BDL BDL ND ND 1050


Min. 44.5 16.5 8.9 11 28.2 1.4 BDL BDL BDL ND ND 862


EIA REPORT FOR




AAQ OBSERVATIONS A – 7: Salod Village

Week Date PM10

μg/m3

PM2.5

μg/m3



W 1 16-03-2013 48.9 17.6 9.6 11.3 32.1 6.8 BDL BDL BDL ND ND 982

19-03-2013 50.3 19.2 8.6 10.9 32.6 4.5 BDL BDL BDL ND ND 1002

W 2 23-03-2013 49.4 18.4 8.9 12.8 39.5 3.8 BDL BDL BDL ND ND 1158

26-03-2013 51.6 20.3 9.4 11 35.6 8.4 BDL BDL BDL ND ND 965

W 3 30-03-2013 55.9 19.4 10.8 13.9 37.7 10.2 BDL BDL BDL ND ND 762

02-04-2013 54.8 22.3 10.4 12.8 36.4 2.6 BDL BDL BDL ND ND 1056

W 4 06-04-2013 60.8 23.9 9.6 11.6 33.4 5.8 BDL BDL BDL ND ND 943

09-04-2013 58.3 22.4 9.8 12.4 29.1 4.3 BDL BDL BDL ND ND 1026

W 5 13-04-2013 61.4 24.6 10.8 18.4 35.1 6.1 BDL BDL BDL ND ND 1035

16-04-2013 62.8 23.8 11 20.3 42.8 3.9 BDL BDL BDL ND ND 1125

W 6 20-04-2013 56.3 21.4 9.5 15.3 36.4 8.4 BDL BDL BDL ND ND 1321


30-04-2013 51.9 18.3 10.8 18.6 42.7 3.6 BDL BDL BDL ND ND 1285

W 8 04-05-2013 48.8 18 9.6 16.7 33.6 6.9 BDL BDL BDL ND ND 1205

07-05-2013 52.4 19.6 11.2 21.3 37.2 8.4 BDL BDL BDL ND ND 1145

W 9 11-05-2013 53.9 21.3 10.5 15.4 38.2 5.3 BDL BDL BDL ND ND 1643

14-05-2013 60.8 23.3 8.8 13.4 34.3 7.4 BDL BDL BDL ND ND 1023

W 10 18-05-2013 62.4 26.4 9.3 15.8 36.2 6 BDL BDL BDL ND ND 1065

21-05-2013 61.3 23.1 10.2 17.2 28.4 4.2 BDL BDL BDL ND ND 1285

W 11 25-05-2013 59.8 23.8 11.3 20.6 38.7 3.8 BDL BDL BDL ND ND 1325

28-05-2013 60.5 22.1 10.5 13.8 36.2 6.9 BDL BDL BDL ND ND 1354

W 12 01-06-2013 61.3 23.4 11 16.6 32.1 4.2 BDL BDL BDL ND ND 1256

04-06-2013 59.8 22.8 9.6 12.4 36.5 5.8 BDL BDL BDL ND ND 1259

W 13 08-06-2013 54.9 19.6 10.2 13.6 37.3 8.2 BDL BDL BDL ND ND 1365

11-06-2013 57.3 21.4 10.6 15.8 37.8 7 BDL BDL BDL ND ND 1268




EIA REPORT FOR




AAQ OBSERVATIONS A – 8: Borgaon Village

Week Date PM10

μg/m3

PM2.5

μg/m3



W 1 17-03-2013 62.3 26.8 11.6 15.9 29.3 4.9 0.018 1.06 1.23 ND ND 965

20-03-2013 59.6 25.3 12.3 14.8 33.1 5.8 0.026 0.96 1.06 ND ND 988

W 2 24-03-2013 65.3 27.6 10.8 16.2 26.7 9.4 0.031 0.84 0.94 ND ND 1023

27-03-2013 60.8 26.4 10.2 13.4 36.2 6.4 0.028 1.21 0.88 ND ND 1045

W 3 31-03-2013 64.3 25.3 11.3 16.4 39.5 4.7 BDL 0.64 1.03 ND ND 857

03-04-2013 60.8 24.9 12.9 20.6 34.6 7.6 0.026 0.59 1.56 ND ND 1022

W 4 07-04-2013 58.6 26.3 10.8 13.9 31.2 5.9 0.018 0.89 1.08 ND ND 852

10-04-2013 60.8 30.6 10.6 17.4 37.1 9.6 0.024 1.06 0.93 ND ND 1269

W 5 14-04-2013 59.8 28.6 11.9 19.2 36.3 10.8 0.028 BDL 0.82 ND ND 1354

17-04-2013 61.4 26.4 12.4 21.9 40.9 5.1 0.018 0.69 0.59 ND ND 1269

W 6 21-04-2013 64.8 27.8 13.2 25.6 33.4 4.8 0.02 0.87 0.67 ND ND 1265

24-04-2013 66.9 32.6 12.8 23.4 30.1 9.4 0.022 0.69 1.05 ND ND 1023 W 7 28-04-2013 58.7 26.9 11.9 18.6 31.6 8.6 0.031 1.03 1.34 ND ND 1056

01-05-2013 64.8 29.7 12.7 24.9 32.7 6.4 BDL 0.58 0.94 ND ND 1235

W 8 05-05-2013 68.2 33.4 13.6 27.9 34.5 5.1 BDL 0.69 1.64 ND ND 1123

08-05-2013 65.8 29.1 12.9 30.1 35.7 9.4 0.018 0.79 0.68 ND ND 1158

W 9 12-05-2013 69.2 28.8 13.8 28.3 32.1 5.3 0.022 0.63 1.04 ND ND 1169

15-05-2013 66.7 27.9 11.8 20.4 40.8 10.5 0.014 0.45 1.12 ND ND 1254

W 10 19-05-2013 65.3 26.8 10.6 16.8 32.5 8.4 0.02 0.62 0.63 ND ND 1369

22-05-2013 66.3 30.2 12.4 19.4 32.1 6.1 0.017 BDL 0.87 ND ND 1223

W 11 26-05-2013 62.8 31.4 11.6 14.2 30.8 5.8 0.016 1.02 1.05 ND ND 1130

29-05-2013 64.3 26.8 12.9 16.4 31.6 7.4 0.022 0.64 1.23 ND ND 1025

W 12 02-06-2013 68.4 29.2 13 20.1 32.1 6.4 BDL 0.84 0.64 ND ND 1227

05-06-2013 59.8 26.4 12.7 15.3 34.6 5.3 0.016 0.53 1.32 ND ND 1431

W 13 09-06-2013 62.4 27.3 11.5 14.9 36.5 9.2 0.021 0.64 0.94 ND ND 1226

12-06-2013 58.8 25.5 12.3 17.4 32.6 8.4 0.014 BDL 1.25 ND ND 1029

A-8 Max. 69.2 33.4 13.8 30.1 40.9 10.8 0.031 1.21 1.64 ND ND 1431

Min. 58.6 24.9 10.2 13.4 26.7 4.7 0.014 0.45 0.59 ND ND 852

Average 63.3 28.0 12.1 19.4 33.8 7.2 0.0 0.8 1.0 ND ND 1138

EIA REPORT FOR




AAQ OBSERVATIONS A – 9: Wardha (Anand Nagar)

Week Date PM10 μg/m3

PM2.5 μg/m3

SO2 NOX O3 NH3 Pb As Ni BaP Benzene CO μg/m3 μg/m3 μg/m3 μg/m3 μg/m3 ng/m3 ng/m3 μg/m3 μg/m3 μg/m3

W 1 16-03-2013 60.8 29.4 15.4 18.4 36.5 9.4 0.031 0.64 1.36 ND ND 1022

19-03-2013 62.8 28.5 16.6 20.6 32.1 8.6 0.029 0.95 1.06 ND ND 1065

W 2 23-03-2013 61.9 27.4 15.8 17.8 33.3 6.5 0.036 1.12 1.24 ND ND 1169

26-03-2013 58.4 26.5 14.9 21.3 37.4 7.2 0.023 0.65 2.61 ND ND 1062

W 3 30-03-2013 59.8 28.3 15 19.4 36.4 10.6 BDL BDL 1.15 ND ND 1156

02-04-2013 63.8 30.6 14.8 17.4 31.2 6.9 0.028 1.56 0.98 ND ND 1213

W 4 06-04-2013 69.4 33.4 16.3 20.3 41.2 7.4 0.042 0.84 1.42 ND ND 1258

09-04-2013 58.8 29.4 16.9 23.9 29.8 9.2 0.036 1.43 2.02 ND ND 1365

W 5 13-04-2013 62.7 28.5 17.5 28.9 28 12.8 0.05 1.09 1.84 ND ND 1354

16-04-2013 66.8 30.4 14.8 22.4 31.6 8.6 0.019 0.89 1.63 ND ND 1411

W 6 20-04-2013 70.6 35.6 15.9 30.6 38.5 13.4 0.023 0.92 1.94 ND ND 1465

23-04-2013 69.4 33.9 16.8 26.8 36.4 10 0.046 0.59 2.03 ND ND 1649

W 7 27-04-2013 73.5 31.4 17.8 32.9 32.6 9.4 0.052 BDL 1.08 ND ND 1236

30-04-2013 76.4 38.9 18 31.4 31.1 6.6 BDL 1.35 1.14 ND ND 1254

W 8 04-05-2013 72.9 33.6 18.6 36.9 34.2 8.4 0.034 0.98 2.31 ND ND 1362

07-05-2013 74.5 35.6 18.2 29.8 37.5 10.3 0.048 0.87 1.84 ND ND 1025

W 9 11-05-2013 77.2 34.7 17.5 26.8 32.6 11.2 0.026 1.06 0.98 ND ND 1036 14-05-2013 72.9 33.3 16.8 21.6 35.6 12.2 0.028 1.25 2.06 ND ND 1336

W 10 18-05-2013 68.7 32.4 17.2 28.4 39.8 7.3 0.032 1.64 2.15 ND ND 1256

21-05-2013 74.5 36.4 15.9 23.9 32.4 6.6 0.041 0.85 2.69 ND ND 1158

W 11 25-05-2013 76.3 35.3 16.3 30.4 31.8 9.8 0.05 0.73 1.58 ND ND 1362

28-05-2013 72.4 37.4 18 33.7 30.8 11.2 0.016 0.96 1.23 ND ND 1345

W 12 01-06-2013 73.1 33.2 17.6 34.9 41.3 8.8 0.032 0.58 1.49 ND ND 1124

04-06-2013 69.5 35.2 16.6 31.6 36.4 12.6 BDL 0.93 1.08 ND ND 1265

W 13 08-06-2013 68.3 31 15.9 26.9 32.6 10.4 0.018 0.48 1.54 ND ND 1255

11-06-2013 70.4 36.1 16.4 28.4 38.1 8.7 0.036 1.23 1.38 ND ND 984

A-9 Max. 77.2 38.9 18.6 36.9 41.3 13.4 0.052 1.64 2.69 ND ND 1649

Min. 58.4 26.5 14.8 17.4 28 6.5 0.016 0.48 0.98 ND ND 984

Average 68.7 32.6 16.6 26.4 34.6 9.4 0.0 1.0 1.6 ND ND 1238

EIA REPORT FOR




4.00 ANTICIPATED ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACTS & MITIGATION MEASURES 4.1 INTRODUCTION

The Uttam Value Steel Limited (UVSL) is operating a steel plant at Wardha, Maharashtra. The existing steel plant is under operation to produce 1.0 MTPA of steel products. UVSL have implemented all the pollution control systems in the units of the steel plant. UVSL have established an Environmental Management Division (EMD) to monitor the performance of all the pollution control systems in the operating units of the steel plants. ENVIRONMENTAL POLICY The Corporate Environment Policy is enclosed at Annexure-1. UVSL firmly believes that health and safety is one of its prime concerns. It is the company's policy that the management shall do all that is reasonable to provide a safe and healthy workplace and make every possible effort to prevent accidents and minimise health hazards in the company's operations, maintenance and other plant activities.

All the facilities such as Occupational Health Center and other welfare measures will be extended to the personnel employed in the expansion also. Assessment of Environmental Impact Impact prediction is a way of mapping the environmental consequences of the significant aspects of the expansion plant. The impact assessment will focus on the expansion plant and will broadly cover the following information and components: - Assessment of physical effects for all phases including location, design,

construction, operation and possible accidents.

- Estimation by type and quantity of expected contaminants, residues, and emissions (air, water, noise, solid wastes) resulting from the operation of the proposed plant.

The anticipated environmental impacts of the expansion plant are discussed below under the following categories: Impacts and mitigation measures due to project location. Impacts and mitigation measures due to project design. Impacts and mitigation measures during construction. Impacts and mitigation measures during operation. Impacts and mitigation measures because of possible accidents.

EIA REPORT FOR




4.1.1 IMPACTS AND MITIGATION MEASURES DUE TO PROJECT LOCATION 4.1.1.1 Impacts

The expansion of integrated steel plant will be done in the existing land. Therefore from location point of view, the expansion plant does not have any adverse impact.

4.1.1.2 Mitigation Measures

No impact envisaged.

4.1.2 IMPACTS AND MITIGATION MEASURES DUE TO PROJECT DESIGN 4.1.2.1 Impacts

The expansion plant is being envisaged based on techno-economic feasibility of the state of art technology as presently available in the country and thus no anticipated impacts are envisaged due to project design.

4.1.2.2 Mitigation Measures A number of environmental friendly features have been envisaged in the proposed expansion due to which the anticipated adverse environmental impacts are either avoided or minimized. These features are briefly described here under. i) Use of Continuous Casting Technology The introduction of 100% production through continuous casting facilities will be a major step towards energy conservation and environmental protection. The major environmental advantages of the same are: - Considerable energy savings will result in lower energy requirement per ton of cast,

vis-à-vis less energy generation. Thus reducing the emissions to the environment. - Less scrap production resulting in improved yield and less solid waste handling. - Elimination of Soaking pits resulting in reduction in consumption of fuels and

Electricity.

ii) Use of Waste Gas The expansion plant will utilize the flue gas generated in BF & Coke Oven of UGML plant. This will reduce and economize the energy consumption and will reduce pollution.

4.1.3 IMPACT AND MITIGATION MEASURES DURING CONSTRUCTION PHASE

Construction phase impact may be on land use, ground water, water quality, air quality, noise etc. These aspects are discussed here under.

EIA REPORT FOR




4.1.3.1 Land Use

4.1.3.1.1 Impacts The expansion plant will be accommodated in 105 hectare of land. Large-scale excavation, soil erosion, loss of topsoil is expected. Moreover, Wardha is already a fairly well developed area with all sorts of infrastructure available. It is therefore most unexpected that influx of construction labour is going to change present land use pattern. Further this land use change during construction is only temporary and will persist during construction phase only. During construction, manpower required for steel plant construction varies from 2500 to 5000 depending on the phase of the project. All the construction workers will be accommodated in temporary facilities in a secure location near the steel plant site. They will have the following facilities:

Portable drinking water Common toilets & septic tanks Waste collection & disposal Dedicated doctor to meet the medical needs of worksmen

The workers will be provided with free transport facility from the place of stay to place of work. Hence this will not have any major impact on the surrounding infrastructural facilities related to temporary migration of construction workers.

4.1.3.1.2 Mitigation Measures


4.1.3.2 Air Quality 4.1.3.2.1 Impacts

The construction and other associated activities will lead to emission of different pollutants. During the construction phase, RSPM will be the main pollutant. As plant will be constructed in phases, construction activity covering a large area is not expected. Therefore the particulate matter emission will not be much and will be localized only. Gaseous pollutants like SO2, NO x, CO will also be added to the ambient air due to vehicular traffic movement associated with this construction phase. Gaseous emissions from construction machineries and vehicles will be minimized by enforcing strict emission monitoring system for the suggested mitigation measures. The impact will be confined within the specific plant area where the construction is taking place. Further, the impact of such activities will be temporary and will be restricted to the construction phase only. During the construction period the impacts that are associated with the air quality are:

EIA REPORT FOR




Deterioration of air quality due to fugitive dust emissions from construction activities (especially during dry season) like excavation, back filling and concreting, hauling and dumping of earth materials and from construction spoils.

Generation of pollutants due to operation of heavy vehicles and movement of machineries and equipment for material handling, earth moving, laying of sands, metal, stones, asphalt, etc.

4.1.3.2.2 Mitigation Measures The following mitigation measures will be employed during construction period to reduce the pollution level to acceptable limits. Proper and prior planning, appropriate sequencing and scheduling of all major

construction activities will be done, and timely availability of infrastructure supports needed for construction will be ensured to shorten the construction period vis-à-vis to reduce pollution.

Construction materials will be stored in covered godown or enclosed spaces to prevent the wind blown fugitive emissions.

Stringent construction material handling / overhauling procedures will be followed. Truck carrying soil, sand, stone dust and stone will be duly covered to avoid spilling

and fugitive emissions. Adequate dust suppression measures such as regular water sprinkling at vulnerable

areas of construction sites will be undertaken to control fugitive dust during material handling and hauling activities in dry seasons.

The construction material delivering vehicles will be covered in order to reduce spills.

Low emission construction equipment, vehicles and generator sets will be used. It will be ensured that all construction equipment and vehicles are in good working

condition, properly tuned and maintained to keep emission within the permissible limits and engines turned off when not in use to reduce pollution.

Vehicles and machineries would be regularly maintained so that emissions confirm to standards of Central Pollution Control Board (CPCB).

Monitoring of air quality at regular intervals will be conducted during construction phase.

Construction workers will be provided with masks to protect them from inhaling dust.

4.1.3.3 Water Quality

4.1.3.3.1 Surface Water Impacts The impacts on water quality during construction phase mainly arise due to site cleaning, leveling, excavation, storage of construction material etc. A leveling and excavation activity normally increases the level of suspended solids in the surface water runoff. However, for the expansion plant, no large scale leveling is required. Excavation will also be limited.

EIA REPORT FOR




Mitigation Measures Quality of construction wastewater emanating from the construction site will be

controlled through the existing drainage system with sediment traps (silting basin as water intercepting ditch) for arresting the silt / sediment load before its disposal.

All the washable construction material will be stored under sheds or enclosed space by fencing it with brick or earth in order to prevent spillage into the drainage network, so that the same does not find its way into the surface water runoff.

The sediment traps and storm water drainage network will be periodically cleaned and especially before monsoon season.

A small quantity of effluent after treatment will be let out. Majority of the water generated will be utilized for dust suppression and afforestation within the plant premises.

4.1.3.3.2 Ground water

Impacts The water requirement during the construction phase will be low and will be met through the already existing water supply facilities. Thus no ground water extraction is envisaged. Therefore, it is most unlikely that construction phase will bring any significant modification in the ground water regime of the area. Therefore, the construction phase of the expansion plant will have insignificant impact on the ground water.

Mitigation Measures No impact envisaged.

4.1.3.4 Noise

4.1.3.4.1 Impacts Major sources of noise during the construction phase are vehicular traffic, construction equipment etc. The operation of the equipments will generate noise level below 85 dB (A). However this noise level will be near the source only and is not expected to create any noise pollution problem at far off distances and outside the plant premises. The noise generated during the construction phase from different equipments may have some adverse impact on the operators.

4.1.3.4.2 Mitigation Measures Protective gears such as earplugs, earmuffs etc. will be provided to construction

personnel exposed to high noise levels as preventive measures by contractors and will be strictly adhered to minimize / eliminate any adverse impact.

It will be ensured that all the construction equipment and vehicles used are in good working condition, properly lubricated and maintained to keep noise within the permissible limits and engines turned off when not in use to reduce noise.

EIA REPORT FOR




4.1.3.5 Social

4.1.3.5.1 Impacts

The social impact during the construction stage will be of beneficial nature. About 2500 people on daily average basis will get employment during the construction stage. The construction stage will extend up to 24 months. Local people will be preferred for employment and depending upon their skill and experience, they will be allotted suitable jobs. During construction phase, pressure on housing, educational facility and health facility will not increase because construction workers will be accommodated in a separate space with proper mitigation measures.



4.1.4 IMPACTS AND MITIGATION MEASURES DURING OPERATION PHASE

4.1.4.1 General

During the operation phase, depending upon operating condition environmental releases may occur from raw material and product handling, processing, fuel burning etc. Environmental releases may be in the form of

a) Air emission b) Waste water discharges c) Solid waste disposal d) Noise etc. These emissions, discharges and disposal may release different pollutants, which may affect air, water, land and ecological environment directly. However, all these are mainly primary impact. In addition to these primary impacts, any industrial project has some overall impact on its surrounding socio-economic environment through the existence of social and economic linkages between the project and society, which are actually secondary impact. Under this clause, all the primary impacts due to this expansion plant are being discussed and wherever required, impacts have also been quantified. Accordingly under subsequent clauses impacts on air environment, water environment, soil and noise due to the expansion plant are being elaborated. The socio-economic impacts due to the expansion plant are separately discussed in Chapter 6.

4.1.4.2 Air Environment

In integrated Steel plant, air pollutants are generated at different stages of production. Air pollutants may be particulate matter, sulphur dioxide, oxides of nitrogen etc. The pollutants may be released as point source emission or fugitive emission. Accordingly it is most expected that there will be some variation in the emitted pollution load. It is

EIA REPORT FOR




therefore most justified to first assess the anticipated variation in the emitted pollution load. Once these variations vis-à-vis increase or decrease in emitted pollution load are estimated, its impact on air environment will be assessed and predicted. The expanded 2.0 MTPA steel plant will have an impact of the air environment. While the impact of fugitive emissions will be within the core area, the effect of emissions from the point sources is a major concern as it will have a major impact on the ambient air quality in the surrounding area. The sources of emissions from the proposed steel plant and the control measures adopted are given below. In addition to the measures taken to control pollution, it is also proposed to limit the design emission norms to a maximum of 50 mg/Nm3 of particulates.

Air pollution control measures in the proposed plant Sl. No

Area of operations Air pollution control measures proposed to be adopted

Design limits

1. Raw material handling Fugitive emissions in

material handling Dust suppression systems

(chemical and dry fog type) Water sprinklers DE systems with bag filters in

case of conveyors, lime handling

As per Norms

2. SMS Shop EAF Secondary fume extraction

system Stack: 50 mg/Nm3

3. Bar & Rod Mill Low NOx burner Stack: 50 mg/Nm3 4. Lime & Dolo Plant Bag Filter Stack: 50 mg/Nm3

4.1.4.2.1 Methodology: Impact Assessment on Air Environment

The expansion plant will have an impact on the air environment. While the impact of fugitive emissions will be within the core area, the effect of emissions from the point sources is a major concern as it will have an impact on the ambient air quality in the surrounding area. For prediction of impacts for any proposed projects, in order to study the impacts due to increase in pollution load, in general, contributions from the new units will be added to the existing back ground concentrations and predictions will be done accordingly. Once the pollutants are emitted into the atmosphere, the dilution and dispersion of the pollutants are controlled by various meteorological parameters like wind speed & direction, ambient temperature, mixing height, etc. In most dispersion models the relevant atmospheric layer is that nearest to the ground, varying in thickness from several hundred to a few thousand meters. Variations in both thermal and mechanical turbulence and in wind velocity are greatest in the layer in contact with the surface. The atmospheric dispersion modeling and the prediction of ground level pollutant concentrations has great relevance in the following activities:

EIA REPORT FOR




- Estimation of impact of setting up of new industry on surrounding environment. - Estimation of maximum ground level concentration and its location in the study area. The prediction of Ground level concentrations (GLC) of pollutants emitted from the stacks have been carried out using ISCST-3 Air Quality Simulation model released by USEPA which is also accepted by Indian statutory bodies. This model is basically a Gaussian dispersion model which considers multiple sources. The model accepts hourly meteorological data records to define the conditions of plume rise for each source and receptor combination for each hour of input meteorological data sequentially and calculates short term averages up to 24 hours. The impact has been predicted over a 10 km X 10 km area with the proposed location of the stack as the centre. GLC have been calculated at every 500 m grid point. In this report, the dust content of flue gas is taken as 50 mg/Nm3 and the load is calculated for expansion to 2.0 MTPA plant. Accordingly, the emissions are estimated for the expansion plant and the details of the stacks and emissions from them are given in Table 4.1.

Table 4.1: Stack emission details Unit No.

Source Type of fuel

Height (m)

Top Dia. (m)

Flow Rate Nm 3/h

Temp. °C

Emissions (mg/Nm 3) Emissions (g/s) PM SO2 NOx PM SO2 NOx

1. EAF-1 LDO 50 5 1000000 60 50 32.4 40 13.89 9.0 11.1 2. EAF-2 LDO 50 5 1000000 60 50 32.4 40 13.89 9.0 11.1 3. Lime plant

Stack-1 LPG 50 1.2 70000 60 50 40 40 0.97 0.78 0.78

4. Lime plant Stack-2

LPG 50 1.2 70000 60 50 40 40 0.97 0.78 0.78

5. Dolomite plant Stack-1

LPG 50 1 30000 60 50 40 40 0.42 0.33 0.33

6. Bar & Rod Mill Furnace Oil

75 2.5 60000 170 50 4080 50 0.83 68 0.83

7. HSM Mixed Gas

80 4 277000 145 24.7 35 51.1 1.90 2.69 3.93

Load due to proposed units (g/s) 32.9 90.6 28.9 Stack emission details are mainly based on the actual monitoring data done elsewhere, consumption, fuel balance, prevailing emission factors as available in literature for steel plants, and different statutory regulations prevailing in the country. Meteorological data plays an important role in computation of Ground Level Concentration using ISCST-3 model. Meteorological data of the project site is another input required for computation of the contribution by the expansion plant. The parameters required are:

Wind velocity and direction Stability Mixing height

EIA REPORT FOR




Data related to wind velocity and direction were generated during the monitoring period. Part of this site specific monitored data have been used as input data of the model during computation. The hourly occurrence of various stability classes at the project site is also an important input parameter to the model. Further site specific mixing depth (mixing height or convective stable boundary layer and inversion height or nocturnal stable boundary layer) is also an important input parameter for computation and assessment of realistic dispersion of pollutants. There are different methods for generating these parameters, but in the present case monitored data of hourly mixing depth at site have been used. The input meteorological data used in the computation are presented in Table 4.2 and uniform Cartesian grid system was used to locate/fix sources and receptors in the study area. The predicted GLC values are given in Table 4.3. However, the above computation is considering the stack emissions only and does not take into account any changes in the fugitive emission. However, since the fugitive emissions are being released mainly from near ground sources, are not expected to travel / disperse to a longer distance to reach beyond the plant boundary and thus are not expected to have any impact on the ambient air.

Table 4.2: Meteorological data used as input for Air quality modeling

Hour Wind Speed (m/s)

Predominant Wind Direction (N as 180°)

Ambient air temp. (K)

Hourly Stability Class

Mixing depth (m)

01 0.36 317 292 6 100 02 0.45 0 292 6 100 03 0.50 270 291 6 201 04 0.50 270 291 6 249 05 0.18 292 290 5 380 06 0.16 292 289 4 412 07 0.45 0 289 3 543 08 0.52 293 288 3 974 09 0.45 0 291 2 996 10 0.45 226 299 1 1037 11 2.36 90 302 2 1068 12 3.81 45 303 1 1099 13 2.78 157 304 1 1154 14 3.71 232 304 1 1162 15 2.52 232 303 2 1162 16 1.22 90 298 3 1162 17 1.10 267 294 4 1162 18 2.50 135 292 5 955 19 2.23 265 292 6 547 20 0.45 267 291 6 439 21 0.36 202 290 6 331 22 0.45 180 290 6 223 23 0.50 180 289 6 215 24 0.45 277 289 6 207

1= Extremely Unstable, 2= Moderately Unstable, 3= Slightly Unstable, 4 = Neutral, 5= Slightly Stable, 6= Moderately Stable

EIA REPORT FOR




4.1.4.2.2 Results: Impact on Air Environment The resultant ambient air concentrations after expansion has been presented in Table 4.3 for PM10, Fugitive emission, SO2 & NOx. Fugitive emission factor considered for stock yards was 0.001168 g/s/m2.Thus it is anticipated that there will not be any adverse changes in AAQ in the study area. The isopleths of the computed results for PM, SO 2, NOx and Fugitive emission are presented in Fig. 4.1, 4.2, 4.3 & 4.4 respectively. The maximum GLCs for each grid point were predicted with respect to pollutants PM10, SO2 and NOx. After proposed project, the maximum GLCs derived are 3.12, 16.97 and 2.60 µg/m3 for PM10, SO2 and NOx respectively due to stack emissions.

Table 4.3 Prediction of GLC's at 2.0 MTPA

Sl. No

Description Pollutants* PM SO2 NOx

1 2 3 4

Predicted Maximum ground level concentrations Fugitive emission concentration Monitored maximum Average background concentrations Total maximum concentrations

3.12 (10,9)

0.43

(10.2,9.5)

77.2

80.75

16.97 (10.5, 10)

-

19.6

36.57

2.60 (10,9)

-

36.9

39.50 Norms 1. Industrial, Residential, Rural and other

areas

100

80

80

*Concentrations are in µg/m3 and of 24hours averaging time Values in the parenthesis indicate the coordinates of the grid points in Km in the direction of occurrence from the plant stacks. Plant location at (10, 10)

EIA REPORT FOR




Fig. 4.1: Isopleths for PM Concentration Due to expansion project

Max. GLC - 10.9 ug/m3(8500,9500)

SPM

EIA REPORT FOR




Fig. 4.2: Isopleths for SO2 Concentration Due to expansion project

Max. GLC - 10.9 ug/m3(8500,9500)

SPM

EIA REPORT FOR




Fig. 4.3: Isopleths for NOx Concentration Due to expansion project

Max. GLC - 10.9 ug/m3(8500,9500)

SPM

EIA REPORT FOR




Fig. 4.4: Isopleths for Fugitive Emission Concentration Due to expansion project

Max. GLC - 10.9 ug/m3(8500,9500)

SPM

EIA REPORT FOR




A graph of daily average concentration (MGLC scenario) for RPM, SO2 and NOX has been plotted with downwind distance at every 500m interval covering the exact location of GLC.

Fig 4.5(a)- Variation of PM10 concentration with distance

Fig 4.5(b)- Variation of SO2 concentration with distance

Fig 4.5(c)- Variation of NOx concentration with distance

EIA REPORT FOR




Fig 4.5(d)- Variation of Fugitive emissions (PM10) concentration with distance

Grid wise results of RPM, SO2, NOX and Fugitive emission is given at the end of the chapter.


During the design phase all efforts have been made to adopt latest state of art technology and to install adequate pollution control measures for different processes and de-dusting stacks and for different fugitive emission sources. During the construction phase of the proposed project appropriate mitigation measures will be implemented to ameliorate the anticipated air quality problems. The following mitigation measures will be employed during operation period to reduce the pollution level to acceptable limits: Dry fog type DS system for material handling junction points Fume Extraction system for EAF & LF along with gas cleaning plant. Stack monitoring to ensure proper functioning of different major stacks. Air monitoring in the Work-zone to ensure proper functioning of fugitive emission

control facilities. Adequate plantation in and around different units. Vehicles and machineries would be regularly maintained so that emissions confirm

to the applicable standards. Monitoring of ambient air quality through online AAQ monitoring system at two

locations. Workers will be provided with adequate protective measures to protect them from

inhaling dust.

4.1.4.3 Impact of Transportation of Raw Materials and Finished Products by Road

Impact The total annual external freight will be approximately 4.9 Mt including 2.9 Mt of incoming materials and 2.0 Mt of outgoing finished products. The quantity of raw

EIA REPORT FOR




materials to be received and the finished products to be dispatched annually is shown in table below. Table below shows the transportation of raw materials and finished product to and from the plant. From the table it can be seen that the majority of bulk quantity of raw material / finished product is being transported from road and only small quantity of material is being transported from rail. A total of maximum 397 trucks per day will be running for the requirement of the Steel Plant. For traffic volume estimation, considering receipt of Raw Materials in three shifts (24hrs.) about 6 trucks per day will be additionally running on the SH 3 for the Steel Plant.

Transportation of Raw Materials and Finished Product

Sl. No.

Raw material Source Quantity (tpa)

Mode of transport

Number of Heavy

Vehicles (16t)/day

Raw Material Dispatch 1 Hot Metal UGML 537,600 Own corridor - 2 Pig Iron UGML 50,400 Own corridor - 3 Slabs UGML 413,044 Own corridor - 4 Ferro alloys Local Market 7971 Road 2 5 Limestone Jodhpur/ Wardha/ Katni 354,240 Rail/Road - 6 Dolomite Mandla / Korpana 93,450 Rail/Road - 7 DRI local Market 1,249,293 Rail/Road -

8 Scrap

From nearby operating sponge iron units and other market sources located in the Maharashtra and Chhattisgarh

142,348 Rail/Road -

9 Zinc Local Market 11,190 Road 2 10 Carbon Powder Local Market 5,314 Road 1 11 HR coils UGML 115,959 Own corridor - 12 Coke Breeze Local Market 6,648 Road 1 13 Calcium Carbide Local Market 1,566 Road 0.31

Sub Total 2,989,023 6 Finished Product Dispatch

1 Bars & Rods UVSL 500000 Road 98 2 Pipes UVSL 250000 Road 49

3 HR Plates/color coated coils

UVSL 1250000 Road 244

Sub total 2000000 391 Grand Total 4,989,023 397

Traffic on SH 3 will be regulated so that the impact will be minimal.

EIA REPORT FOR




4.1.4.4 Water Environment

Water environment may be affected by industries in different ways depending upon the type of industries. The water environment may be surface or ground water or both. Water environment may be affected by the industry due to drawal of water, discharge of polluted water/ waste water and by contaminated leachate from land disposal / dumping of solid waste. The present activities are scrutinized in light of the above factors and its impact is predicted accordingly.

4.1.4.4.1 Effect of Water Drawal (Surface water) Impacts The expansion plant draws its requirement of raw water from balancing reservoir which in turn receives water from the pumping station on river Dham. Water is supplied to the plant for different activities from the balancing reservoir directly. In addition to this, water is also supplied to the plant from the reservoir after treating it in a water treatment plant. Chief Engineer, Water Resource Department, Konkan Region has confirmed availability of water for Industrial purposes.

No impact on ground water is also envisaged since no ground water will be drawn by the expansion plant. Mitigation Measures No impact envisaged. Various water conservation schemes envisaged are :

- Blow down water from EAF re-circulation system will be reused in SMS slag

yards for spraying on hot slag. - Blown down water from Bar & Rod mill will be recycled and reused

In addition, rain water harvesting schemes are envisaged for the proposed project.

4.1.4.4.2 Water Usage

Background In an integrated Steel plant wastewater may be generated from different units / shops. Some are being discharged after treatment; some are reused in the plant itself after treatment and only bleed off quantity are being discharged. Attempts will be made to achieve Zero discharge from plant.

Impacts In an integrated steel plant water is generally used for purposes like: Material conditioning i.e. for slurrying, quenching, mill scale removal, rinsing etc. Air pollution control i.e. for wet scrubbing of air pollutants

EIA REPORT FOR




Heat transfer i.e. water used for protecting the equipment by cooling refractory and shell of equipment.

Overall approximately 75 % of water use is for heat transfer. Accordingly, a considerable portion of water supplied is lost by evaporation. Evaporation losses include slag cooling at EAF, spray chamber cooling at casters, Bar & Rod Mill and evaporation in cooling towers. However, wastewater discharges from any plant mainly depend upon the water usage and type of use. Effluent generated will be collected in a settling tank and will be used for dust suppression & Green Bed Development within the plant premises. Wastewater discharges from an integrated steel plant can be broadly divided into two parts. Non-contact water discharges and contact water discharges. Water is used in a series of heat exchangers in EAF and rolling operations and boilers. This non-contact water is generally contaminated with high dissolved solids comprising of salts of calcium and magnesium which were originally present in the raw / feed water. Due to repeated re-circulation and high temperature concentration of these salts starts to built up necessitating bleeding off of some part of circulating water. Water is also used for contact cooling e.g slag handling etc. This contact water discharges may be contaminated with different pollutants and needs to be treated prior to discharges. a) Steel Making and Primary Refining: Electric Arc Furnace (EAF) The wastewater generated from Gas Cleaning Plant will be contaminated only with particulate matter and will be pumped to a sludge pond. Further any bleed off water from cooling circuit will be used for slag cooling and as such no wastewater is anticipated to be generated from cooling water circuit. Thus no adverse impact on water environment is anticipated.

b) Secondary Refining Facilities: Laddle Furnace The other water usages indicated are mainly for refining and casting operations. The refining operation except vacuum degassing does not generates any effluent.

c) Continuous Casting Facilities and Rolling Mills Continuous Caster usually requires water for cooling of different mechanical equipment, and for flushing of mill scale (generated during cutting) down the flume beneath the runout table. The principal pollutants are suspended solids, oil and greases. This will be treated in scale pits for mill scale recovery and oil removal and the treated effluent will be discharged. d) Wastewater from Other Sources In addition to the above some additional wastewater may be generated due to floor washings and also from the toilet blocks of the units envisaged during the expansion

EIA REPORT FOR




plant. The sewage generated from the toilet blocks will be very less in quantity and will be taken to the Sewage Treatment Plant. Mitigation Measures During the design phase all efforts have been made to adopt latest state of art technology and to install adequate effluent treatment facilities for different units expected to generate water pollutants. During the construction phase of the proposed project appropriate mitigation measures will be implemented to ameliorate the anticipated water /effluent quality problems. The following mitigation measures will be employed during operation period to reduce the pollution level to acceptable limits. Re-circulating water in the process whereby discharged volume is minimum. Clarifier and sludge pond for removal of suspended solids. Neutralisation of acidic water by lime. Removal of oil and grease from the contaminated water by means if oil traps,

skimming devices, etc. Effluent quality monitoring at inlet and outlets of different effluent treatment plants to

ensure proper functioning of different effluent treatment facilities. Use of treated wastewater in different shops and for plantation development as far

as practicable. The list of water pollution control systems envisaged is summarized below.

List of Water Pollution Control Systems

Source Pollutants Control System

Raw material handling yard Suspended Solids Catch Pits Raw Water Treatment Plant Suspended Solids Clarifier, Thickener, EAF Gas Cleaning Plant Suspended Solids Clarifier, Thickener, Bloom Caster, Billet caster & Rolling mills

Suspended Solids, Oil & Grease

Settling Tanks fitted with Oil & Grease Trap

Canteens, Toilets BOD, Suspended Solids Sewage treatment plant

The new plant aims at zero discharge philosophy. In case of problem in water recovery system, maximum 50 m3/h, occasional discharge can be anticipated for a short period of time. It is presumed that after completion of the project the water environment will improve significantly.

4.1.4.4.3 Ground Water

Impacts The expansion plant does not envisage any ground water drawl and hence no impact on ground water availability around the plant is anticipated.

The waste disposal area around any industry is one of the major factors deteriorating ground water quality, if the water leached from the waste dumps contains toxic

EIA REPORT FOR




substances. At the expansion plant, some wastes are dumped in secured land fill sites and some inert wastes are dumped in low lying area. All other solid wastes are reused / recycled or sold out. Mitigation Measures Periodical monitoring of ground water quality at up-gradient and down gradient of

slag dump area. Disposal of waste generated from the proposed project will be done in a systematic

/scientific manner as per guidelines to prevent any ground water pollution.

4.1.4.5 Solid Waste Generation and Disposal 4.1.4.5.1 General

Integrated Iron & steel plant generates solid wastes, some of which are hazardous while others are non-hazardous. Some of these wastes are reused / re-utilised and some are not. UVSL is also not exception to that. Solid wastes in the proposed plant will be mainly generated from:

- EAF - Different Rolling Mills - Lime & Dolomite Plant

In addition to above, wastes are also generated during operation / maintenance / annual maintenance of other units / shops etc, which are

- EAF Gas Cleaning Plant sludge - Waste Refractory materials - Waste lubricant / oil etc. and Waste Lead – Acid Batteries

The characteristics of the generated solid wastes are presented in Table 4.4a. From the table it can be noticed that sludge generated are non hazardous. The generation quantity along with the reuse / recycle and disposal methodology for the solid waste is presented in Table 4.4b.

Table 4.4a: Source of Generation / Characterisation of Solid Wastes

Shop Type of waste

Source of Generation Typical Chemistry (%)

Characterisation of waste as per Hazardous Wastes (Management & Hand-ling) Amendment Rules, 2000

EAF Shop EAF Slag EAF CaO : 40-50 FeO : 20, SiO2 : 15-17 P2O5 : 2.45 MgO : 3.9 - 4.5 MnO : 4.5 Al2O3 : 5.2-6.3

Spent Refractories

Bricks from dismantled converter

EIA REPORT FOR




Shop Type of waste

Source of Generation Typical Chemistry (%)

Characterisation of waste as per Hazardous Wastes (Management & Hand-ling) Amendment Rules, 2000

Bar & Rod Mill

Mill Scales Relatively coarse mill scale is collected from reheating furnaces and dry processing areas like cooling beds, straighteners, shears and saws

Fe(t) : 62-68 FeO : 60-70 Fe2O3 : 15-25 C : 0.3-0.5, S : 0.12-0.25 P : 0.15-0.25 Na2O : 0.05-0.1, K2O : 0.01-0.03, ZnO : 0.04-0.06 CaO : 0.3-0.5 SiO2 : 0.8-1.5, MgO : <0.01 Al2O3 : 0.1-0.2 MnO : 0.3-0.5

Mill Sludge Fine mill scale contaminated with oil is collected in sludge pit

Fe(t) : 64.4 CaO : 0.6, SiO2 : 4.0 P : 0.085 MgO :0.22 MnO :0.44 Al2O3 : 1.85 TiO2 : 0.07 Cr2O3 : 0.08 LOI : 0.4 Oil : 10-11

Spent Refractories

Bricks from dismantled reheating furnaces

4.1.4.5.2 Impacts

It is expected that about 94 t/day SMS slag will be produced from the proposed steel plant. Flue dust from the SMS plant will be around 11 t/day and Mill scale will be around 4.31 t/day. SMS slag shall be dumped in the area ear marked for solid waste management site within the plant, which will have suitable monitoring system to monitor the groundwater contamination if any. Mill scale will be sold in the open market. UVSL is also proposing to install a slag granulation plant and make briquettes or pellets to be used in road laying / paving of areas, which is in practice in some of the east Asian countries.


All attempts to utilise solid waste as per the guidelines given in CREP.

4.1.4.6 Hazardous Waste Generation and Disposal

4.1.4.6.1 Impacts Hazardous waste generation and its utilization for the expansion plant plan is given in Table 4.5.

EIA REPORT FOR




Table 4.5: Net Increase Expected for Hazardous Waste Generation and its Disposal

Sl. No.

Hazardous waste Generated Quantity /day) Mode of utilisation

1. Used oil/ waste oil 380 kg Sold to MPCB approved TSDF Plants 2. ETP Sludge 825 kg Will be sold to registered recyclers. 3. Zinc Dross 6.343 t Sold

These wastes shall be disposed as per CPCB guidelines


All hazardous wastes to be sold to MPCB approved TSDF Plants

4.1.4.7 Noise Levels

4.1.4.7.1 Impacts

During normal operations of the plant ambient noise levels may increase close to the compressors and blowers but this will be confined only within plant boundary and that too will be confined within shops. The level will be further minimised when the noise reaches the plant boundary and the nearest residential areas beyond the plant boundary.


Various measures proposed to reduce noise pollution include reduction of noise at source, provision of acoustic lagging for the equipment and suction side silencers, vibration isolators, selection of low noise equipment, isolation of noisy equipment from working personnel. In some areas, personnel working will be provided with noise reduction aid such as ear muffs/ ear plugs and also the duration of exposure of the personnel will be limited as per the norms. The following measures will be undertaken: Technological Measures Plugging leakages in high-pressure gas/air pipelines. Reducing vibration of high speed rotating machines by regular monitoring of vibration

and taking necessary steps. Design of absorber system for the shift office and pulpit operator's cabin. Noise absorber systems in pump houses. Noise level at 1m from equipment will be limited to 85 dB (A). The fans and ductwork will be designed for minimum vibration. All the equipment in different new units and in units where capacity expansion is

taking place will be designed/operated in such a way that the noise level shall not exceed 85 dB (A).

Periodical monitoring of work zone noise and outside plant premises.

EIA REPORT FOR




Management Measures In a steel plant, with a variety of noise producing equipment, it may not be practicable to take technological control measures at all the places. In such cases the following administrative measures shall also be taken: Un-manned high noise zone will be marked as "High Noise Zone". In shops where measures are not feasible, attempts shall be made to provide

operators with soundproof enclosure to operate the system. Workers exposed to noise level will be provided with protection devices like earmuffs

as per present practice and will be advised to use them regularly, while at work. Workers exposed to noisy work place shall be provided with rotational duties. All workers will be regularly checked medically for any noise related health problem

and if detected, they will be provided with alternative duty. Over and above all these adopted measures, trees and shrubs belts of substantial depths within and surrounding plant premises will further attenuate the sound levels reaching the receptors within and outside the plant premises.

4.1.4.8 Ecological Features

4.1.4.8.1 Impacts

Erection and commissioning of the project may change the land-use pattern of the area and may cause significant loss of habitat, which is unavoidable. However, a 10 feet high boundary wall will be erected and green belt along the boundary wall will be planted – thus such changes are not of major concern.

During construction existing vegetation on the project site may be cut / damaged.

The construction and operation of the project may cause direct impact to the wildlife

present in the area. However as not much wildlife is there in the study area thus the impact on wild life is not envisaged.

Emissions from plant operation may affect the natural vegetation and agricultural

crops around the proposed plant.

The thresh-hold limit for continuous exposure of SO2 on plants is about 50 ug/m3 and that for NOx is 100 ug/m3 (Env. Engg., Chapter 7 by H. S. Peavy, D. R. Rowe, G.Tchobanoglous. Mc.Graw-Hill Book Co.1985). The level of air pollutants due to operation of the present project will be much below the above said level, thus it is expected that the natural vegetation in the area will not be affected. So far as agriculture crops are concerned, as they will remain in the field for three to six months only, the impact on the same is also not anticipated.

Emissions from the project operation may cause harm to the wild life in the study

area. However, the maximum predicted SO2 levels is 16.97 ug/m3 and NOx level is

EIA REPORT FOR




2.60 ug/m3, which is well below the permissible level of SO2 levels for sensitive areas. Thus it is expected that the flora and fauna in the study area will not get affected due to the proposed project.

Noise generated due to the proposed project may cause disturbance to the faunal

species.

Strong light in the project premises during night may cause some disturbance to the fauna in the near by areas.

The waste water from plant operation and domestic use may cause surface water

pollution in the area.


All technological measures to limit air emissions, waste water discharge and noise generation are envisaged in the proposed plant design and hence no further mitigation measures envisaged.

An elaborate green belt / cover has been planned within and around the plant to

ameliorate the fugitive emissions and noise from the project operation.

The proposed project is designed for maximum re-circulation and only limited amount of treated effluent (as per the statutory norm) will be allowed to discharge out of plant premises. The project and domestic waste water will be treated and after treatment the same will be used for gardening purpose and only the excess water will be discharged outside the plant premises. The effluent discharge from the proposed plant will meet the surface water discharge norm as stipulated by statutory authorities thus there will be no impact on the ecological components of surface water bodies in the area.

Mitigation Measures for Reducing Impacts on Faunal Species

Direct Disturbance: Ten feet high fencing will be erected all around the project so that no animals come to the project site. Further a green belt erected within the fencing (facing the proposed plant) all around the proposed plant area will further reduce the impact of direct disturbance.

Noise: The maximum noise level reaching outside the proposed plant project

boundary will be below the statutory norms for residential area, and that reaching the study area will be below the statutory norm for silence zone. Further the green belt all along the project boundary will further reduce the noise level so as to cause any disturbance to the faunal species. Thus the animals in the study area will not get impacted due the noise from the proposed project activity.

Strong Light during Night: The strong light in the project premises during night

may cause some disturbance to the fauna in the near by areas. It is proposed that

EIA REPORT FOR




all the light posts erected along the boundary wall will face inwards and down wards (with reflectors facing the plant and downwards), so that the light do not spreads out side the plant boundary.

4.1.4.9 Occupational Safety and Health

Impact Working operation of integrated steel plant is cumbersome and negligence in plant operations may cause risk to safety and health problems. Mitigation Measures For ensuring better occupational health and safety the following measures will be provided: General Measures Proper control of fugitive dust from sources inside plant including open stockyards

and to keep all de-dusting systems in prefect conditions. The de-dusting systems provided in shops will be regularly monitored and the level of dust in working zone will be reported to the management for necessary control action.

Keeping plenum ventilation systems of premises in perfect working order to avoid accumulation of dust on equipment inside the pressurized room. Regular cleaning of air filters.

Keeping air conditioning plants in perfect running condition for control / instrumentation rooms.

Proper functioning of pollution control systems to minimise dust fall on plant and outside areas.

Based on the environmental monitoring for dust, gases, toxic chemical, noise & vibration, the workers exposed to these will be regularly checked in medical unit and results will be intimated to management.

Workers exposed to noise prone areas will be medically checked and proper noise protective equipment will be supplied to them and will be encouraged to use the same.

Spot cooling facilities will be provided for workers exposed to high heat generating shops and will be checked periodically. If necessary, rotation of duties is advised.

Proper attention is given to township water quality so that water borne disease may not affect residents.

More doctors in township hospital and plant medical unit will be additionally trained in the field of occupational health as policy matter.

House Keeping Measures Proper house keeping is the key to proper environmental management. This creates

EIA REPORT FOR




proper working environment for the work force and safe working conditions. However, for the proposed capacity expansion the following good house keeping measures will be adopted: Regular cleaning and watering of plant roads to avoid accumulation of dust/garbage. Regular cleaning of shop floors. Avoiding accumulation and dumping of wastes and damaged equipment and items

anywhere inside the plant affecting aesthetics. Developing a positive outlook in the employees for keeping the work place, both in

factory, office or laboratory, clean and well maintained. Maintaining hygienic conditions in areas like canteens, near drinking water sources

and toilets.

4.1.4.10 Management Initiatives for Charter on Corporate Responsibilities for Environmental Protection (CREP)

The Charter on Corporate Responsibility (CREP) as laid down by Central Pollution Control Board (CPCB) for Integrated Iron and Steel Industry will guides the production in the proposed steel plant.

Management Initiatives for Charter of Corporate Responsibility as followed

SN Unit / Item Responsibilities Extent of fulfillment 1. SMS To reduce fugitive emission by

installing a secondary dedusting system

secondary dedusting facility envisaged to reduce the fugitive emission

2.

Water conservation/ pollution

Reduce specific water consumption to 5 m³/t for long products and 8 m³/t for flat products.

The statutory norms will be complied.

4.1.5 IMPACTS AND MITIGATION MEASURES BECAUSE OF ACCIDENTS

The major chemicals handled / stored in the expansion plant include LDO, Furnace oil, Mixed Gas and LPG.

In all the above listed chemicals, any accident / mishap resulting in Fire or consequent to fire will not have any serious repercussions as that of a major hazard. Furthermore, the fire in such of these installations will be contained and confined to the installation / facility only and there are no chances of escalation. Mitigation Measures Proper on-site / off-site emergency plans & Disaster Management Plan will be made. In addition, various fixed installations for Fire Detection, Alarm and Fire fighting will be available to effectively tackle the situation before the fire escalates into a conflagration. Regular mock drills will be conducted to check the effectiveness of the system

EIA REPORT FOR




4.2 Measures for Minimizing and / or Offsetting Adverse Impact

The potential adverse environmental impacts possible verses the mitigation measures incorporated to minimize the possible impacts, in the expansion plant have been summarized in brief in Table 4.6.

Table 4.6: Potential Impacts Verses Mitigation Measures Adopted SN. Impact Topics Impact On Impact Due To Adopted Measures 1 Physical

Resources Air environment

Release of air pollutants Incorporation & installation of air pollution control systems and ensuring their effective functioning.

Water environment

Draw l of w ater & release of polluted w aste w ater

Suff iciency of w ater availability assessed, maximum re-circulation of w ater envisaged, and Incorporation & installation of w ater pollution control systems and ensuring their effective functioning

Soil Release of polluted w aste w ater, Deposition of SPM released, & Dumping of solid w aste

Incorporation & installation of w ater and air pollution control systems, Handling & disposal of solid w aste including hazardous w aste in accordance w ith statutory norms.

2 Biological Resources

Vegetation Release of polluted w astew ater, Deposition of pollutants released.

Incorporation & installation of w ater and air pollution control systems

3 Land acquisition

Land environment, Aesthetics

Conversion of existing land use pattern

Land acquired is declared as Industrial land

4 Noise Habitats Use of equipment having operating sound level more than the statutory level.

Noise Control measures as required have been envisaged. All noise levels w ill be maintained w ithin the permissible statutory limits. Refer clause no. 4.1.4.6.2

5 Hazardous Substance

Habitat, Surrounding environment

Release of hazardous chemicals

Incorporation of different process control systems, Safety features, Alarm arrangements, and follow up of Disaster management / Emergency response plan

6 Transportation Habitat, Surrounding environment

Release of pollutant, Improper traff ic management.

Use of vehicles meeting the statutory norms related to emission, transport by railw ay freight, proper traff ic management.

7 Social & Economic

Human, livelihood, Education etc

Influx of people, Settlement, Stress on existing infrastructure etc.

No negative impact envisaged since Satarda is already a planned tow n. Moreover additional social improvement activities have also been planned by the project management in the region.

8 Cultural resources

Human Influx of people, Settlement

No negative impact envisaged since Satarda is already a planned tow n

However, the detailed technological aspects of mitigation measures are given in clause 4.5 of Chapter 4.

4.3 Irreversible and Irretrievable Commitments of Environmental Components The project is not expected to create any irreversible and irretrievable impacts because of the following: The project is coming within the existing plant premises, hence there is no change in

the land use pattern. No forest land is involved. No rehabilitation of site dwellers is required. All the impacts created by the project can be mitigated by adoption of suitable

mitigation measures.

EIA REPORT FOR




4.4 Assessment of Significance of Environmental Impacts 4.4.1 General

The assessment of effects of a particular action judgment must be made as to whether these effects are “Significant”. Significance is a relative concept, which reflects the degree of importance placed on the impact in question. Having identified the events associated with the proposed activity and their potential consequences, the next issue required to be addressed is the extent to which these make the proposed activity environmentally significant. In developing the criteria for determining this, the criteria outlined in the different guidelines for determining the level of environmental impact were considered.

These criteria entail an assessment of the level of certainty in the prediction of an activity’s potential environmental consequences (Predictability Criterion), combined with an assessment of the degree to which these consequences can be managed (Manageability Criterion).

The predictability criterion involves determining the level of certainty in the prediction of different issues for each of the events and their potential environmental consequences associated with the activity.

The manageability criterion focuses on the extent to which the potential environmental consequences can be either avoided or minimised in terms of size, scope and duration. It is based on the recognition that minimising the environmental impact of an activity primarily entails managing the environmental consequence(s) of those activities by either avoiding them in the first place or by mitigating them to as low as reasonably practical. From the significance scores for the predictability and manageability criteria, the level of environmental significance for each of the potential events associated with the proposed activity can then be determined as either High, Medium or Low on the basis of environmental significance matrix.

The steps followed for assessing the significance are presented schematically in Fig. 4.5 below. The aspect of environment and their environmental consequences considered are presented in Table 4.7.

Table 4.7: Events and their Environmental Consequences

Aspect of Environment

Category of Impact

Type of Event Likely Consequences

Natural Environment

Soil Impact Soil earthw orks Reduction in visual amenity of area.

Air Impacts Emissions to air (e.g. dust, SO2, NOx gases etc)

Health risk to local community; Greenhouse effect.

Surface & Ground Water Impacts

Water extraction Water shortage to local community, agriculture and ecosystem.

Spills into w ater bodies (eg. oil or chemical spills)

Inconsumable w ater to the local community and ecosystem.

Altering drainage patterns Reduced w ater capacity of natural w ater bodies. Increased soil erosion.

Fauna Impacts Disturbing terrestrial or aquatic species

Endangering species; Displacing species

EIA REPORT FOR




Aspect of Environment

Category of Impact

Type of Event Likely Consequences

Flora Impacts Disturbing native f lora Clearing native vegetation

Threaten biological diversity Destroy fauna habitats; Threaten biodiversity

Sensitive Area Impacts

Disturbance of National or Conservation Parks

Loss of conservation value

Disturbance of World Heritage areas

Loss of w orld heritage value of area

Disturbance of areas under national or international registers /conventions

Loss of register/convention values

Social Environment

Community Resource Impacts

Use of public resources Degradation of public infrastructure (eg. roads) Change in land use Disadvantage groups w ithin the community; Loss of

recreational amenity of a region Change visual attributes of area Reduction in aesthetic and recreational value of area

Cultural Impacts

Change demographic structure of an area

Changes to community make up; Changes in community cultural identity and values

Heritage Impacts

Disturbance to natural or man made features of an area

Changes to aesthetic value of area; Changes to historical value of area

Disturbance to aboriginal sites Loss of aboriginal aff iliation w ith an area Community Health Impacts

Air emissions Health problems in the community Noise and vibration Discomfort to local community; Water contamination Health risk to local community Potentially hazardous operations (eg. high pressure pipelines, hazardous substance storage)

Health and safety risk to local community

Economic Environment

Community Welfare Impacts

Altering economy of a region Changes to the standard of living in the region; Altering employment rate w ithin a community

Changes to the standard of living; Social instability/stability Changes in employment levels;

Natural Resource Impacts

Disturbance of natural resources of other industries in the region

Changes in level of viability of other industries, Changes to industry types w ithin Region

Altering existing land use. Changes to land value; 4.4.2 Criteria For Determining Significance

Issues considered under the predictability criterion are given in Table 4.8.

Table 4.8: Issues Considered under Predictability Criterion

a) Size of event(s) & consequence(s): The accuracy of the predicted quantity of potential pollution discharge on a unit or total basis, the amount of population, land, fauna and flora disturbed, and the size of the potential consequences of such events.

b) Scope of consequence(s): For example, the accuracy of the predicted extent to which the potential consequences extend beyond the confines of the area or region of direct disturbance.

c) Duration of event(s) & consequence(s): This includes the accuracy of the predicted timeframe (i.e. short or long term) over which the event and their potential consequences are expected to last.

d) Likelihood of events The likelihood at which the events that can potentially result in the consequences are estimated to occur.

e) Stakeholder Concerns of event(s) & consequence(s) The extent to which the stakeholder perceptions, views and concerns of the events and their consequences associated with the activity is known.

EIA REPORT FOR




As a first step, the level of certainty in the prediction of these issues has been determined and categorised as either Low, Medium or High as defined in Table 4.9.

Table 4.9: Level of Certainty in the Prediction of Activity Events and their

Associated Consequences Low Extreme uncertainty in the prediction of the issue. Well-informed decision-making is very

difficult to make. Medium Some uncertainty in the prediction of the issue. Sufficient confidence in the accuracy of the

data to make informed decision-making possible. High Insignificant uncertainty in the prediction of the issue. Confidence in making an informed

decision is very high.

The level of certainty for the above issues for each event is then determined. For ease of assessment, the results has been tabulated as shown below in Table 4.10

EIA REPORT FOR




4.4.3

Identify events associated with the proposed activity and any potentially environmentally adverse consequences associated with these events

Predictability Criterion Assess the level of certainty in the prediction of the activity events and their associated adverse environmental consequences in relation to their : Size Scope, Duration, Likelihood and Stakeholder Concerns

Manageability Criterion Assess the level to which any adverse consequences for each event can be managed in relation to : Being avoided; Likelihood of occurring; Duration; Size and scope; Cumulative effects; Stakeholder concerns

Determine the environmental significance scores for each event against the predictability and manageability criterion (Table 4.11 and 4.15 respectively).

Ascertain the level of environmental significance (Low, Medium or High) for each event (environmental significance matrix : Table 4.16).

Classify level of Environmental Impact of the overall proposed activity on the basis of the level of environmental significance of each event.

Fig. 4.5: Steps For Assessment of Significance of Environmental Impacts

EIA REPORT FOR




Environmental Significance Against Predictability Criterion Once the level of certainty of each of the issues is determined, it is then possible to assess the environmental significance of each of the events associated with the activity against the predictability criterion. The environmental significance is determined and assessed on a scale of 1 to 5 as described in Table 4.10. The significance score can then be tabled into the “significance score” column of the predictability criterion Table 4.11.

Table 4.10: Predictability Criterion Significance Score

Significance Score

Predictability Criterion

1 All of the issues outlined in Table 4.7 have been fully addressed; all events and their consequences associated with the activity have been accurately predicted to a high level of confidence.

2 There is a mixture of high and medium certainty of the issues. No issue is of low certainty.

3 All issues are of medium certainty. 4 There is low certainty in at least 1 of the issues for either the events or their potential

environmental consequence(s). 5 There is low certainty in all of the issues for either the events or consequences.

Table 4.11: Predictability Criterion Table

Step 1 Each of the events of the proposed activity and their associated consequences are assessed against certainty (Low, Medium or High as described in Table 4.9) in the prediction of: •the size; •scope; •duration; •likelihood; and •stakeholder concerns Step 2 Significance Score of 1 to 5 is assigned for each event using Tables 4.9 & 4.10. Si

ze

Scop

e

Dura

tion

Freq

uenc

y

Stak

ehol

der

Co

ncer

ns

Sign

ifica

nce

scor

e

NATURAL ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACTS Impact on Soil Earthworks High High High High High 1

Contamination (eg spills) High High High High High 1 Air Impacts Air emissions Medium Med. Med. Med. High 2 Surface/Ground Water Impacts

Water contamination Medium Med. Med. Med. High 2 Water extraction High High High High High 1

Altering drainage patterns High High High High High 1 Fauna Impacts Disturbance to species High High High High High 1 Disturbance to habitats High High High High High 1 Flora Impacts Disturbing native flora species High High High High High 1 Clearing extensive areas of native vegetation High High High High High 1 Sensitive Area Impacts Disturbance to National Parks High High High High High 1 Disturbance to World Heritage Areas High High High High High 1 National and/or worldwide register or High High High High High 1

EIA REPORT FOR




Step 1 Each of the events of the proposed activity and their associated consequences are assessed against certainty (Low, Medium or High as described in Table 4.9) in the prediction of: •the size; •scope; •duration; •likelihood; and •stakeholder concerns Step 2 Significance Score of 1 to 5 is assigned for each event using Tables 4.9 & 4.10. Si

ze

Scop

e

Dura

tion

Freq

uenc

y

Stak

ehol

der

Co

ncer

ns

Sign

ifica

nce

scor

e

NATURAL ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACTS SOCIAL IMPACTS Community Resource Impacts Public infrastructure High High High High High 1 Land use High High High High High 1 Changes to visual attributes of area High High High High High 1 Cultural Impacts Changes to demographic structure of area High High High High High 1 Heritage Impacts Disturbance to natural features High High High High High 1 Disturbance to man made features High High High High High 1 Disturbance to aboriginal sites High High High High High 1 Community Health Impacts Air quality changes Medium Med. Med. Med. High 2 Noise and vibration High High High High High 1 Changes to water quality High High High High High 1 Hazardous operations introduced Medium Med. Med. Med. High 2 ECONOMIC IMPACTS Community Welfare Impacts Wealth and employment High High High High High 1 Natural Resource Impacts Disturbance of natural resources of other industries

High High High High High 1

Altering existing land use High High High High High 1

4.4.4 Manageability Criterion

This criterion focuses on the extent to which the potential environmental consequences can be either avoided or minimised in terms of size, scope and duration. It is based on the recognition that minimising the environmental impact of an activity primarily entails managing the environmental consequence(s) of those activities by either avoiding them in the first place or by mitigating them to as low as reasonably practical. That is, any event will have an impact of some sort on the natural, social or economic aspects of the environment within which it occurs. However, the severity of the impact(s) depends on the extent to which the consequences to the environment can be eliminated or minimised. Therefore, the manageability criterion assesses the level to which the environmental consequences of each event can be either avoided or mitigated.

4.4.5 Issues Under Manageability Criterion

In assessing the level to which the environmental consequences can be managed the issues given in Table 4.12 may need to be addressed.

EIA REPORT FOR




Table 4.12: Issues Considered under Manageability Criterion

a) Avoidance of Consequences The extent to which the associated consequences of the various activity events can be totally avoided.

b) Likelihood of Event Occurring The likelihood or probability of an event occurring must also be addressed. If the l ikelihood of such an event or sequence of events occurring has been managed so as to be very low and acceptable to other stakeholders, then it could be said that this is being managed appropriately and therefore of low significance If the likelihood of such an event or sequence of events occurring has been managed so as to be very low and acceptable to other stakeholders, then it could be said that this is being managed appropriately and therefore of low significance

c) Duration of Consequences Whether the consequences can be managed to be short-term needs to be addressed – short-term needs to be defined in the context of the environment within which the potential consequences are likely to occur. That is, concepts such as the resilience of the environment would come into consideration.

d) Size and Scope Consideration should be given to the extent to which the size and scope of the consequences can be managed, for example area of land, amount of flora and fauna or number of people affected by an activity. Consideration should be given to the size and intensity of the impacted environment relative to the undisturbed surroundings. Also whether the consequences are potentially catastrophic in terms of human and environmental well being, for example wid e scoping and irreversible consequences.

e) Cumulative Effects This includes any cumulative effects of the consequences, for example, the number of individual activities, which individually may not pose a significant environmental risk but collectivel y their potential consequences may be very significant in a particular region.

f) Stakeholder Concerns The level of severity of the environmental consequences perceived by stakeholders (e.g. the outrage effect).

Table 4.13 outlines some basic questions, which can be used to address the above issues.

Table 4.13: Questions for Addressing Issues under Manageability Criterion

Issues Questions Avoidance of consequences

Can the potential adverse environmental consequences be avoided; or are there i s no such consequence? (Yes or No)

Likelihood of event

What is the probability of an event occurring, which may result in the adverse environmental consequence(s)? (Low, Medium or High on the basis of the results of the risk assessment carried out in accord with relevant standards)

Duration of consequences

Are the consequences likely to be Short, Medium or Long term?

Size and scope Can the consequences be managed so as to be small or confined to a designated area? (Small or Confined?) If they are not small or confinable are the consequences potentially catastrophic? ( wide Scoping and Irreversible).

Cumulative effects

Is it likely that the potential consequences of the proposal in conjunction with those of other existing activities are likely to pose a higher and unacceptable risk to the environment than if the individual activities where carried out on their own?

Stakeholder concerns

Is there any major concern of other stakeholders on any of the consequences of the proposed activity?

EIA REPORT FOR




4.4.6 Environmental Significance Against Manageability Criterion

Once the potential environmental consequences have been addressed in relation to the above issues, the level of environmental significance of each of the events associated with the proposed activity can then be assessed against the manageability criterion. As with the predictability criterion, the environmental significance for the manageability criterion is assessed on a scale of 1 to 5 as described in Table 4.14.

Table 4.14: Manageability Criterion Significance score

Significance

Score Manageability Criterion

1 Adverse consequences of the various events associated with the proposed activity can be totally avoided, or it is highly unlikely that the events will ever occur.

2 Adverse consequences can be managed to be short-term. Short-term needs to be defined in the context of the environment within which the potential consequences are likely to occur.

3 Adverse consequences are not or cannot be managed to be short-term, but they can be confined so as to be insignificant in terms of size and scope relative to the surroundings.

4 Adverse consequences in conjunction with those of existing activities pose significant cumulative effects. Or Consequences are significant in terms of duration and/or size and scope relative to surroundings.

5 Consequences are potentially catastrophic. Or There is high stakeholder concern on the severity of the consequences. Catastrophic in this context means wide scope and lo ng term or irreversible consequences such as death or serious injury to many individuals or permanent adverse change to the environment.

A step-by-step outline of the use of Tables 4.13 & 4.14 to assess the level of environmental significance for each of the events associated with the proposed activity against the manageability criterion is suggested as follows.

Step1: Where potential adverse consequences can be totally avoided; or where there are no adverse consequences associated with the events of the activity; or where there is a low likelihood of an event occurring which would lead to adverse consequences being realised, then the event can be considered as being of low significance. In this case a significance score of 1 should be assigned.

Step 2: Where potentially adverse consequences cannot be totally avoided or where their likelihood of being realised is not low, consideration needs to be given to the duration of the consequences. If the consequences can be managed to occur only for short term in the context of the environment within which they will occur. In such cases a significance score of 2 should be assigned. Step 3: If the consequences are not short term, then the question of whether or not they can be confined within a designated area, which is relatively small, compared to the surrounding environment needs to be addressed. If they can be confined to being small, then a significance score of 3 is assigned. If they cannot be confined to being small and are significant in terms of size and scope relative to surroundings and/or duration, then a significance score of 4 is assigned.

EIA REPORT FOR




Step 4: Before assigning a 2 or 3 significance score, the question as to whether the consequences may pose a significant risk to the environment as a result of the cumulative effects with the consequences of other existing activities needs to be considered. If it is considered that the cumulative effects are a significant risk, a significance score of 4 should be assigned.

Step 5: In the case where the consequences are potentially catastrophic in terms of being wide scoping and irreversible, or where there are major concerns by other stakeholders of the consequences, then a significance score of 5 should be assigned. The significance score can then be entered into the “significance score” column of the manageability criterion Table 4.15.

Table 4.15: Manageability Criterion Table

Step 1 The associated consequences of each of the impacts are assessed against the following issues: •the extent to which they can be avoided; •the likelihood of events occurring which result in the impacts being realised •their duration; •the size and scope the consequences; •the cumulative effects of the consequences; and •stakeholder concerns Step 2 Each of these issues are addressed using the questions given in Table 4.13. Step 3 Significance Score of 1 to 5 is assigned for each impact-using Table 4.14.

Avo

idan

ce

Like

lihoo

d

Dur

atio

n

Size

& S

cope

Cum

ulat

ive

Effe

cts

Stak

ehol

der

Con

cern

s

Sign

ifica

nce

Scor

e

NATURAL ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACTS Soil Impacts Earthworks Yes Low Med. Small No No 2 Contamination (eg spills) Yes Low Med. Small No No 2 Air Impacts Air emissions Yes Low Med. Small No No 2 Surface/Ground Water Impacts Water extraction No Low Med. Small No No 1 Water contamination Yes Low Med. Small No No 2 Altering drainage patterns No - - - - - 1 Fauna Impacts Disturbance to species No - - - - - 1 Disturbance to habitats No - - - - - 1 Flora Impacts Disturbing native flora species No - - - - - 1 Clearing extensive areas of native vegetation No - - - - - 1 Sensitive Area Impacts Disturbance to National Parks No - - - - - 1 Disturbance to World Heritage Areas No - - - - - 1 National and/or worldwide register or convention areas No - - - - - 1 SOCIAL IMPACTS Community Resource Impacts Sxe3Public infrastructure No - - - - - 1 Land use No - - - - - 1 Changes to visual attributes of area No - - - - - 1 Cultural Impacts Changes to demographic structure of area No - - - - - 1 Heritage Impacts Disturbance to natural features No - - - - - 1 Disturbance to man made features No - - - - - 1

EIA REPORT FOR




Step 1 The associated consequences of each of the impacts are assessed against the following issues: •the extent to which they can be avoided; •the likelihood of events occurring which result in the impacts being realised •their duration; •the size and scope the consequences; •the cumulative effects of the consequences; and •stakeholder concerns Step 2 Each of these issues are addressed using the questions given in Table 4.13. Step 3 Significance Score of 1 to 5 is assigned for each impact-using Table 4.14.

Avo

idan

ce

Like

lihoo

d

Dur

atio

n

Size

& S

cope

Cum

ulat

ive

Effe

cts

Stak

ehol

der

Con

cern

s

Sign

ifica

nce

Scor

e

NATURAL ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACTS Disturbance to aboriginal sites No - - - - - 1 Community Health Impacts Air quality changes Yes Low Med. Small No No 2 Noise and vibration No - - - - - 1 Changes to water quality Yes Low Med. Small No No 2 Hazardous operations introduced Yes Low Med. Small No No 2 ECONOMIC IMPACTS Community Welfare Impacts Wealth and employment No - - - - - 1 Natural Resource Impacts Disturbance of natural resources of other industries No - - - - - 1 Altering existing land use No - - - - - 1

4.4.7 Environmental Significance

From the significance scores for the predictability and manageability criteria, the level of environmental significance for each of the potential events associated with the proposed activity can then be determined as either High, Medium or Low on the basis of environmental significance matrix presented in Table 4.16.

Table 4.16: Matrix for Determining Level of Environmental Significance

Scores Manageability Criterion

1 2 3 4 5 Predictability Criterion 1 L L L M H

2 L L L M H 3 L M M H H 4 L M M H H 5 L M M H H

H = High; M = Medium; L = Low As observed in Table 4.16, it is proposed that where adverse environmental consequences can be avoided or where it is very unlikely that an event will occur which would result in such consequences (i.e a Score of 1 against the manageability criterion), then the significance of the individual event associated with the proposed activity can be considered to be low regardless of the predictability score.

The significance matrix provided in Table 4.17 can be developed so as to set the three levels of significance at other positions within the matrix.

EIA REPORT FOR




Table 4.17: Activity Environmental Significance Table Predictability

Criterion Score 1-5 (Table 4.10)

Manageability Criterion Score 1-5 (Table 4.15)

Level of Environmental Significance H: High M:

Medium L: Low (Table 4.16) NATURAL ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACTS Soil Impacts Earthworks 1 2 L Contamination (eg spills) 1 2 L Air Impacts Air emissions 2 2 L Surface/Ground Water Impacts Water extraction 1 1 L Water contamination 2 2 L Altering drainage patterns 1 1 L Fauna Impacts Disturbance to species 1 1 L Disturbance to habitats 1 1 L Flora Impacts Disturbing native flora species 1 1 L Clearing extensive areas of native vegetation 1 1 L Sensitive Area Impacts Disturbance to National Parks 1 1 L Disturbance to World Heritage Areas 1 1 L National and/or worldwide register or convention areas

1 1 L

SOCIAL IMPACTS Community Resource Impacts Public infrastructure 1 1 L Land use 1 1 L Changes to visual attributes of area 1 1 L Cultural Impacts Changes to demographic structure of area 1 1 L Heritage Impacts Disturbance to natural features 1 1 L Disturbance to man made features 1 1 L Disturbance to aboriginal sites 1 1 L Community Health Impacts Air quality changes 2 2 L Noise and vibration 1 1 L Changes to water quality 1 2 L Hazardous operations introduced 2 2 L ECONOMIC IMPACTS Community Welfare Impacts Wealth and employment 1 1 L Natural Resource Impacts Disturbance of natural resources of other industries

1 1 L

Altering existing land use 1 1 L

EIA REPORT FOR




4.5 Technological Details Of Environmental Mitigation Measures 4.5.1 Introduction

All new or expansion of any projects including expansion plant may be accompanied by certain undesirable consequences requiring mitigative measures. Since the objective of environmental impact assessment is to ensure that development proceeds hand in hand with ecological conservation so as to achieve sustained growth, it becomes imperative that a proper mitigative vis-à-vis environmental control measures are adopted at the planning and implementation stage itself. Environmental control measures are necessary for any major expansion projects to maintain environmental balance and to check possible harmful effects. These control measures are of multidisciplinary dimensions and varies with type of projects. Therefore, the measures described in this report are to be regarded as good beginning and depending upon the situations, continuing advice is to be updated. In this part of the report environmental management plan has been worked out based on present baseline status, and environmental impact assessment as presented in the environmental impact assessment part of the report. It has already been indicated earlier in the EIA part that a number of environmental factors needs to be considered covering ambient air quality, water pollution, solid waste management, social factors, etc. The environmental control measures thus envisaged for the proposed plant are described in following text.

It has been observed in the previous chapters that there will be very little negative impact in case control measures are undertaken. To ameliorate the adverse impacts of the project and for scientific development of the local environment, a comprehensive Environmental Management Plan (EMP) is necessary. This has been worked out based on present environmental conditions, environmental impact assessment and environmental prediction. The EMP has been made for formulation, implementation and monitoring of environmental protection measures during and after commissioning of the expansion plant-cum-modernization plan taking into consideration of the following:

Mitigation of adverse impacts. House keeping. Occupational safety and health plan Green belt development plan.

4.5.2 AIR POLLUTION : MITIGATION MEASURES

A number of environmental friendly features have been envisaged in the proposed plant design plan due to which the anticipated adverse environmental impacts are either avoided or minimized. UVSL is taking a number of measures to control air pollution. The remedial and control measures planned to be adopted are discussed briefly in the following sections.

EIA REPORT FOR




4.5.2.1 Fugitive Dust Emission Control

Raw Materials Handling (RMHS) Section

To control the fugitive dust emissions at the stock piles on the ground, conveyor transfer points, vibrating screens, etc which would be major source of fugitive dusts, both water sprinkling and dry fogging (DFDS) would be adopted for dust suppression. The DFDS system generates a layer of fine water droplets (fog) that a dust particle cannot pass through without colliding with water droplet. It does not use any chemicals as dust suppressant agent. DF requires only compressed air and water pressure for atomization through specially designed nozzles. DF is applicable for coal dusts, coke dust, ore dust etc which are non-reactive with water – if the material is not hot. For lime dust abatement, conventional dust extraction (DE) would be adopted. The Dust Extraction system will comprise of pulse jet type bag filter, centrifugal fan with motor and other accessories, suction hood, duct work, stack, etc. will be provided. The pollution Control Facility at RHMS can be summarized as: Stock Pile & Wagon Tripler – Plain water spray Rest all transfer point – DFDS All crusher House – Bag Filter based Dust Extraction. DE system with bagfilters in case of crusher house of lime/dolo handling plant.

SMS

Material Handling Operations The SMS would be one of the prime sources of fugitive dust emissions during material handling operations, charging / tapping / blowing, argon rinsing, steel pouring, de-slagging etc. Air pollution control system comprising of suction hood, duct and bag filters are provided in the SMS for bulk material charging system, mixer, desulphurization and LF.

4.5.2.2 Point Source Dust Emission Control

Wherever there is fuel gas fired combustion systems like reheating furnace where cleaned fuel gases are used as fuel, no dust emission control devices are proposed.

Process Dust Emission Control All bag filters shall have bags with non-adhesive coating to avoid blinding of bags and no air infiltration into bag house including ducting shall be ensured. However, the suitability of non-adhesive coating for specific application will be examined during detailed engineering. Pug mills shall be provided below dust silos to prevent secondary pollution / fugitive emission during unloading of dust. The collected dust from bag filters shall be transported to near by material handling system. In case this is not feasible, the same will be transported by trucks to consumer points.

EIA REPORT FOR




Gas Cleaning System A dry gas cleaning plant will be installed.

EAF – Convertors / LF

EAF Gas Cleaning System The dust cleaning (of primary gases) system will be of venturi scrubber type. Secondary Refining During secondary refining process, the gases generated during mixing and de-sulphurisation process will be contaminated with dust. A centralised secondary dust and fume extraction system for Converters and LFs will comprise of Bag Filter suction hood, ducts and stacks.

4.5.2.3 Gaseous Emission Control

SO2 Emission Control The main sources of sulphur dioxides from the proposed expansion in the steel plant will

from the L.D.O. used in SMS- Ladle drier & Tundish preheating and furnace oil in BAR & Rod MILL - Reheating furnace.

NOX Emission Control

The source of NOX will mainly be thermal NOX during combustion of fuels. It is therefore proposed to have combustion control devices by adopting waste gas recirculation and introducing secondary air in the combustion process. For this using low NOx burners so as to minimize the formation of NOX will be installed to limit combustion temperature in different units as feasible.

4.5.2.4 Summary of Proposed Air Pollution Control (APC) Measures

In line with the above stated proposals for air pollution prevention and control of the emissions from proposed production facilities, a summarized list of required APC measures is presented below. Air pollution control measures envisaged above will be designed suitably so as to meet the air emission norms. The table indicates design target and control measures at respective sources.

Emission Norms for Air Pollution Control (APC) Measures

SN.

Production Unit/ Facilities

Proposed Emission Control Devices Design Target Non-Point Sources Point Sources

1. Raw Materials Handling Section

- Covered conveyor - Dry Fogging - Water sprinkling - Bag filter - DE system

DE Stacks As per Norms

EIA REPORT FOR




SN.

Production Unit/ Facilities

Proposed Emission Control Devices Design Target Non-Point Sources Point Sources

2. Steel Melting Shop

SMS Material Handling - DE system by Bag filter

- Centralised secondary fume extraction system for converters / LFs with Bag filter.

Dust outlet < 50 mg/N m3

Work zone Dust level: < 5 mg/ m3

3. Bar & Rod Mill Reheating Furnace

- Low NOx burners Dust outlet < 50 mg/N m3

4. Lime and Dolo Plant

- Bag filter Dust outlet < 50 mg/N m3

4.5.4 Water: Mitigation Measures

Water used and discharged from these plants are mainly from indirect cooling circuit which are not normally contaminated with any major pollutants. However occasional discharges are made as bleed off when there is built up of dissolved solids in the circulating water due to repeated circulation. The dissolved solids are mainly different salt constituents of calcium and magnesium already present in water. Thus major portion of water will be re-circulated after necessary physical treatment e.g. settling, cooling etc. except for the bleed off portion, which is required to be discharged for the reasons, explained above. Some of the measures taken to reuse the wastewater generated in the plant will be: The wastewater generated from SMS gas cleaning plant, containing mainly

suspended solids, will be treated in scale pit and after physical treatment will be reused in the system.

The wastewater generated from Billet & Bloom caster recirculation circuit, containing mainly Suspended Solids and Oil & Grease, will be treated in scale pit and after physical treatment will be reused in the system.

The wastewater generated from Bar & Rod Mill recirculation circuit, containing mainly Suspended Solids and Oil & Grease, will be treated in scale pit and after physical treatment will be reused in the system. Blow down from the above units will be collected in a settling tank and will be used for dust suppression & Green Bed Development within the plant premises.

Rain water harvesting: The Rainwater harvesting is the simple collection or storing of water through modern techniques from the areas where the rain falls. It is as far the best possible way to conserve water. There are two methods in the field of rainwater harvesting, viz. rainwater recharging and rainwater collection & reuse.

EIA REPORT FOR




Recharge may be defined as the process of augmenting the groundwater table by providing artificial infiltration techniques which will reduce the excess surface run off and increase the storitivity of the soil. Other is the process of utilizing the rainwater by means of its collection. Collected water can be utilized for industrial and domestic purposes. Recharge Rainfall collected over the roof top of building will be taken through down-comers. Rainwater will be taken to the Recharge pit with filtration bed at bottom through pipes connected with the down-comers. Before taking the water to the recharge pit, a first flash valve will be connected with each down-comer so that first rain usually containing higher level of silt can be diverted from the filtration circuit. There will be 2 nos. recharge pit with filter bed including 2 m of filtration bed at the bottom. Collected water from roof top will be first taken to a screen chamber. This chamber will be fitted with screens. Water from the screen chamber will be taken to 1st recharge pits and 2nd recharge pit will be connected internally. Overflow from 1st recharge pit be entered to 2nd Recharge pit. Before Screen chamber drain will be diverted to main plant drain by means of 2 no’s of MS shutter plate. Filter bed at the bottom of the Recharge pit will consist of : 1st layer - 0.5 m of coarse sand (1.5-2 mm size), 2nd layer - 5 m of gravel (5-10 mm size) and 3rd layer -1 m of loose boulders (10-30 cm size). 2 nos of pits will be used as Injection well for recharging of rainwater into ground. From conical bottom of the Recharge pits through which rainwater will be recharged 1 no. of 150 mm dia slotted UPVC pipe (Ultra Poly Venyle Chloride) will be driven to 1m below the 1st aquifer level through 200mm dia bore for recharging of ground water. For getting the 1st Aquifer level necessary hydro-geological study to be done. There will be an overflow line from 2nd recharge pit which will be connected to the main drain so that in case of heavy rain no water logging will be there. Collection & Reuse Plant storm water drainage system will be allowed to receive treated effluents conforming to statutory norms from individual premises. The storm water from the plant proper will be collected by open drain system and finally lead to a settling pond through storm water drainage network. Settled storm water will overflow from the pond to the nearest existing nallah once the pond is filled up. Necessary inlet outlet arrangement for this pond has been envisaged. However, the details of the size & levels of pond and drains will be worked out during detail engineering. While developing the Plant General Layout, it will be ensured that rain water is harvested / recharged. Run-off water from the administrative building roofs will be collected and stored for future use. Sanitary wastewater treatment: A sewage treatment plant will be provided for the expansion plant and treated waste water will be utilised for afforestation.

EIA REPORT FOR




4.5.5 Solid Waste: Mitigation Measures The source of solid waste generation along with their re-use, re-cycle, utilization and disposal methodology are presented in Table 4.19.

Table 4.19: Solid Waste Generation their Re-Use, Re-Cycle, Utilization and Disposal

SN Type of Solid Waste

Re-Utilisation Recycle Re-use

Within Plant To be Sold 1 EAF Slag Will be used for

making briquettes or pellets to be used in road laying / paving of areas

- Will be sold to parties for building roads (aggregate for road making), civil engineering works, etc.

- Rail track ballast - Scientific dumping

for residual slag 2 Mill scale Sent to UGML-

Sinter Plant

3 Flue Dust From Pollution Control facility

Sent to UGML-Sinter Plant

Recycle of waste means utilization of waste in the same process from which it has been generated

Re-use of waste means utilization of the waste in any process other than the process from which the waste has been generated. The process utilizing the waste may be within the plant or out side the plant. In case of utilization outside plant, the waste is sold to firm utilizing the waste

Disposal means dumping of waste in designated areas. Hazardous waste disposal from the expansion plant and their utilization is given in Table 4.20.

Table 4.20 : Hazardous waste generation & Utilisation

Sl. No.

Hazardous waste Generated

Quantity t / KL Per month

Mode of utilisation

1. Used oil/ waste oil (Category 5.1)

11.4 t Reused and balance sold to authorised party approved by CPCB & MSPCB

2. ETP Sludge 24.75 t Will be sold to registered recyclers. 3. Zinc Dross 190 kg Sold

These wastes shall be disposed as per CPCB guidelines

EIA REPORT FOR




4.5.6 Green Belt Development: Mitigation Measures Green belt, is an important sink for air pollutants, it also absorbs noise. Enhancing green cover not only mitigates pollutants but also improves the ecological conditions / aesthetics and reduces the adversities of extreme weather conditions. Trees also have major long-term impacts on soil quality and the ground water table. By using suitable plant species, green belts can be developed in strategic zones to provide protection from emitted pollutants and noise.

Plant species suitable for green belts should not only be able to flourish in the area but must also have rapid growth rate, evergreen habit, large crown volume and small / pendulous leaves with smooth surfaces. All these traits are difficult to get in a single species. Therefore a combination of these is sought while selecting trees for green belt.

The green belt should be planted close to the source or to the area to be protected to optimize the attenuation within physical limitations. The green belt / cover will serve the following purposes: Compensate the damage to vegetation due to setting up and operation of the

proposed plant. Prevent the spread of fugitive dust generated due to project and allied activities. Attenuate noise generated by the project. Reduce soil erosion Help stabilise the slope of project site. Increases green cover and improve aesthetics. Attract animals to re-colonise the area.

Selection of Species The species for plantation have been selected on the basis of soil quality, place of plantation, chances of survival, commercial value (timber value, ornamental value, etc.), etc. It is to be noted that only indigenous species will be planted. Exotic species like Eucalyptus and Australian acacia will not be planted. The species for green belt / vegetation cover development will be selected in consultation with State Forest Department and State Soil Conservation Department. Mixed plantations will be done keeping optimum spacing between the saplings. However, the species suitable for planting in the area as recommended by Central Pollution Control Board in their publication “Guidelines for Developing Greenbelts” (PROBES/75/1999-2000) are given under various heads here under.

Plantation Scheme Plant saplings will be planted in pits at about 2.0 m to 3.0 intervals so that the tree density is about 1600 trees per ha. The pits will be filled with a mixture of good quality soil and organic manure (cow dung, agricultural waste, kitchen waste) and insecticide. The saplings / trees will be watered using the effluent from the sewage treatment plant and

EIA REPORT FOR




treated discharges from project. They will be manured using sludge from the sewage treatment plant. In addition kitchen waste from plant canteen can be used as manure either after composting or by directly burying the manure at the base of the plants. Since, tests have shown that availability of phosphorus, a limiting nutrient, is low, phosphoric fertilisers will also be added. The saplings will be planted just after the commencement of the monsoons to ensure maximum survival. The species selected for plantation will be locally growing varieties with fast growth rate and ability to flourish even in poor quality soils. A total of about 33% of the project area will be developed as green belt or green areas in project area (including waste dump site) and other areas. The widths of the belt around the plant will be erected all around the project boundary, depending on the availability of space.

In order to supply seedlings for the proposed green belt and green cover development a small nursery will be developed with the help of the state forest department. In this nursery, saplings will be developed from seeds or seedlings collected from nearby forest areas / other nurseries.

A very elaborate green belt development plan has been drawn for the proposed plant. The areas, which need special attention regarding green belt development in the industrial area, are:

1. Plant Area- Around Various Shops 2. Areas Around Waste Dumps and Plant Boundary 3. Vacant Areas in Plant 4. Around Office Buildings, Garage, Stores etc. and Along Road Sides 5. Township

Plant Area

Inside the plant works area, the regions with high pollution load are areas around raw material & coal handling areas, etc.

To arrest the fugitive emissions emitted from above units massive tree plantation will be undertaken in strategic places in the down wind direction of the above units along with that in other directions.

As there will be limited space (in height) due to various over head pipelines, thus small and medium sized species are suggested and they should be planted depending on the vertical height and lateral space available for the plant growth. The above-mentioned areas / direction should be covered with pollution tolerant species (in the space available around) as mentioned below:

Scientific Name Common Name Pithecolobium dulce Jungle Jalabee Zizyphus sp. Ghontol / Barkoli Pongamia pinnata Karanj Murraya exotica Kamayani

EIA REPORT FOR




Scientific Name Common Name Gmeline arborea Gamhari Acacia arabica Babool Thevieta peruviana Yellow Kaneer Nerium sp Pink Kaner Bougainvillea spp. Bougainvellea Duranta sp. Duranta Cassia auriculata Cassia

The sensitive varieties like Gulmohar, Amaltas, Kachnar, Kadamb should not be planted in the works area. The plants in the plant works area should be periodically washed with water spray, especially during dry and dusty seasons.

Areas Around Waste Dumps and along Plant Boundary

Green belt is to be developed in the vacant spaces around waste dump areas and along the plant boundary. The proposed plantation should be in three concentric orbits: (i) Curtain belt on the outermost boundary comprising tall trees with conical canopy. (ii) Middle belt of large size trees with globose and spreading canopy and (iii) Inner belt with medium size trees with spreading or trailing canopy. The desired

minimum thickness of these belts should be as follows:

Location Width (m) Outer curtain belt (pollution attenuation) 30 Middle belt (pollution attenuation) 50 Inner belt (pollution attenuation and training of winds to middle & outer belt)

20

However, the above-mentioned thickness of each belt may be proportionately reduced or increased in view of the total space available for plantation work. The list of plants to be used in each belt is given in the following paragraphs. In the curtain belt the following species of trees be planted keeping a space of 2.5m from plant to plant as well as from row to row:

Scientific Name Common Name Pongamia pinnata Karanj Dalbergia sissoo Shisham Azadirachta indica Neem Albizzia lebbek Siris Pithecolobium dulce Junglee jilebi Polyalthia longifolia Druping Ashok Syzygium cuminii Jamun Tectona grandis Teak Leucaena leucocephala Subabool Butea spp. Palas

EIA REPORT FOR




In the middle belt the following species of trees to be planted 3 m apart, from tree to tree as well as from row to row:

Scientific Name Common Name Cassia siamea Cassia Lagerstroemia parviflora Lagerstroemia Azadirachta indica Neem Tamarindus indica Imli Ficus bengalensis Bargad Ficus religiosa Peepal Pongamia pinnata Karanj

In the inner belt the following species of trees and shrubs to be planted 2.0 m apart from tree to tree as well as from row to row:

Scientific Name Common Name Nerium sp Kaneer Zizyphus spp Ber Murriya exocitica Kamayani Acacia arabica Babool Gmeline arborea Gamhari Bougainvillia spectabilis Baganvileas

Vacant Areas in Plant Plantation in vacant areas will be selected from among the following species. Plantation will be done in staggered trench manner 3.0 apart.

Scientific Name Common Name Artocarpus heterophyllus Kathal Azadirachta indica Neem Pongamia pinnata Karanj Ficus bengalensis Bargad Ficus religiosa Peepal Mangifera indica Mango Lagerstroemia parviflora Lagerstroemia Syzygium cuminii Jamun Tectona grandis Teak Gmeline arborea Gamhari

Plantation around Office Buildings, Stores, Garage etc. The species recommended for plantation around various buildings will include:

Scientific Name Common Name Azadirachta indica Neem Ficus bengalensis Bargad Lagerstroemia parviflora Lagerstroemia

EIA REPORT FOR




Scientific Name Common Name Dalbergia sisso Sisham Ficus religiosa` Peepal Mangifera indica Mango Polyalthia longifolia Ashok Delonix regia Gul mohar Cassia javanica Java-ki-rani Thevieta peruviana Yellow Kaneer Nerium sp Pink Kaner Bougainvillea spp. Bougainvellea Duranta sp. Duranta Cassia auriculata Cassia Cassia fistula Bhaya Cassia siamea Cassia

The species, which may be planted along the side of roads, include:

Scientific Name Common Name Azadirachta indica Neem Ficus bengalensis Bargad Ficus religiosa` Peepal Polyalthia longifolia Ashok Tectona grandis Teak Delonix regia Gul mohar Cassia javanica Java-ki-rani Lagerstroemia parviflora Lagerstroemia Cassia fistula Amaltas Cassia siamea Cassia

Avenue Plantation Double rows of avenue trees on the outer side of the footpaths are recommended; an outer row of shade trees and an inner row of ornamental flowering trees will be planted.

(a) Foliage Trees for Outer Avenue:

Scientific Name Common Name Syzigium cumnii Jamun Azadirachta indica Neem Tamarindus indica Imli Tectona grandis Teak Dalbergia sisso Sisham

EIA REPORT FOR




(b) Flowering / Ornamental Trees for Inner Avenue:

Scientific Name Common Name Delonix regia Gul mohar Cassia javanica Java-ki-rani Lagerstroemia parviflora Lagerstroemia Polyalthia longifolia Ashok Anthocephalus cadamba Kadamb Thevieta peruviana Yellow Kaneer Nerium sp Pink Kaner Bougainvillea spp. Bougainvellea Duranta sp. Duranta Cassia auriculata Cassia Cassia fistula Bhaya Cassia siamea Cassia

Post Plantation Care Immediately after planting the seedlings, watering will be done. The wastewater discharges from different outfalls will be used for watering the plants during non-monsoon period. Further watering will depend on the rainfall. In the dry seasons watering will be regularly done especially during February to June. Watering of younger saplings will be more frequent. Manuring will be done using organic manure (animal dung, agricultural waste, kitchen waste etc.). Younger saplings will be surrounded with tree guards. Diseased and dead plants will be uprooted and destroyed and replaced by fresh saplings. Growth / health and survival rate of saplings will be regularly monitored and remedial actions will be undertaken as required.

. Phase Wise Green Belt / Cover Development Plan Green belt will be developed in a phase wise manner right from the construction phase of the proposed project. In the first phase along with the start of the construction activity the plant boundary, around the proposed waste dumps, and the major roads will be planted. In the second phase the office building area will be planted. In the third phase when all the construction activity is complete plantation will be taken up in the plant area, around different units, in stretch of open land and along other roads.

4.5.7 Resource Conservation: Mitigation Measures

Management plan for resource conservation has been discussed below. Waste minimization audit, optimizing water use and handling of recycled waste materials also forms part of resource conservation plan and discussed in this section.

Waste minimization is defined simply as : “a systematic approach to the reduction of

waste at source, by understanding and changing processes and activities to prevent and reduce waste”. A variety of techniques can be classified under the term waste minimization, from basic housekeeping through statistical measurement, to

EIA REPORT FOR




application of clean technologies. In the context of waste minimization, waste relates to the inefficient use of raw materials and other substances at an installation. A consequence of waste minimization will be the reduction of gaseous, liquid and solid emissions.

The use and fate of raw materials and other materials, including by-products,

solvents and other support materials, such as fuels, catalysts and abatement agents, will be mapped onto a process flow diagram. This will be achieved by using data from the raw materials inventory and other company data as appropriate. Data will be incorporated for each principal stage of the operation in order to construct a mass balance for the installation.

Using the information, opportunities for improved efficiency, changes in process and

waste reduction will be generated and assessed. An action plan will then be prepared for implementing improvements to a timescale.

Efforts will be made to reclaim raw materials from waste prior to disposal to land and, where feasible, the recovered materials will be recycled or utilized as secondary by-products, in order to minimize the quantities landfilled. Where practicable scale, dusts and sludges recovered from the steel making processes will be re-used in the process (or sold), provided this does not adversely affect the operation of the process plant, jeopardize product quality or create environmental risks.

Reducing water use is normally a valid environmental (and economic) aim in itself, but any water passing through an industrial process is generally degraded so there will usually be an increase in pollutant load. The use of a simple mass balance for water use will help to reveal where reductions can be made.

Water will be recycled within the process from which it issues, by treating it first if necessary. Where this is not practicable, it will be recycled to another part of the process that has a lower water-quality requirement.

The water-quality requirements associated with each use will be established, and the scope for substituting water from recycled sources identified and input into the improvement plan.

Less contaminated water streams, such as cooling waters, will be kept separate from more contaminated streams where there is scope for reuse though possible after some form of treatment.

Most wastewater streams will however need some form of treatment but for many applications, the best conventional effluent treatment can produces a water that is usable in the process directly or when mixed with fresh water. Though treated effluent quality can very, it can often be recycled selectively used when the quality is adequate, discharged when the quality falls below that which the system can tolerate.

EIA REPORT FOR




Recycled materials includes dusts, scale and sludge recovered from operations at the installation (many of these are commonly termed “reverts”) and returned to sinter plant. Other materials will be explored for recovery (e.g. metal recovery from slag) then for disposal or landfill (including on-site facilities).

A system will be in place and maintained to record the quantity, nature and origin of

any waste that is disposed of or recovered and also, where relevant, the destination, frequency of collection, mode of transport and treatment method for those wastes. Records will be maintained of any waste sent off-site.

Wastes will be segregated wherever practicable, and the disposal routes identified. Disposal will be as near to the point of generation as is practicable.

Appropriate storage facilities will be provided for special requirements such as for substances that are flammable, and incompatible by-product and waste types will be kept separate.

Passive mitigation measures that will be considered are dyke walls around the liquid fuel storage tanks, enclosures, drains, sumps, fire walls, etc. wherever necessary. Adequate capacity dyke wall around the tank to contain the entire volume of tank is case of spill will be made.

Emergency isolation valves at critical locations on equipments / pipings will be placed to isolate high inventory of hydrocarbons.

Nitrogen / steam purging facilities will be provided on critical equipment / system for driving out hydrocarbons.

In case of fire, the cooling of adjoining tanks will be started immediately. It is also necessary to cool the tank on fire.

All hazardous storage systems will be designed with safety features as appropriate and recommended to enhance the safety against design failure.

With all the above mitigation measures, the impact in resources will be very minimum.

4.5.8 Energy Efficiency and Greenhouse Gas Emissions : Mitigation Measures

Energy efficiency and greenhouse gas emissions are linked together. Consumption of more energy or energy guzzling manufacturing process generates more greenhouse gases that in turn contribute to adverse climate change. Implementing energy efficiency programs in steel and power sector not only makes the steel production cost-effective but also reduces greenhouse gas emissions. As per the Koyoto protocol requirements, the Govt. of India does not have a target to reduce the CO2 emission; however, UVSL is considering CO2 reduction in the process through energy efficiency and energy recovery and apply for Carbon Credit benefits in future. The project is being designed to be most carbon efficient. However, the exact CO2 emission can only be determined accurately

EIA REPORT FOR




during the actual operation of the plant. The recommendations for reducing green house gas emission is given below:

The proposed project will be optimized in terms of energy consumption and

utilization. Waste flue gases and heat from process will be converted to energy through the use of pressure recovery turbines and other waste heat recovery systems. The recovered energy will not be not flared but designed for utilization to supply heat to the various furnaces.

Energy efficient building materials will be considered for construction of structures. Rat trap cavity brickwork using bricks / blocks will be considered. Thermally insulated building roof through traditional methods of brick batcoba technique/ other recommended technique will be considered. Natural ventilation system comprising screen walls, low emissive double glazed glass with U value of less than 2.8 W/2K, shading coefficient of 0.5 will be considered for the buildings. Fenestration with UPVC framing that reduces solar heat gain will be considered. Landscaping with deciduous tree canopy will be considered for reducing heat gain into the structures (by blocking sun rays in summer and permitting penetration during winter).

Energy efficient process and building structures will achieve 20% reductions in

energy consumption. Benchmarking energy consumption and estimating energy efficiency of the process is beyond the scope of this EIA. It is recommended that the project authorities will undertake yearly energy audit for their entire manufacturing process and ancillary facilities.

EIA REPORT FOR




ANNEXURE- 1

EIA REPORT FOR




CONC. OF PM IN MICROGRAMS / m3

DIRECTION (DEGREES)

DISTANCE (METERS) 500 1000 1500 2000 2500

360 1.20611 0.40594 0.22527 0.06501 0.01925 22.5 1.30381 1.3981 0.62313 0.37571 0.29593

45 2.13229 2.37253 1.98808 1.62194 1.37672 67.5 1.51461 1.51223 1.0978 0.74066 0.56459

90 0.74745 0.22236 0.17751 0.25583 0.32434 112.5 0.74428 0.45145 0.39511 0.39273 0.41262

135 1.50887 1.14855 0.93101 0.96483 1.08367 157.5 0.92037 0.73873 0.88308 0.87621 0.79794

180 0.41458 1.626 1.20919 0.81686 0.65714 202.5 0.50831 0.84688 0.90711 0.62741 0.49389

225 0.63533 1.17299 0.73855 0.4373 0.33985 247.5 0.48878 0.24143 0.18508 0.12881 0.13086

270 0.50989 0.21209 0.49035 0.55264 0.58424 292.5 0.42535 0.61136 0.09462 0.02168 0.00764

315 0.26323 0.61981 0.21522 0.14665 0.1367 337.5 0.50983 0.17783 0.12786 0.11891 0.11286

DIRECTION (DEGREES)

DISTANCE (METERS) 3000 3500 4000 4500 5000

360 0.00812 0.00583 0.00717 0.01167 0.01989 22.5 0.27104 0.26468 0.26573 0.27055 0.27761

45 1.19777 1.06727 0.97229 0.9031 0.85291 67.5 0.49359 0.47434 0.47525 0.48556 0.49973

90 0.35949 0.37519 0.38644 0.40053 0.42021 112.5 0.4426 0.48107 0.52354 0.56998 0.61984

135 1.18057 1.23674 1.26285 1.2682 1.2579 157.5 0.69937 0.61064 0.53899 0.48255 0.4377

180 0.58732 0.55429 0.53448 0.51855 0.50338 202.5 0.41729 0.3644 0.32436 0.29263 0.26678

225 0.30156 0.29623 0.31008 0.33352 0.35586 247.5 0.15458 0.18325 0.21127 0.2365 0.25783

270 0.57162 0.54698 0.52344 0.50277 0.48395 292.5 0.00473 0.00817 0.0178 0.03234 0.04933

315 0.14299 0.15743 0.17382 0.19228 0.21147 337.5 0.10501 0.09722 0.09009 0.08374 0.07813

EIA REPORT FOR




DIRECTION (DEGREES)

DISTANCE (METERS) 5500 6000 6500 7000 7500

360 0.03237 0.04929 0.07042 0.09464 0.12078 22.5 0.28612 0.29559 0.30571 0.31567 0.32549

45 0.81692 0.79158 0.77422 0.75974 0.74876 67.5 0.51433 0.52767 0.53898 0.54799 0.5547

90 0.44569 0.4761 0.51023 0.54331 0.57544 112.5 0.67171 0.7243 0.7765 0.8263 0.87352

135 1.23541 1.20397 1.1667 1.12546 1.08107 157.5 0.40135 0.37127 0.34593 0.32424 0.30543

180 0.48854 0.47458 0.46229 0.45208 0.444 202.5 0.24531 0.2272 0.21172 0.19836 0.18669

225 0.37973 0.40331 0.42549 0.44562 0.46339 247.5 0.27462 0.28674 0.29439 0.29809 0.29845

270 0.46603 0.44851 0.43115 0.41389 0.39675 292.5 0.06639 0.08189 0.09498 0.10538 0.11197

315 0.23222 0.25376 0.27546 0.29687 0.31729 337.5 0.07319 0.06882 0.06494 0.06148 0.05838

DIRECTION (DEGREES)

DISTANCE (METERS) 8000 8500 9000 9500 10000

360 0.1483 0.17692 0.20611 0.23546 0.26462 22.5 0.33524 0.34486 0.35425 0.36335 0.3721

45 0.74086 0.73516 0.73101 0.72793 0.72555 67.5 0.55926 0.56188 0.56277 0.56219 0.55923

90 0.60779 0.63985 0.67123 0.70167 0.7309 112.5 0.91808 0.95968 0.99817 1.03348 1.06458

135 1.03777 0.99644 0.95748 0.92103 0.8871 157.5 0.28894 0.27434 0.26132 0.24962 0.23903

180 0.43801 0.43422 0.43236 0.43211 0.43318 202.5 0.17643 0.16732 0.15919 0.15187 0.14526

225 0.47872 0.49165 0.50229 0.51081 0.51742 247.5 0.29613 0.29176 0.28588 0.27899 0.27147

270 0.37981 0.36317 0.34697 0.33131 0.31631 292.5 0.11553 0.11728 0.11759 0.11681 0.1152

315 0.33596 0.35356 0.36997 0.38516 0.39911 337.5 0.05559 0.05307 0.05077 0.04868 0.04676

EIA REPORT FOR




CONC. OF SO2 IN MICROGRAMS / m3

DIRECTION (DEGREES)

DISTANCE (METERS) 500 1000 1500 2000 2500

360 1.01669 0.34419 0.19637 0.06623 0.03049 22.5 1.87277 1.73657 1.56264 1.82997 2.08615

45 6.22441 4.97854 4.32047 3.67032 3.16962 67.5 12.55175 7.98209 4.95003 3.12781 2.18464

90 12.64099 1.95707 1.4582 2.25026 2.5249 112.5 5.01308 1.28278 0.52898 0.3821 0.49867

135 1.68253 1.00986 2.10002 4.14826 5.20233 157.5 0.74094 2.36293 5.84951 4.73137 3.38131

180 0.33207 7.93667 4.5088 3.60866 3.92476 202.5 0.40979 3.45427 4.32561 2.13439 1.64463

225 0.52751 1.88837 1.20495 0.70041 0.58612 247.5 0.64222 2.41308 3.19189 1.59339 1.07522

270 2.9626 0.18965 0.62973 1.0044 1.3256 292.5 3.4897 0.73759 0.10218 0.02155 0.00719

315 1.8926 1.11876 0.49551 0.319 0.24348 337.5 0.82202 0.44024 0.36726 0.34062 0.31391

DIRECTION (DEGREES)

DISTANCE (METERS) 3000 3500 4000 4500 5000

360 0.0279 0.04008 0.06455 0.10174 0.15215 22.5 2.22352 2.25541 2.22001 2.14983 2.06654

45 2.78538 2.49554 2.28011 2.12263 2.01021 67.5 1.73889 1.56371 1.52742 1.55869 1.61925

90 2.45018 2.27785 2.12527 2.02888 1.98949 112.5 0.70967 0.94895 1.17873 1.38905 1.58415

135 5.3043 4.98908 4.58014 4.2084 3.90507 157.5 2.50439 1.98135 1.65392 1.43387 1.27594

180 4.01542 3.94475 3.78237 3.58192 3.38123 202.5 1.35473 1.15475 1.00832 0.89646 0.8082

225 0.56643 0.62845 0.75115 0.90498 1.04624 247.5 1.16038 1.38998 1.58086 1.69128 1.72998

270 1.5604 1.69844 1.74923 1.73602 1.68274 292.5 0.00416 0.00736 0.01987 0.04571 0.08577

315 0.21246 0.211 0.23045 0.2665 0.31464 337.5 0.28762 0.26401 0.24339 0.22552 0.21001

EIA REPORT FOR




DIRECTION (DEGREES)

DISTANCE (METERS) 5500 6000 6500 7000 7500

360 0.2156 0.29116 0.37735 0.46321 0.5522 22.5 1.98296 1.906 1.83893 1.77618 1.7228

45 1.93266 1.88177 1.85087 1.8276 1.81271 67.5 1.68696 1.75032 1.8039 1.84569 1.87558

90 1.99533 2.03331 2.09291 2.1604 2.22662 112.5 1.77016 1.95168 2.13101 2.3078 2.48102

135 3.66319 3.46685 3.30172 3.15677 3.02011 157.5 1.15627 1.06161 0.98418 0.9192 0.86358

180 3.20058 3.04685 2.9196 2.81521 2.72911 202.5 0.73676 0.67771 0.62805 0.58567 0.54905

225 1.18143 1.30405 1.41112 1.50185 1.57676 247.5 1.71703 1.67072 1.60471 1.52835 1.44776

270 1.60801 1.52415 1.43844 1.35475 1.27493 292.5 0.13692 0.19373 0.25065 0.30299 0.34244

315 0.37173 0.43397 0.49848 0.56296 0.62539 337.5 0.19648 0.18461 0.17412 0.1648 0.15647

DIRECTION (DEGREES)

DISTANCE (METERS) 8000 8500 9000 9500 10000

360 0.64377 0.73686 0.83033 0.92325 1.01487 22.5 1.67878 1.64337 1.61565 1.59469 1.57958

45 1.80456 1.80094 1.80025 1.8013 1.80324 67.5 1.89439 1.90336 1.90389 1.89733 1.88295

90 2.29617 2.36683 2.43712 2.50608 2.57204 112.5 2.65009 2.81382 2.97109 3.12103 3.26227

135 2.89198 2.77312 2.66207 2.55798 2.46036 157.5 0.81523 0.77268 0.73486 0.70097 0.67039

180 2.65334 2.58896 2.53399 2.48695 2.44669 202.5 0.51707 0.48888 0.46383 0.44142 0.42123

225 1.63702 1.68413 1.71967 1.74517 1.76205 247.5 1.36684 1.28797 1.21254 1.14133 1.07469

270 1.19974 1.12941 1.06389 1.00307 0.94673 292.5 0.37299 0.39544 0.41059 0.41945 0.42306

315 0.68458 0.74059 0.79306 0.84184 0.88639 337.5 0.14899 0.14222 0.13608 0.13048 0.12536

EIA REPORT FOR




CONC. OF NOX IN MICROGRAMS / m3

DIRECTION (DEGREES)

DISTANCE (METERS) 500 1000 1500 2000 2500

360 0.9682 0.3322 0.18208 0.05341 0.01651 22.5 1.04629 1.14427 0.52076 0.31654 0.25053

45 1.75273 2.04762 1.74817 1.43089 1.21333 67.5 1.25767 1.28208 0.93435 0.63184 0.48156

90 0.62682 0.1835 0.14802 0.2149 0.27247 112.5 0.60577 0.36457 0.31893 0.31834 0.33625

135 1.20854 0.95016 0.77909 0.82444 0.93918 157.5 0.74137 0.70303 0.80287 0.77888 0.70249

180 0.33249 1.35528 1.00426 0.68483 0.55958 202.5 0.41324 0.7382 0.78599 0.54799 0.4336

225 0.54946 0.99305 0.62179 0.37183 0.28945 247.5 0.3973 0.20641 0.15935 0.11022 0.11108

270 0.4133 0.18757 0.43149 0.48672 0.51063 292.5 0.34805 0.48986 0.07671 0.01815 0.00667

315 0.2184 0.50655 0.17594 0.1199 0.11183 337.5 0.43249 0.18603 0.12117 0.10968 0.10235

DIRECTION (DEGREES)

DISTANCE (METERS) 3000 3500 4000 4500 5000

360 0.00747 0.00562 0.00679 0.0106 0.01749 22.5 0.2302 0.22553 0.22725 0.23223 0.23908

45 1.0535 0.93641 0.85074 0.78795 0.74202 67.5 0.41986 0.40228 0.4025 0.41099 0.42308

90 0.3018 0.31465 0.32359 0.33479 0.3506 112.5 0.36256 0.39599 0.43298 0.47319 0.51625

135 1.02958 1.08041 1.1028 1.10627 1.09605 157.5 0.61391 0.53588 0.47324 0.42392 0.38468

180 0.50636 0.48139 0.46591 0.45272 0.43963 202.5 0.36693 0.32057 0.28538 0.25748 0.23474

225 0.2566 0.25154 0.26277 0.28203 0.30069 247.5 0.13132 0.15632 0.18095 0.20322 0.22208

270 0.49866 0.47762 0.45776 0.44023 0.42409 292.5 0.00416 0.00681 0.01446 0.0261 0.03974

315 0.1174 0.12999 0.14447 0.16057 0.17731 337.5 0.09436 0.08686 0.08018 0.07432 0.06921

EIA REPORT FOR




DIRECTION (DEGREES)

DISTANCE (METERS) 5500 6000 6500 7000 7500

360 0.0279 0.04194 0.05944 0.07948 0.10103 22.5 0.24706 0.25571 0.26479 0.27361 0.28216

45 0.70871 0.6849 0.66823 0.65443 0.64377 67.5 0.43576 0.44753 0.45765 0.46586 0.47213

90 0.37123 0.39598 0.42388 0.45107 0.47744 112.5 0.56095 0.60618 0.65101 0.69381 0.73435

135 1.07546 1.04738 1.0145 0.97843 0.9399 157.5 0.35283 0.32643 0.30417 0.2851 0.26855

180 0.42649 0.41392 0.40268 0.39319 0.38548 202.5 0.21586 0.19993 0.18631 0.17455 0.16429

225 0.32074 0.34063 0.3594 0.3765 0.39166 247.5 0.23697 0.24776 0.25467 0.25811 0.25864

270 0.40855 0.39324 0.37801 0.36282 0.34772 292.5 0.05348 0.066 0.0766 0.08505 0.09042

315 0.19531 0.21391 0.23259 0.25096 0.26841 337.5 0.06473 0.06079 0.05731 0.05422 0.05145

DIRECTION (DEGREES)

DISTANCE (METERS) 8000 8500 9000 9500 10000

360 0.12373 0.14734 0.17144 0.19568 0.2198 22.5 0.29056 0.29876 0.3067 0.31435 0.32165

45 0.63591 0.63008 0.6257 0.62233 0.61965 67.5 0.47655 0.47928 0.48053 0.48047 0.47841

90 0.50405 0.53048 0.55642 0.58163 0.60589 112.5 0.77261 0.80835 0.84142 0.8718 0.89865

135 0.90238 0.8666 0.83289 0.80137 0.77203 157.5 0.25404 0.2412 0.22973 0.21942 0.2101

180 0.37956 0.37555 0.37321 0.37229 0.37253 202.5 0.15525 0.14724 0.14008 0.13364 0.12781

225 0.40479 0.41591 0.42512 0.43255 0.43837 247.5 0.25683 0.25322 0.2483 0.24247 0.23608

270 0.33279 0.31814 0.30387 0.29011 0.27692 292.5 0.09335 0.09482 0.09512 0.09454 0.09327

315 0.28437 0.29939 0.31337 0.32629 0.33814 337.5 0.04897 0.04672 0.04468 0.04283 0.04113

EIA REPORT FOR




CONC. OF FUGITIVE EMISSION IN MICROGRAMS / m3

DIRECTION (DEGREES)

DISTANCE (METERS) 500 1000 1500 2000 2500

22.5 0 0.10663 0.07548 0.0615 0.05215 45 0 1.39138 0.73326 0.51131 0.38899

67.5 0 0.77027 0.22022 0.17671 0.15391 90 2.38289 0.66268 0.14465 0.05142 0.05469

112.5 1.6305 0.76264 0.29881 0.03515 0.01563 135 0.62779 0.81651 0.21501 0.08667 0.02635

157.5 0.38439 0.32595 0.04903 0.02575 0.02973 180 0.52833 0.07294 0.02934 0.03337 0.03682

202.5 0.22103 0.18462 0.16067 0.1441 0.13033 225 0.34787 0.23595 0.1775 0.14323 0.11956

247.5 0.10671 0.03825 0.03092 0.02602 0.02235 270 0.11768 0.02968 0.00418 0.00084 0.00041

292.5 0.04775 0.00082 0.00005 0 0 315 0.00911 0.00001 0 0 0

337.5 0.00371 0.00002 0.00002 0.00001 0.00001 360 0 0.00756 0.00542 0.00379 0.00273

DIRECTION (DEGREES)

DISTANCE (METERS) 3000 3500 4000 4500 5000

22.5 0.04566 0.04052 0.03647 0.03309 0.03029 45 0.31476 0.26309 0.22668 0.19846 0.17608

67.5 0.1384 0.1256 0.11548 0.10641 0.09831 90 0.05693 0.05823 0.05891 0.05886 0.05828

112.5 0.01945 0.02332 0.02682 0.02975 0.03209 135 0.01672 0.02028 0.02377 0.02687 0.02949

157.5 0.03598 0.04258 0.04846 0.05334 0.05716 180 0.03945 0.04129 0.04234 0.04277 0.04273

202.5 0.11952 0.11008 0.10162 0.09403 0.08724 225 0.10318 0.09059 0.08051 0.07228 0.06543

247.5 0.01948 0.01717 0.01537 0.01389 0.01263 270 0.00022 0.00013 0.00008 0.00005 0.00003

292.5 0 0 0 0 0 315 0 0 0 0 0

337.5 0.00001 0.00001 0 0 0 360 0.00223 0.00208 0.00193 0.00178 0.00164

EIA REPORT FOR




DIRECTION (DEGREES)

DISTANCE (METERS) 5500 6000 6500 7000 7500

22.5 0.02787 0.02575 0.0239 0.02226 0.02081 45 0.15783 0.14269 0.12995 0.11909 0.1098

67.5 0.09106 0.08457 0.07876 0.07353 0.06888 90 0.0573 0.05605 0.05461 0.05305 0.0515

112.5 0.03386 0.03512 0.03594 0.03639 0.03663 135 0.03163 0.03333 0.03461 0.03555 0.03628

157.5 0.06001 0.06198 0.06322 0.06393 0.06428 180 0.04234 0.0417 0.04088 0.04003 0.03914

202.5 0.08116 0.07569 0.07077 0.06652 0.0627 225 0.05966 0.05473 0.05048 0.04692 0.0438

247.5 0.01155 0.01062 0.00981 0.0091 0.00847 270 0.00002 0.00002 0.00001 0.00001 0.00001

292.5 0 0 0 0 0 315 0 0 0 0 0

337.5 0 0 0 0 0 360 0.0015 0.00139 0.00128 0.00119 0.0011

DIRECTION (DEGREES)

DISTANCE (METERS) 8000 8500 9000 9500 10000

22.5 0.01954 0.0184 0.01737 0.01644 0.01559 45 0.10195 0.09506 0.08895 0.08352 0.07864

67.5 0.06484 0.06117 0.05782 0.05475 0.05195 90 0.05 0.04848 0.04698 0.04549 0.04405

112.5 0.03665 0.03648 0.03615 0.03569 0.03514 135 0.03676 0.03701 0.03709 0.03701 0.03681

157.5 0.06423 0.06384 0.0632 0.06236 0.06137 180 0.03819 0.0372 0.0362 0.0352 0.0342

202.5 0.05921 0.05603 0.05312 0.05045 0.04799 225 0.04104 0.03857 0.03636 0.03436 0.03255

247.5 0.00791 0.00741 0.00696 0.00656 0.0062 270 0.00001 0.00001 0 0 0

292.5 0 0 0 0 0 315 0 0 0 0 0

337.5 0 0 0 0 0 360 0.00102 0.00096 0.00089 0.00084 0.00079

EIA REPORT FOR




5.0 ENVIRONMENTAL MONITORING PROGRAMME 5.1 INTRODUCTION

The monitoring and evaluation of the management measures envisaged are critical activities in implementation of the Project. Monitoring involves periodic checking to ascertain whether activities are going according to the plan. It provides the necessary feedback for project management to keep the program on schedule. The purpose of the environmental monitoring plan is to ensure that the envisaged purpose of the project is achieved and results in desired benefits. To ensure the effective implementation of the proposed mitigation measures, the broad objectives of monitoring plan are:

To evaluate the performance of mitigation measures proposed in the EMP. To evaluate the adequacy of Environmental Impact Assessment To suggest improvements in environmental management plan, if required To enhance environmental quality. To implement and manage the mitigative measures defined in EMP. To undertake compliance monitoring of proposed project operation and

evaluation of mitigative measure.

5.2 ENVIRONMENTAL ASPECTS TO BE MONITORED

5.2.1 General

Several measures have been proposed in the environmental mitigation measures for mitigation of adverse environmental impacts. These shall be implemented as per proposal and monitored regularly to ensure compliance to environmental regulation and also to maintain a healthy environmental conditions around the steel works. A major part of the sampling and measurement activity shall be concerned with long term monitoring aimed at providing an early warning of any undesirable changes or trends in the natural environment that could be associated with the plant activity. This is essential to determine whether the changes are in response to a cycle of climatic conditions or are due to impact of the plant activities. In particular, a monitoring strategy shall be ensured that all environmental resources, which may be subject to contamination, are kept under review and hence monitoring of the individual elements of the environment shall be done. During the operation phase Environmental Management Department (EMD) shall undertake all the monitoring work to ensure the effectiveness of environmental mitigation measures. The suggestions given in the Environmental Monitoring Programme shall be implemented by the EMD by following an implementation schedule. In case of any alarming variation in, ground level concentration in ambient air, stack emission, work zone air and noise monitoring results, performance of effluent treatment facilities, wastewater discharge from outfalls, etc. shall be discussed in the EMD and any

EIA REPORT FOR




variance from norms shall be reported for immediate rectification action at higher management level. In addition to the monitoring programme the following shall also be done to further ensure the effectiveness of mitigation measures: Quarterly internal environmental audits shall be carried out to check for compliance

with standards / applicable norms by in-house experts. Third party environmental audits shall be carried out once every year. In addition to the above, all necessary steps to have been taken to implement the

measures suggested by Central Pollution Control Board (CPCB) in the Charter on Corporate Responsibility for Environmental Protection (CREP) for Integrated Iron and Steel Industry. These measures have already been included in the plant design, for example:

Direct injection of reducing agents for example, pulverized coal into the Blast Furnaces.

100% utilisation of Blast Furnace and Steel Melting Slag. Hazardous wastes to be handled and disposed off strictly in accordance with

Hazardous Wastes (Management and Handling) Rules, 2003. Specific water consumption to be brought down to less than 5 m3/t of crude steel. Promotion of Energy Optimization Technology including periodic energy audits. All new stacks to be provided with continuous stack monitoring facilities. The environmental aspects to be monitored to ensure proper implementation and effectiveness of various mitigative measures envisaged / adopted during the design and commissioning stage of the proposed expansion plan are described here under.

5.2.2 Maintenance of Drainage System

The effectiveness of the drainage system depends on proper cleaning of all drainage pipes/channels. Regular checking will be done to see that none of the drains are clogged due to accumulation of sludge/sediments. The catch-pits linked to the storm water drainage system from the raw material handling areas will be regularly checked and cleaned to ensure their effectiveness. This checking and cleaning will be rigorous during the monsoon season, especially if heavy rains are forecast.

5.2.3 Meteorology

It is necessary to monitor the meteorological parameters regularly for assessment and interpretation of air quality data. The continuous monitoring will also help in emergency planning and disaster management. The proposed plant shall have a designated automatic weather monitoring station. The following data shall be recorded and archived:

- Wind speed and direction - Rainfall - Temperature and humidity - Solar Radiation

EIA REPORT FOR




5.2.4 Plant Stack Emissions Monitoring Periodical monitoring of stacks for PM, SO2 and NOx in case of process stacks shall be done to assess the performance of pollution control facilities installed for the unit. In case emissions are found to exceed the norms, the ‘on duty’ personnel shall check the relevant process parameters and take appropriate corrective action. All major stacks for the proposed plant will be provided with on-line monitoring system. After the implementation of project, the stacks will be monitored as per plan given in Table 5.1*.

Table 5.1: Stacks to be Monitored after the Implementation of the Project

Shop / Unit Nos. of Stacks (Working)

Monitoring Frequency Per Month

1. EAF Two (in rotation) 2 2. Bar & Rod Mill One (in rotation) 2 3. Lime Plant One (in rotation) 2 4. Dolo Plant One (in rotation) 2 * Parameters = PM, SO2, NOX & CO

Further for the units / facilities commissioned during the proposed plant the following shall be followed: Along with the performance and guarantee test of main plant equipment,

performance and guarantee test of pollution control equipment will be made before taking over the various units. EMD shall also be a party in preliminary and final acceptance tests.

A detailed maintenance schedule shall be drawn for all pollution control systems. The maintenance shall be done strictly as per schedule and guidelines furnished by plant manufacturer.

5.2.5 Solid / Hazardous Waste Generation & Utilisation

Maximum re-cycling and utilization of generated waste as per guidelines shall be done. Hazardous waste shall be disposed off as per applicable statutory conditions.

5.2.6 Green Belt Development

The following plan has been made for implementation: Annual plans for tree plantation with specific number of trees to be planted shall be

made. The fulfillment of the plan shall be monitored by the EMD every six months. A plan for post plantation care will be reviewed in every monthly meeting. Any

abnormal death rate of planted trees shall be investigated. Watering of the plants, manuring, weeding, hoeing will be carried out for minimum 3

years.

EIA REPORT FOR




5.2.7 House Keeping

The Safety Department will keeping a very close monitoring of house keeping activities and organising regular meetings of joint forum at the shop level (monthly), zonal level – (once in two months) and apex level (quarterly). The individual shop concern will be taking care for the house keeping of shops.

5.2.8 Occupational Health and Safety

Routine medical examination of personnel will be carried out in a systematic programme at plant medical unit. A systematic programme for medical check-up at regular intervals shall be followed for all workers to ascertain any changes in health condition due to the working conditions.

5.2.9 Socio-Economic Development

The setting up of the steel plant will improve the infra-structure & economic conditions thus will improve the socio economic development. The communities, which are benefited by the steel plant, are thus one of the key stakeholders for the steel plant. It is suggested that the plant management should have structured interactions with the community to disseminate the measures taken by the steel plant and also to elicit suggestions for overall improvement for the development of the area.

5.2.10 Effluent Quality

Effluent characteristics at inlet and out let of Effluent Treatment Plant (ETP) dedicated to different units shall be regularly monitored* (as per Table 5.2) to assess the performance of different effluent treatment facilities.

Table 5.2: Monitoring of Effluent Outlet & Inlet of ETP

Description Nos. of Locations Monitoring Frequency In let and out let of ETP of different units 2X2 Once a month * Parameters = pH, Temp., SS and O & G

5.2.11 Work Zone Air Quality

Work zone air quality will be monitored as per directives of MSPCB to assess the levels of Particulate matter, NOx and SO2 in the work zone.

5.2.12 Work Zone Noise

Noise levels shall be measured at the source of generation. The noise attenuation measures have been taken at the design stage of the plant itself. However in case of high noise generating equipment which are not frequented by the plant personnel, the area shall be cleanly marked as ‘High Noise” area and the employees be provided with personal protective equipment like ear plugs/ear muffs.

EIA REPORT FOR




After the implementation of the project, the noise level shall be monitored* as given in Table 5.3 and all preventive measures shall be followed. Work zone noise shall be monitored at all units to cover all shift operations once in a year.

Table 5.3: Noise Level to be Monitored after Expansion Description Nos. of Locations Monitoring Frequency

Work zone Noise At all shops eight hours per shift continuous to cover all shift operations once in a year

Once in a year to cover all shifts

*Noise Level in Leq (A) 5.2.13 Ambient Air Quality

It is necessary to monitor the air quality at the boundary of the steel works specifically with respect to particulates. It is proposed that continuous particulate matter monitoring stations be established at two locations of the steel works. The equipment shall have facilities to monitor both PM10 and PM2.5 particulates.

After the implementation of the expansion plan the ambient air shall be regularly monitored* as given in Table 5.4.

Table 5.4: Ambient Air to be Monitored

Description Number of AAQ Stations Monitoring Frequency

1. Ambient Air Quality 4 Twice in a week 2. Online Particulate Matter Monitoring at Steel Plant Boundary

2 Continuous

* Parameters = PM10, PM2.5, SO2, NOX, CO

5.2.14 Wastewater Discharge from Plant Outfalls

No wastewater will be discharged from the plant after treatment. Majority of the treated wastewater will be utilized with in the plant area for dust suppression and afforestation.

5.2.15 Ambient Noise Ambient noise shall be monitored at six locations all along the boundary once in a month.

5.2.16 Ground Water Monitoring Ground water shall be sampled from up gradient and down gradient of the plant including slag dump area to check for possible contamination and to ascertain the trend of variation in the water quality, if any. In case any adverse trend is noticed, immediate remedial measures shall be taken. A total of nine samples (two inside the plant area & seven out side) shall be monitored once in a month for the critical parameters.

EIA REPORT FOR




5.3 MONITORING PLAN 5.3.1 General

The target of the Environmental Control Department implementing the environmental monitoring plan on a short-term basis would be to: Prepare specific unit operation plan for different shops along with Human Resource

Department ; Interpret requirements of the EIA documentation into an environmental education

plan; Assist engineering team with the incorporation of EMP requirements in contract

specifications and contract terms and conditions; Undertake and/or co-ordinate all internal compliance monitoring and evaluation and

external monitoring through suitable outside consulting firm; Advice the top management on all matters related to environmental requirements of

the project; Provide all necessary specialized environmental expertise as needed during the

project period.

The long-term objective of EMD would be to build environmental awareness and support, both within and outside the plant premises. The other long-term tasks would be to develop environmental training programme for the target groups of different units of the plant.

The environmental monitoring plan contains:

Performance indicators Environmental monitoring programme Progress of Monitoring and Reporting Arrangements Budgetary provisions Procurement Schedules

5.3.2 Performance Indicators

The physical, biological and social components identified to be particularly significant in affecting the environment at critical locations have been suggested as Performance Indicators (PIs). The performance indicators will be evaluated under two heads: a) Environmental condition indicators to determine efficiency of environmental

management measures in control of air, noise and water pollution and solid waste disposal.

b) Environmental management indicators to determine compliance with the suggested environmental management measures.

The Performance Indicators and monitoring plans will be prepared for the project for effective monitoring.

EIA REPORT FOR




5.3.3 Environmental Monitoring Programme

The Environmental Monitoring Plan during construction and operation stages envisaged for the proposed project, for each of the environmental condition indicator is given in Table 5.5A & B. The monitoring plan specifies:

Parameters to be monitored Location of the monitoring sites Frequency and duration of monitoring Special guidance Applicable standards Institutional responsibilities for implementation and supervision

EIA REPORT FOR




Table 5.5: Part A - Environmental Monitoring Programme Environmental Issue/

Impacts

Mitigation Measure Reference to Contract

Documents

Approximate Location

Time Frame

Mitigation Cost

Institutional Responsibility Implemen-

tation Super- vision

Construction Stage 1. Dust Generation

All possible measures w ill be done to minimize dust generation during construction, like w ater spraying, etc.

Project Requirement

Construction site w ithin plant

During construction stage

Project preparation cost

Contractor Projects

2.Solid Waste disposal Solid w aste generated during construction w ill be disposed in pre-identif ied dumping area.

-Do- Construction site w ithin plant and dumping area.

-Do- -Do- -Do- -Do-

3.Air Quality at construction site

Air Quality w ith respect to various pollutants shall be monitored.

-Do- At construction site -Do- -Do- -Do- -Do-

4.Environmental Protection Measures

Implementation/Installation of all Environmental Protection Measures as envisaged in Chapter 3 & 4 for controlling/abating pollution.

-Do- Different units under expansion

-Do- -Do- -Do- -Do-

Operation Stage 1.Environmental

Protection Measures

Proper functioning of all Environmental Protection Measures as envisaged in Chapter 3 & 4 for controlling/abating pollution.

Project/Statutory requirement

Different units under expansion

Continuously

Production cost

Concerned Plant Units/EMD

Top Management

2.Maintenance of Storm Water Drainage System

The drains w ill be periodically cleared to maintain storm w ater f low w ithin the Plant.

-Do- Entire drainage netw ork of the plant.

Beginning and end of each monsoon.

Productioncost

Contractor Civil Maint.Department

3.Meteorology Meteorological parameters through a continuously monitoring system.

-Do- Suitable location w ithin plant premises

Continuously

environmental monitoringcost

EMD /Pollution Monitoring Agency,

Top Management

4.Stack emissions / Performance of stack emissions pollution control facilities

Out let of all process & de-dusting (major) stacks in different units.

-Do- All units of the proposed expansion plan

Through out operation stage

-Do- -Do- -Do-

5.Particulate Monitoring inside Plant Boundary

Online SPM Monitoring at tw o locations. -Do- Inside the plant Continuously

-Do- -Do- -Do-

6.Solid w aste/Hazardous Waste generation and utilisation

Maximum re-cycling and utilization of generated solid w aste as per EMP

-Do- All units of the expansion plant generating & utilization solid w astes

-Do- -Do- Concerned Plant Units/EMD

-Do-

EIA REPORT FOR




Environmental Issue/ Impacts

Mitigation Measure Reference to Contract

Documents

Approximate Location

Time Frame

Mitigation Cost

Institutional Responsibility Implemen-

tation Super- vision

7.Green Belt Already good green cover exists, efforts to further strengthen the green cover

-Do- Planting trees in the open area

-Do- -Do- Horticulture Department/EMD

-Do-

8.House Keeping Cleanliness of w ork place Corporate responsibility

All units of the expansion plant

-Do- -Do- All responsible units/safety Dept./EMD

-Do-

9.Occupational Health Health of w orkers / Staff -Do- -Do- -Do- -Do- Plant Medical Unit

-Do-

10. Socio-economic Development

Structured interactions w ith the community to disseminate the measures taken by the steel plant and also to elicit suggestions for overall improvement for the development of the area

-Do- Stake Holders -Do- CSR cost Personnel Dept. / EMD

-Do-

11. Performance of Eff luent Treatment Facilities

Eff luent Treatment facilities installed at different units

Statutory requirement

All units of the expansion plant

-Do- Environmental Cost

Concerned plant units/ EMD

-Do-

12. Work zone Air Quality

At all units of the plant -Do- -Do- -Do- -Do- Safety Dept. -Do-

13. Work zone Noise levels

At all units of the plant -Do- -Do- -Do- -Do- Safety Dept. -Do-

14. Atmospheric Pollution (AAQ)

Ambient Air Quality w ith respect to various pollutants shall be monitored as envisaged in the pollution-monitoring plan.

-Do- As per specif ied AAQ monitoring programme

-Do- -Do- EMD -Do-

15. Ambient Noise Noise pollution w ill be monitored.

-Do- As per the noise pollution monitoring programme

-Do- -Do- -Do- -Do-

16.Ground Water Quality

Changes in ground w ater quality w ill be monitored in the up-gradient and dow n gradient of the plant including slag dump w ill be monitored

-Do- As per ground w ater monitoring programme

-Do- Env. Cost -Do- -Do-

Note: EMP = environmental management plan, EMD = Environmental Management Department , CSR= Corporate Social Responsibility, RPM (PM 10 & PM 2.5) = Respirable particulate matter, SO2 = sulphur di-oxide, NOx = nitrogen oxides, CO = carbon mono-oxide, HC = hydrocarbons, Pb = lead, CSR – Corporate Social Responsibility.

EIA REPORT FOR




Table 5.5: Part B: Environmental Monitoring Plan for the Performance Indicators

Environmental

component

Project Stage Parameters Location Frequency Standards Approximate cost (Rs)

Implemen-tation

Supervision

Effluent Quality

Operation stage All the parameters as specified by statutory agencies

At outlet of different effluent treatment plants

Once in a month IS :2490 IS:3025

2X1X12x7000 =Rs168000

EMD and / or through approved monitoring agency

EMD

Work zone Air Quality

Operation stage As per applicable statutory standards

All units of the plant 8 hr per shift continuous (to cover all shifts of operation in a year for each unit) per year.

Factories Act 9x3X7000 =Rs189000

-Do- -Do-

Ambient Air Quality

Operation stage PM 10, PM2.5, NOx, CO, HC, Pb, SO2

4 locations Twice a week NAAQ Standards IS:5182

4X12X15,000 =Rs720000

-Do- -Do-

Ambient Noise levels

Operation stage As per National Ambient Noise Standard as per Environmental Protection Act, 1986 amended 2002

All along the boundary Once in a month during the operation period.

Noise Pollution Control Rules, 2000

6x12 x4,000 =Rs 288000

-Do- -Do-

Ground Water Quality

Operation stage Critical parameters as per IS 10500

5 wells ( 2 inside + 3 outside)

Once in a month IS:10500 5X12x8,000 = Rs 480000

-Do- -Do-

Stack émission monitoring

Operation stage PM,SO2, NOx All process stacks of plant in rotation

5 stacks in a month in rotation IS:11255 5x12x10000 = Rs. 600,000

-Do- -Do-

Total 24,45,000 Say 25,00,000 Total Monitoring Costs = Rs 25,00,000 per year during the operation year of the proposed plant Note: CO - Carbon Monoxide; Cr - Chromium; EMD = Environmental Control Department, HC - Hydrocarbon; IS - Indian Standard; NOx - Nitrogen Oxide; Pb - Plumbum (lead); SO2 - Sulfur Dioxide; RPM (PM 10 & PM 2.5) = Respirable particulate matter, PM - Particulate Matter

EIA REPORT FOR




5.3.4 Progress Monitoring and Reporting Arrangements

The rational for a reporting system is based on accountability to ensure that the measures proposed as part of the Environmental Monitoring Plan get implemented in the project. The monitoring and evaluation of the management measures are critical activities in implementation of the project. Monitoring involves periodic checking to ascertain whether activities are going according to the plans. It provides the necessary feedback for the project management to keep the programme on schedule. The rational for a reporting system is based on accountability to ensure that the measures proposed as part of Environmental Management Plan get implemented in the project.

A reporting system for environmental monitoring plan is given in Table 5.6.

Table 5.6: Reporting System for Environmental Monitoring Plan

S.N Details Indicators Stage Responsibility A. Pre-Construction Stage: Environmental Management Indicators and Monitoring Plan 1 Suitable location for dumping of wastes

has to be identified. Dumping locations Pre-

construction Projects

2 Suitable location for construction worker camps have to be identified (if applicable) and parameters indicative of environment in the area has to be reported

Construction camps Pre-construction

Projects

B. Construction Stage: Environmental Condition Indicators and Monitoring Plan 1. Dust suppression at construction site Construction site Construction Projects 2 The parameters to be monitored as per

frequency, duration & locations of monitoring specified in the Environmental Monitoring Programme

Air quality Construction Projects through approved monitoring agency

C. Operation Stage: Management & Operational Performance Indicators 1 Solid waste generation, utilization and

dumping As per guidelines of statutory bodies

Operation Concerned Plant Units / EMD

2 Hazardous waste re-utilisation and dumping in designated pits as specified by statutory authorities.

As per the notifications / guidelines specified by statutory authorities.

Operation -Do-

3 Stack Emissions from Process & de-dusting stacks

All parameters as specified for stacks of different units by Statutory Authorities

Operation Concerned Plant Units / EMD

4 Meteorology, Ambient air quality, Waste water discharge through plant outfalls and Noise levels.

All parameters as specified by Statutory Authorities

Operation -Do-

5.3.5 Emergency Procedures

Suitable emergency procedures will be formulated and implemented at design stage itself for tackling of emergency situations arising out of the proposed operations. Emergency situations arising out of non-functioning of the air pollution control

systems and inter-locking of the systems.

EIA REPORT FOR




Emergency situations arising out of non-functioning of effluent treatment plant and suitable storage facilities for effluent generation.

To contain oil spillage, proper system will be provided around the storage facilities to

collect & use them later.

5.3.6 Budgetary Provisions for Environmental Monitoring Plan

The break-up of equipment cost for monitoring is given in Table 5.7. A capital cost provision of about Rs.5,00,00,000/- has been kept towards the cost of monitoring equipments for environmental laboratory in the EMP. The budgetary cost estimate for implementation of the environmental monitoring measures is elaborated in Table 5.5 (Part B) and the environmental protection and enhancement measures included in the project cost is given in Table 5.5 (Part A). The summary of the cost of environmental budgetary provisions for environmental monitoring programme is given in Table 5.8.

Table 5.7: Estimated Cost of Monitoring Equipments

SN. Monitoring Equipments Nos. Required Unit Cost (Rs) Total Cost (Rs) 1 High Volume Sampler 2 70000 140000 2 Respirable Dust Sampler (RDS) 2 100000 200000 3 Stack Monitoring Kit 1 100000 100000 4 On line stack monitoring facilities along with

accessory facilities for monitoring of SO2, NOx, CO2, CO and Particulate Matter

3 5000000 15000000

5 On Line AAQ Monitoring Station 3 10000000 30000000 6 Flue Gas Analyser 1 700000 700000 7 Hot Air Oven 1 50000 50000 8 Automatic weather monitoring station 1 500000 500000 9 Hot Plate 2 10000 20000 10 Muffle Furnace 1 50000 50000 11 BOD Incubator 1 70000 70000 12 BOD Apparatus, Oxitop 1 300000 300000 13 DO Meter 1 100000 100000 14 Spectrophotometer with Digestion Assembly,

HACH 1 500000 500000

15 pH meter 2 35000 70000 16 Conductivity Meter 1 25000 25000 17 AAS 1 3000000 3000000 18 Digital Balance (five digits) 1 250000 250000 19 Filtration Apparatus 1 70000 70000 20 Heating mental 2 2500 5000 21 Refrigerator 1 20000 20000 22 Fuming Chamber 1 300000 300000 23 Water Bath 1 20000 20000 24 Auto Titrator 1 600000 600000 25 Turbidity Meter 1 50000 50000

Total 52140000 Say Rs.5,25,00,000/-

EIA REPORT FOR




Table 5.8: Summary of Cost of Environmental Monitoring Plan

SN. Item Cost in Rs. A. Capital Cost 1. Cost of Environmental Monitoring Equipments 5,21,40,000 Say Total Capital Cost Rs.5,25,00,000/- B. Operation Phase Recurring Cost in Rs./ yr. 1 Environmental Monitoring Plan Monitoring during operation @ Rs 25,00,000/yr for the operation

phase of the proposed plant 25,00,000

Say Total 25,00,000 Total Recurring Cost 25,00,000

*Note: Estimates are on the basis of present cost (2015)

5.3.7 Budgetary Provisions for Environmental Protection Measures Total capital cost of the project will be around Rs. 3,325.90 Crores. The environmental protection and enhancement measures (as mentioned in Chapters 4.0) included in the project cost in Table 5.5 (Part A), as estimated are given in Table 5.9.

Table 5.9: Cost of Environmental Protection Measures (Rs. Crores)

Sl. No.

Environmental Protection Measures Recurring Cost per annum

Capital Cost (Rs. Crores)

1 Air Pollution Control 40 115 2 Water Pollution Control 10 22 3 Noise Pollution Control Included in item no.1 Included in 1 4 Environment Monitoring Programme 0.25 5.25 5 Green Belt 0.10 1.75 6 Others (Solid waste management, ventilation

/ air conditioning, fire fighting etc.) 30 66.0

Total 80.35 210 Note: estimates are on the basis of present cost (2015)

5.3.8 Procurement Schedule The construction phase of the proposed expansion will be complete in 24 months. Thus the procurement of different equipments (Table 5.7) shall be planned in phased manner in 24 months so as to ensure environmental enhancement measures are implemented before the commissioning of the project as planned in the EMP.

5.4 UPDATING OF EMP The directives from MOEF and the regulations in force at any time shall govern the periodicity of monitoring. However it is suggested that the implementation of various measures recommended in the Environmental Monitoring Programme be taken as EMPs to effectively implement the measures for continual improvement in environmental performance.

EIA REPORT FOR




6.0 ADDITIONAL STUDIES 6.1 PUBLIC CONSULTATION

Socio-economic survey was carried out covering all the villages / towns of the study area to record awareness, opinion, apprehensions, quality of life and expectations of the local people about the proposed expansion plant. The opinion of local people about the expansion plan was obtained through socio-economy survey of the villages in the study area.

The survey has been conducted through specially designed questionnaire covering every aspect of the present study. In addition to the field data, secondary data / information collected, compiled and published by different Governmental agencies / departments were also collected and utilized appropriately. For selection of respondents from the study area, Two Stage Random Sampling has been adopted. In the first stage, villages are selected and in the second stage, households/ respondents are selected. From each selected village, the respondents are selected randomly to account intra-village variability among the respondents for the character under study. As the variability of the characters under in each strata study do not vary widely among the households, a smaller sample size is expected to represent the population. A sample of 33 respondents is drawn from the study area. The sample covers an estimated 175 persons. Peoples' perception regarding the project is a very important factor because it is the people on whom the major part of the impact will fall. To this end, an opinion poll was conducted as a part of field survey. With a view to cover the peoples perception in the study area, an effort was made to collect the detailed information on this aspect during the field survey. People of the area are mostly aware of the activities of the project, specifically, the developmental ones. They are also quite aware of the its likely advantages and disadvantages. The results of the poll are analysed and furnished in Table 6.1. It is observed that 67% of them have identified creation of employment opportunity as the main advantage. People are hopeful of getting employment in the small-scale units likely to come up in the vicinity of the plant. Around 58% of the respondents feel improvement in peripheral development activities. 21% of the respondents are expecting improvement in business. About 42% of the respondents are fearful about environmental aspect.

EIA REPORT FOR




Table 6.1 : Peoples’ Perception on the Project

Perception No of respondents Distribution (%) ADVANTAGES Employment opportunity 22 66.7 Business opportunity 7 21.2 Peripheral development 19 57.6 Improvement of social infrastructure 10 30.3 DIS-ADVANTAGES Likely effect on environment 14 42.4

Conclusions

On the basis of the overall results of the present impact assessment the following conclusions are drawn:

Overall peoples’ perception on the project is good. The project is going to generate more employment opportunities both direct and indirect to the local people. This project will also play a vital role in socio-economic development of the area as well as the local persons. However, based on the extensive mitigation measures being adopted in the proposed enviro-friendly expansion project, there will be more advantages.

6.2 RISK ASSESMENT

6.2.1 INTRODUCTION

Industrial activities which produce, treat, store and handle hazardous substances, have a high hazard potential endangering the safety of man and environment at work place and outside. Recognizing the need to control and minimize the risks posed by such activities, the Ministry of Environment & Forests have notified the “Manufacture Storage & Import of Hazardous Chemicals Rules” in the year 1989 and subsequently modified, inserted and added different clauses in the said rule to make it more stringent. For effective implementation of the rule, Ministry of Environment & Forests has provided a set of guidelines. The guidelines, in addition to other aspects, set out the duties required to be performed by the occupier along with the procedure. The rule also lists out the industrial activities and chemicals, which are required to be considered as hazardous.

Uttam Value Steel Limited will follow the DRI-SCRAP-EAF-CCM-B&R mill Route of steel making. The primary raw material shall be coal based DRI, scrap, sms grade lime and dololime, carbon powder and ferro-alloys. No Iron making facility is envisaged in proposed expansion, we shall be discussing only Steel making, casting and rolling facility. The main steps in manufacturing process are as follows: The proposed expansion project is engaged in the production Steel making, casting and rolling facility. The major chemicals handled / stored by the plant includes Furnace Oil, LDO, LPG, different acids etc. In view of this, proposed activities are being scrutinized in

EIA REPORT FOR




line of the above referred “Manufacture, storage and import of hazardous chemicals rules” and observations / findings are presented in this chapter. The assessment has been made in a systematic manner covering the requirements of the above-mentioned rules. Accordingly subsequent sections have been divided as follows:

i) Process description ii) Applicability of the rule iii) Description of hazardous chemicals iv) Hazard identification & risk analysis (HIRA) v) Hazard assessment vi) Consequence analysis including MCACA vii) Brief description of the measures taken and viii) On site emergency plan

Accordingly next sections are elaborated.

6.2.2 PROCESS DESCRIPTION

The proposed expansion plant is following the DRI-SCRAP-EAF-CCM-B&R mill Route of steel making. The primary raw material shall be coal based DRI, scrap, sms grade lime and dololime, carbon powder and ferro-alloys. No Iron making facility is envisaged in proposed expansion.

6.2.3 APPLICABILITY OF THE RULE

From the above description of the process, it is observed that the chemicals handled and involved are: (i) Furnace Oil (ii) L.D.O. (iii) LPG To decide whether the above mentioned industrial activities are likely to come within the scope of the above mentioned “Manufacture Storage and Import of Hazardous Chemicals Rules” and the threshold quantities mentioned in the rules are used for comparison as given in Table 6.2.

EIA REPORT FOR




Table: 6.2: Threshold Quantity & the Chemicals Stored and Handled SN Chemical Stored

/ Handled Qty. Stored / Handled (In Tonne) And Storage / Handling Conditions

Whether Included in The List of

Hazardous & Toxic

Chemicals

Lower Threshold

Qty. (In Tonne)

Upper Threshold

Qty. (In Tonne)

1 Furnace Oil 1000 KL(900t) Liquid, Ambient temp & Press.

Yes 5000t 50000t

2 L.D.O. 500 KL(400t) Liquid, Ambient temp & Press.

Yes 5000t 50000t

3 L.P.G. 750 t liquid which remains under pressure.

Yes 25t 200t

After comparison of the stored / handled and threshold quantities, it can be noticed that only LPG is crossing the upper threshold quantities but Furnace oil & L.D.O. are below the lower threshold quantities. Accordingly, rule nos. 10-12 of “Manufacture, Storage and Import of Hazardous Chemicals Rules, 1989” will be applicable for LPG. Material safety data sheets for LPG, Furnace oil & LDO are described in the preceding section.

6.2.4 DESCRIPTION OF HAZARDOUS CHEMICALS

The chemicals which are expected to be handled are presented in Table 6.2. The Material Safety data sheets of different chemicals are presented below.

EIA REPORT FOR




DATA SHEET

Liquefied Petroleum Gas

EIA REPORT FOR




EIA REPORT FOR




6.2.5 HAZARD IDENTIFICATION

Hazards associated with the above mentioned chemicals are presented in Table 6.3.

Table 6.3: Type of Hazards

Name of the Chemical

Type of

Hazard

Hazard Rating (NFPA Hazard Signal)

IDLH Value

Vap. Press

@ latm.

Remarks

Health Flammability Reactivity

Furnace Oil 1 2 2 0 -- -- Liquid, Ambient temp & Press.

L.D.O. 1 2 3 0 -- -- Liquid, Ambient temp & Press.

L.P.G. 1, 3, 8 & 9

1 4 0 -- -- liquid which remains under pressure

Note:

Type of Hazard

1. Flammable substance 2. Oxidising substance, reacts with reducing agents 3. Emits a toxic gas or vapour 4. Emits an irritating gas or vapour 5. Emits a narcotic gas or vapour 6. Gas or vapour not dangerous other than displacing air 7. Causes skin irritation or burns 8. Toxic substance 9. Explosive material under certain conditions

EIA REPORT FOR




Hazard Rating

a. Health

1 None 2 Minor 3 Moderate, could cause temporary incapacitation or injury 4 Severe, short exposure may cause serious injury 5 Extreme, short exposure may cause death

b. Flammability

1 None, Material does not burn 2 Minor, material must be preheated to ignite 3 Moderate, moderate heating is required for ignition and volatile vapours

are released 4 Severe, material ignites at normal temperature 5 Extreme, very flammable substance that readily forms explosive mixtures

c. Reactivity

1 None, stable when exposed to fire 2 Minor, unstable at high temp. or press and may react with water 3 Moderate, unstable but does not explode, may form explosive mixture

with water 4 Severe, Explodes if heated or water added 5 Extreme, readily explosives under normal condition

From the above table it can be observed that LPG is most `dangerous’ materials since this is gaseous under ambient condition and except this others two are liquid at ambient condition. The catastrophic potential of a hazardous substance depends both on toxicity and volatility. The ambient temperature vapour pressure of a substance is used as a measure of the ability to become air borne. Since LPG is gaseous at ambient temperature and pressure and stored in pressurised condition to keep it in liquid form, the catastrophic potential of this chemical is maximum. Accordingly, the consequence analysis carried out subsequently covers analysis of LPG only since the release of this quantity and in case of any eventuality it may affect the maximum area.

6.2.6 HAZARD ASSESSMENT

In the earlier section, type of hazard associated with different type of chemicals and the event of release of these chemicals is being identified. It has also been identified the category of hazard associated with different chemicals.

EIA REPORT FOR




Hazardous situation arising due to: Failure in the monitoring of crucial process parameters e.g. pressure, temperature,

flow quantity etc. Failure in the utilities e.g. cooling water Failure control elements e.g. pressure, temperature level, flow controllers etc. Failure of components such as pumps, compressor etc. Failure of safety systems, safety valves / relief valves, sprinkler systems, alarm etc. Mechanical failure of vessels or pipe work due to excessive stress, over pressure,

corrosion etc. Wrong operation, failing to adhere to the safety norms etc. It has been mentioned that release of gas may lead to hazardous situation in case of accidental release of large quantity. Such situation is possible from the storage area where bulk quantities are being stored. It is unlikely that small leakage through pipes, gaskets, glands or any other means within the plant proper itself (user points) will create a hazardous situation unless allowed to be released for a long time. It is expected that during such small leakage preventive steps will be taken within a specified time span. CONSEQUENCE ANALYSIS OF THE ABOVE HAZARDS In this section, accident consequence analysis to determine the consequences of a potential major accident on the installation, the neighborhood and the environment are being discussed by evaluating the consequences of incidence involving hazardous materials vis-a-vis Propane. Consequence analysis also involves assessment of release quantity which is again dependent upon chemical, storing condition, type of release, duration etc. Catastrophic flammable material normally involves the air borne release of these materials. A potential catastrophic release of flammable material would involve air borne release and subsequent explosion or fire i.e. a sufficiently large fuel – air mixture within flammable mix rapidly develop and finds a source of ignition. However, Propane will be stored under pressurized condition in liquid form and is expected to be distributed to the user points in gaseous form. Accordingly possible release quantities under different conditions have been computed and presented in Fig. 6.1 & 6.2. From the figure it can be noticed that release rate & quantity of liquid Propane is much more than gaseous Propane. The threshold quantity for flammable material (Propane) as per Hazardous Chemicals Rule, 1989 is 15000 Kg. Release of this quantity of flammable vapour in a few minutes has been used for deciding the catastrophic potential. From Figs 6.1(a) & 6.1(b) even though the pressure is different it can be noticed that this quantity of Propane liquid can be released through a 50 mm diameter hole in 5 to 6 minutes. Thus spillage of Propane could be more catastrophic as it will be a steady continuous source of vapour.

EIA REPORT FOR




RELEASE RATE OF LPG THROUGH DIFFERENT DIA HOLES @ 14Kg / Cm2 PRESSURE

0

10

20

30

40

50

60

0 10 20 30 40 50 60

HOLE DIA IN MM

RE

LE

AS

E R

AT

E I

N K

g /

S

Fig 6.1(a): Computed Possible Release Quantities Under Different

Conditions RELEASE RATE OF LPG GAS THROUGH DIFFERENT DIA HOLES @ 7Kg / Cm2

0

0.5

1

1.5

2

2.5

3

3.5

0 10 20 30 40 50 60

HOLE DIA IN MM

RE

LE

AS

E R

AT

E I

N K

g /

Sec

Fig. 6.1(b): Computed Possible Release Quantities Under Different

Conditions

When a pressurized liquefied gas is released from containment, a portion flashes off. Following flash off, residual liquid is at its boiling point and the vaporization continues as

EIA REPORT FOR




a rate limit process. The second stage of rate limit vaporization is usually regarded as relatively less important compared with the initial flash off. Fraction flash off is approximately 17% at 15°C as Propane. From the above it is clear that release of liquid Propane is potentially more catastrophic than release of vapour.

Flammable releases cause harms as a results of fire or explosion. Flammable vapour cloud resulting from rapid release of Propane is being calculated. Since the cloud center cannot be predicted, a conservation approach has been followed and it has been assumed that the cloud drifts towards downwind from the point of release when the danger of ignition occurs. Assuming that the cloud would drift in any direction, the “Hazard Area” around Propane storage area has been established by drawing a circle of radius equal to the distance, which may be affected due to heat intensity, if BLEVE occurs. A `BLEVE’ can occur, if a pressure vessel becomes completely filled with liquid. The temperature rises and pressure relief capacity is insufficient to keep the internal pressure from exceeding tank strength. One of the hazards of a `BLEVE’ of a pressurized tank containing liquefied gas is the fireball created by combustion of the mixture of vapour liquid that is explosively dispersed by the sudden rupture. The sudden expansion of compressed vapour and the large quantities of vapour suddenly produced by liquid flashing combine to create a large ball of liquid droplets and vapour. The heat created by the burning of the dispersed liquid and vapour causes a powerful thermal updraft. As already explained, sudden release of a liquid stored at a temperature above its boiling point will result in the instantaneous and adiabatic vaporization of a fraction of the liquid. It is usually taken as half the tank capacity while calculating the radiative flux incident, on a target some distance away from the Propane tank. In the proposed project it is expected that Propane will be used for the proposed units. The storage capacity of the tanks will be 250t each (3 X 250T). Assessments have been made for catastrophic explosion with assumptions that total storage quantity of one tank is released. Unconfined vapour cloud explosion is one of the most serious hazards of Propane. A vapour cloud explosion may cause harm by direct or indirect blast effects. It is the flashing superheated liquid, which tends to give rise to the largest vapour clouds. Most unconfined vapour cloud explosions have been caused by such flashing liquids. The impact zone at over pressure 0.02068 bar and above is shown in Fig. 6.2. It can be seen that in case of catastrophic rupture of the tank the safe distance is around 1.4 km from point of release. In a circle of about 362 m radius walls and roofs of buildings may collapse. And in a radius of 280 m heavy machines may suffer some damage. The heat radiation intensity in the downwind distance and impact zone at Heat Radiation intensity of 4 kW/m2 and above are shown in Fig 6.3. It can be seen that the objects in a radius of around 1126 m may suffer blistering after an exposure of 30 sec and within 670 m plastic materials will melt. Severe damage may occur to equipments within 390 m radius of the release point. Impact of various different types of releases vs. distance is shown in Table 6.6.

EIA REPORT FOR




The effect of thermal radiation on unprotected skin is also presented below in Table 6.4. Relation between Heat Radiation Intensity, Time and Effect on Man is shown in Table 6.5.

Table 6.4: Effect of Different Overpressure

Over Pressure (Milibar)

Type of Damage

0.0014 Annoying noise (137 dB if of low frequency 10–15 Hz). 0.0021 Occasional breaking of large glass windows already under strain. 0.0028 Loud noise (143 dB), sonic boom, glass failure. 0.0069 Breakage of small windows under strain. 0.0103 Typical pressure for glass breakage. 0.0207 Safe distance" (probability 0.95 of no serious damage below this value);

projectile limit; some damage to house ceilings; 10% window glass broken.

0.0276 Limited minor structural damage 0.03 Large and small windows usually shattered; occasional damage to window

frames. 0.048 Minor damage to house structures. 0.069 Partial demolition of houses, made uninhabitable. 0.09 Steel frame of clad building slightly distorted

0.138 Partial collapse of walls and roofs of houses. 0.158 Lower limit of serious structural damage. 0.172 50% destruction of brickwork of houses. 0.207 Heavy machines (3000 lb) in industrial building suffered little damage;

steel frame building distorted and pulled away from foundations. 0.276 Cladding of light industrial buildings ruptured. 0.345 Wooden utility poles snapped; tall hydraulic press (40,000 lb) in building slightly

damaged. 0.482 Loaded, lighter weight (British) train wagons overturned. 0.551 Brick panels, 8–12 in. thick, not reinforced, fail by shearing or flexure. 0.62 Loaded train boxcars completely demolished.

0.689 Probable total destruction of buildings; heavy machine tools (7,000 lb) moved and badly damaged, very heavy machine tools (12,000 lb) survive.

20.68 Limit of crater lip.

Table 6.5: Relation between Heat Radiation Intensity, Time and Effect on Man

Heat Radiation Level (Kw / m2) Effect 37.5 Damage to equipment 30.0 Limit for Class 1 building material 12.5 Melting Plastic 4.0 Blistering 1.6 Severe Hot Feeling

EIA REPORT FOR




Table 6.6 - Impact of various different types of releases vs. distance

Type of Release

Intensity radii (m) Flash Fire Envelop (m) 4 kW/m2 12.5 kW/m2 37.5 kW/m2 10000 ppm 20000 ppm

B 2m/s

F 1m/s

B 2m/s

F 1m/s

B 2m/s

F 1m/s

B 2m/s

F 1m/s

B 2m/s

F 1m/s

10mm 10.4 - - - - - 2.26 1.82 0.91 0.75 20mm 25 20.11 - - - - 4.82 4.49 1.93 1.33 Rupture 1127 1164 670 677 389 386 - - - -

From the figures and tables below it can be seen that the least of the effects of leakage from one of the storage tanks doesn’t cross the plant boundary in any case. However, considering worst case scenario, explosion of one of the tanks can cause serious injuries to nearby building and typical glass breakage and windows shattering of the buildings near the north-east boundary of the plant. Fireball resulting from this explosion will not have serious effects close to the plant boundary if the duration of exposure is less than 10 seconds.

Fig 6.2: Early explosion Overpressure radii

EIA REPORT FOR




Fig.6.3: Intensity Radii for Fireball

EIA REPORT FOR




6.2.7 HAZOP Study

It is suggested to have HAZOP Study for the fuel distribution network handling facilities prior to commissioning, for last minute corrections in the design of the systems from fail safe angle. The HAZOP analysis for the fuel handling system will be carried out and suitable measures will be implemented for safe operations. Electrical safety: Adequately rated and quick response circuit breakers, aided by reliable and selective digital or microprocessor based electro-magnetic protective relays would be incorporated in the electrical system design for the proposed project. The metering and instruments would be of proper accuracy class and scale dimensions.

6.2.8 ON-SITE EMERGENCY PLAN / DISASTER MANAGEMENT PLAN

The on-site emergency plan relates to the laid-down and well-practiced procedure after taking care of all design based precautionary measures for risk control. This plan is aimed for tackling any emergency situation, if arises.

Objective of the Plan The emergency plan has been prepared to ensure the smooth working of the steel plant complex. The main objectives of the plan are to take immediate actions to meet any emergency situation making maximum use of combined in-plant and allied resources for the most effective, speedy and efficient rescue and relief operations. These are briefly enumerated below:

1. Cordon and isolate the affected area for smooth rescue operation 2. Rescue and treat casualties and safeguard the rest 3. Minimize damage to persons, property and surroundings 4. Contain and ultimately bring the situation under control 5. Secure and safe rehabilitation of the affected area 6. Provide necessary information to statutory agencies 7. Provide authoritative information to the news media. 8. Ward off unsocial elements and prying onlookers. 9. Counter rumor mongering and panic by relevant accurate information.

Methodology

Keeping in mind the detailed information on the proposed steel plant, the plan is formed on the following basis: - identification of possible hazards in various units and their impact on the

surroundings - detailed information on the available resources and control measures.

EIA REPORT FOR




6.2.9 INDUSTRIAL SAFETY AND FIRE FIGHTING

As detailed above, some of the working premises of the plant have hazardous and fire-prone environment. To protect the working personnel and equipment from any damage or loss and to ensure uninterrupted production, adequate safety and fire fighting measures have been proposed for the project.

6.2.10 SAFETY OF PERSONNEL

All workmen employed in hazardous working conditions will be provided with adequate personal safety appliance as applicable to the work like;

- Industrial safety boots - Industrial helmets - Hand gloves - Ear muffs - Welder's screens and aprons - Gas masks - Respirators - Resuscitators

6.2.11 FIRE PROTECTION FACILITIES

Keeping in view the nature of fire and vulnerability of the equipment and the premises, the following fire protection facilities have been proposed for the plant. Portable Fire Extinguishers All plant units, office buildings, stores, laboratories, MCCs etc. will be provided with adequate number of portable fire extinguishers. The distribution and selection of extinguishers will be done as per IS:2190. Hydrant System Hydrants will be provided at suitable locations and in different levels inside the plant buildings. Yard hydrants will be provided in the vicinity to meet the additional requirement of water to extinguish fire. Sprinkler system for LPG, MRSS, Oil cellars also have been provided. Automatic Fire Detection System Unattended vulnerable premises like electrical control rooms, cable tunnels, MCC, oil cellars, etc. will be provided with automatic fire detection and alarm systems.

EIA REPORT FOR




Manual Call Point Systems All major units and welfare/administrative building will be provided with manual call points for summoning the fire fighting crew from the fire station for necessary assistance. Fire Station

The Fire station will be centrally located with adequate communication facilities and trained man power. There will be one central fire station with fire tenders to extend the necessary assistance required for fighting fire in any of the plant units and associate premises. The following equipment will be provided in fire station/fire posts.

- Water tender - Foam tender - Portable pump - Wireless set - Hoses

6.2.12 PLANT DISASTER CONTROL

On Site Emergency Plan will be made available considering all the different units of the proposed steel plant complex.

Organisation

A Central Disaster Control Cell will be set up under the direct charge of the GM I/c (works). He will be the person nominated to declare any major emergency and would be in-charge of all operations in such situations. In his absence, GM (HRM & Maint.) would be the in-charge. He will be supported by the other nominated members of cell, e.g., General Manager for Plant operations and service agencies, Personnel, Security, Fire and safety, Administration and Medical Officer. In case of any major emergency, the Disaster Control Cell would operate from Disaster Control Room. At the shop level, Deputy General Managers, have been nominated as Controllers who will be assisted by Manager, Shift-in-charges and trained key workers to deal with any minor emergencies arising at the shop.

Information Flow

The following guidelines will be observed by any person after noticing a gas leak, fire, etc. till help is made available from Central Disaster Control Cell or Shop level Disaster Control Cell.

- Raise alarm - Communicate to the control room about the incident/emergency. - Communicate to fire station for relief in case telephone is available otherwise try to

attract attention by any available means.

EIA REPORT FOR




- Attempts to close doors, windows or ventilators of the room to prevent any contaminated air getting in.

6.2.13.1 CENTRAL DISASTER CONTROL ROOM

Upon receiving information from any site regarding emergency, the person operating from the Disaster Control room will : - Depute a person to rush to site and assess the situation. - Inform fire, transport, safety, medical and concerned control room.

- Organise operating personnel and arrange for control over the situation.

- Keep the management informed about the gravity of the situation from time to time.

- On receiving the call, the Disaster Control room would immediately direct the different supporting service agencies as enumerated below :

- Security and Administration services : responsible for safety of the plant against trespassers, saboteurs, any crowd, information to Government authorities and in the neighbourhood (if required), provision of transport facilities, telecommunication facilities and fire service facilities.

- Safety service: responsible for implementation of safety measures at work place and occupational safety.

- Medical service: responsible for providing medical care to the injured or the affected in an event of emergency.

- Stores: responsible for providing adequate number of tools, tackles and accessories for proper emergency control.

- Preservation of evidence and taking of photographs, if necessary, for future enquiries to determine the cause and taking further preventive actions.

- Welfare: Provide food, clothes, shelter etc., as per requirements.

- Power and water supply : To ensure supply of fire fighting water requirement and provisions of power supply.

Alerted by news, all key personnel will arrive immediately at the respective reporting place during emergency.

6.2.13.2 SHOP LEVEL DISASTER CONTROL CELL The Controller at the shop level would take immediate charge of any emergency situation and would assume full responsibility regarding mobilisation of resources, guide and help service agencies in properly carrying out their assigned duties. Being from the operations side of the plant, he has full knowledge of the process aspects and he would decide whether to stop the plant/process. He will be responsible for overall co-ordination.

EIA REPORT FOR




In his absence, his Deputy would be Controller of the operations. The duties of the Shop level Controller are enumerated below:

- Assess the scale of emergency and decide, if any possibility of major emergency

exists and inform the Central Control Room, if necessary. - Direct Safe close down of plant or any operation, if necessary.

- Direct evacuation of areas in the vicinity, which may be endangered.

- Ensure key personnel are called in immediately and they start carrying out their

assigned duties.

- Direct rescue and fire fighting operations from safe operation point of view.

- Direct the shop personnel to the designated places for safe assembly.

- Control rehabilitation of affected areas and any victim on emergency.

- Ensure complete safety before restarting the plant/ operation.

At Shop floor, teams of workers will be trained, who will be present at the incident site for doing the needful. They will assist and extend help to the following :

- Fire brigade team in controlling fire.

- Operational staff in shutting down plant to make it safe.

- Search, evacuation, rescue team.

- Movement of vehicles for emergency control.

- Plant pollution monitoring staff for carrying out atmospheric tests.

- Medical team for providing necessary help.

- Any other special operation.

6.2.13.3 CONTINGENCY PLAN

It has been based on the following considerations :

- The plant general layout. - The available resources. - The analysis of hazards.

EIA REPORT FOR




And is aimed at the

- Pre-emergency activities. - Emergency time activities. - Post-emergency activities. In the event of an emergency, the people from affected pockets would be directed to move to safe assembly places nearby the units.

The following facilities will be provided.

- Security service - Fire fighting service - Medical service - Pollution control service - Public relation service - Telecommunication service - Transport service - Evacuation service - Welfare service

An alarm system will be provided with a wailing type siren at a centralised place and actuators at the strategic locations in the plant. Adequate number of telephones will be provided in each unit at Shop floor so that a person can either directly raise the alarm or ring up disaster control room from where the alarm can be raised directly. The wailing siren will mark the beginning of the emergency while a continuous note will mark the end meaning all clear signal.

All fire fighting equipment like valves, fire hydrants, pumps, monitors, etc., will be checked periodically to detect defective parts and such parts would be immediately replaced. Mock drills will be conducted for training the persons and to check the performance of men and equipment and also to keep them fit for any emergency. The plant will be equipped with a separate Medical Centre with necessary instrument/appliances, medicines and trained manpower. The Medical Officer will maintain close liaison with different hospitals in the nearby city.

6.2.13.4 RESCUE AND REPAIR SERVICES

The responsibility of effective working of Rescue and Repair Services will be with the incident controller. Rescue Services

- To extricate persons from the debris of collapsed building/structure and save human

lives. - To hand over the extricated persons to first aid parties.

EIA REPORT FOR




- To take immediate steps as may be necessary for the temporary supports or

demolition of buildings and structures, the collapse of which is likely to endanger life or obstruct traffic.

- To cut off supplies of water, gas, electricity to damaged buildings. Trained Rescue parties shall be formed at Shop levels, who will be provided with the following equipment :

1. Self contained oxygen breathing apparatus 2. Blower type gas mask 3. Resuscitators 4. Petromax lamp / Torches 5. Axe/hand saw 6. Bamboo ladder 7. Necessary Safety appliances 8. First aid box 9. Blankets

On-site emergency planning rehearsals need to be carried out from time to time. It requires monitoring by experienced persons from other similar factories or by senior officials from the State Inspectorate of Factories and/or the Directorate of Fire Services, who can help in updating the emergency plan procedure.

6.2.14 OFF-SITE EMERGENCY PLANNING

Off-s ite emergency planning is normally under the jurisdiction of the district administration. The designated offic ial of the Steel Plant is required to have co -ordination with the district administration for responsive action in off -s ite emergency planning.

6.2.15 FIRE FIGHTING ORGANISATION AND PROCEDURE

There will be trained fire fighting personnel and a Fire Officer under the Fire & Safety Department. The following important instructions will be given for fire prevention and tackling of any fire in the plant.

- Overall control of the Fire fighting operations will rest with the senior most officer

present at the scene of fire, who will be assisted by the operational and fire staff. Close co-ordination and planning for fire protection will be done between Plant Operations and Fire Service.

- While turning out for fire calls, the fire staff will be guided to the correct location

immediately on their arrival.

EIA REPORT FOR




- In-charge of the section at Shop floor will explain special risks involved and guide the In-charge of the Fire fighting crew. He will, however, not interfere in the method of fire fighting operations.

- No one would tamper with the sources of water supply/ fire hydrants or misuse

them in any manner. The passages/approach to/from fire hydrants to the fire appliances would always be kept clear.

Fire drills would be held in each, zone periodically under the direction of the Fire Officer.

The organisation and brief procedure for fighting small, major and simultaneous fire is given below :

Degree of fire

emergency Fire chief Siren code Persons

attending Small fire Major fire/Disaster Simultaneous fire BLEVE

Functional head in charge of affected area Head of the works department In-charge of affected area Head of works

No siren Double Wailings Single wailing Triple wailing

CISF/Fire On site emergency plan Persons already present at the scene of fire, operators As per on site emergency plan

Definitions :

Small fire : A fire in its incipient stage which is controlled by the first

line fire fighting team.

Major fire : The fire is spreading to other equipment or areas and which threatens to go beyond the control of first line and second line fire fighting teams.

Simultaneous fire : More than one fire occurring at the same time. Fire Control Office : The Fire Control Officer will be in-charge at the scene of

fire. In case of small fire, Section Head/ Functional Head of affected area will be fire Officer.

In major fire, Head of works will be Fire Control Officer.

EIA REPORT FOR




In simultaneous fires, in-charges of the respective affected areas will be Fire Control Officers.

Fire call : Fire call will be received at the fire station regarding

occurrence of fire and its location. The message will be conveyed either by telephone or fire alarm or in person.

While giving Fire call message on telephone, the person will - Give his name, Section & Department. - Exact location of Fire and if possible, nature of fire.

- Confirm that the Fire call message is repeated by the

Control room attendant.

When the call message is given by the Fire alarm, the person would stand rear the Fire alarm to guide the Fire fighting team to the location of the fire.

Fire Siren Code : For small fire : No siren will be sounded.

For major fire : Double Wailing For all clear : Steady siren for one minute. Fire Fighting for Small Fire

The small fire will be tackled by the first line team which would comprise of the persons already present at the scene of fire. However, the second line fire fighting team whose composition is given below will also report at the scene of fire immediately after receiving the Fire Call of affected area at the time of fire. The team will consist of the following :

Fire Control Officer First line Fire Fighting team: Operational / maintenance staff and/or other plant personnel working in the area. Second line Fire Fighting team : - Fire station shift-in-charge and trained fire fighting personnel. - Ambulance driver with ambulance. - Functional head of affected area. - Shift Officer production. - Security personnel.

EIA REPORT FOR




Third line Fire Fighting team :

- Fire Officer & Auxiliary Fire Fighting personnel. - All Departmental & Functional Heads. - Local Fire Brigade from Govt., if necessary.

Fire Fighting for Major Fire :

The major fire will be tackled by the first line, second line and the third line fire fighting teams. The fire chief in this case is the Head of works. The fire chief for small fire will judge the nature of fire and in case of major fire, he will inform Fire Officer (either himself or through responsible persons) to sound the fire sirens (double wailing type). The team will consist of the following who will immediately report at the scene of the fire. 1. Fire Officer 2. First, Second and Third line Fire Fighting team. 3. Auxiliary Fire Fighting personal

All the members of the auxiliary fire fighting crew will have thorough training on the job. Responsibilities of Fire Control Room Operator :

During fire Call :

- To take correct message regarding location, type of fire etc., from the caller. - To repeat the message.

- To inform fire fighting personnel on duty immediately for turn out by hearing the

bell.

- To ask the pump house operator to maintain adequate head in the fire water line.

- To inform Telephone Exchange.

- To inform first aid centre.

Responsibilities of Fire Fighting Personnel :

- To report immediately at the scene of fire. - To take instructions from Fire Officer.

Responsibilities of Fire Officer :

- To direct the deployment of Fire fighting personnel and fire fighting appliances.

EIA REPORT FOR




- To organise additional fire fighting crew, if required, depending upon gravity of the situation.

- To guide plant employees in fire fighting.

- To co-ordinate between different groups of fire fighting personnel & team of trained

workers from the department.

- To control the spread of fire and rescue operation, if necessary. - To extinguish the fire.

- To replenish the required fire fighting material/ equipment.

- To arrange relievers wherever necessary.

- To assess the situation and arrange additional help if necessary in co-ordination

with Disaster Control room.

- To advice for all clear siren to be blown after the major fire emergency is over.

Responsibilities of Ambulance Driver:

- To report to the scene of fire with ambulance immediately. - To carry the casualties, if any, to the medical centre as directed by Medical

Officer/Fire Officer at the earliest.

- To park the ambulance without obstructing the fire fighting operations and traffic.

Responsibilities of Security personnel at the manned gate :

- To prevent entry of unauthorized persons. - To keep the gate open for emergency vehicles and officers and staff concerned

with fire fighting and allied operations. Responsibilities of Telephone Operator :

- To receive fire call messages. - To inform Shift Officer for all fires.

Responsibilities of Medical Officer during major fire :

- To be available at the first aid centre for necessary medical advice. - To depute one of the medical staff to the scene of fire to render any medical

assistance, required at site.

EIA REPORT FOR




Responsibilities of Head of the Personnel and Welfare Department during major fire :

- To arrange the transport of the fire fighting personnel with minimum loss of time in

consultation with the Fire Control/Fire Officer. - To make arrangements for the refreshment/meals for persons engaged in fire

fighting.

- To inform the Fire Officer regarding the actions taken.

Responsibilities of Head of the Maintenance Department during major fire :

- To report to Fire Chief and render all help that may be required from Maintenance Department.

Responsibilities of Head of the Electrical Maintenance Department during major fire :

- To report to Fire Officer and render assistance to be required from Electrical

Department such as installation of equipment, provision of temporary lighting etc.

Responsibilities of Head of the Materials Procurement Department during major fire :

- To arrange to man the stores for emergency issue of materials. If the materials are

not available in the stores or are likely to be exhausted during fire fighting operations, he would arrange for the same from other sources.

6.2.16 CLOUD BURST / LIGHTNING

Cloud burst / lightning may at times lead to minor to major emergency. In such an emergency, actions indicated under fire and explosion will be undertaken.

6.2.17 FOOD POISONING

In case of food poisoning in plant canteens, the following will be done :

- Disaster Controller will inform Medical Officer for immediate first aid. - Medical Officer will contact other hospitals and seek their help, if necessary.

- Security will help in evacuating the affected people to various hospitals, in

co-ordination with the Medical Officer.

EIA REPORT FOR




6.2.18 MUTUAL-AID SYSTEM

At times the possibility of a major emergency (a situation out of control of plant authority) cannot be ruled out. In such a case, the plant authority would declare it to be a major emergency and total control would be transferred to the district level office of contingency plan committee.

Necessary help would also be sought from Government sources having necessary infrastructure for dealing with disaster.

6.3 SOCIAL IMPACT ASSESSMENT 6.3.1 Introduction

All industrial projects have social and economic linkages. Therefore, putting up a new project and/or modernization/ expansion of existing projects have impact on the socio–economic environment of the locality around it. This impact may be marginal or non–marginal. The intensity of impact may depend upon the various social and environmental factors associated with it and the extent of change caused by the project to alter the existing equilibrium of the socio – economic system. Influx of people from outside during various stages of the project may also alter the existing cultural identity of the local people. Further, there is a cash flow associated with the project which may affects the existing socio–economic activities and introduces many more new activities associated with the project to which the local people have strong adherence. M/s Uttam Galva Metallics Limited is expanding its existing plant to 1.5 MTPA at Bhugaon, Wardha, Maharashtra. The various activities of the projects are likely to stimulate the existing socio–economic environment in the surrounding area. The influx of money and various construction activities may not only change the economic status of the area but also influence the existing cultural scenario. This impact is expected to be more in the area closer to the site, which decreases with increase of distance from the site.

6.3.2 Objectives

The proposed expansion project will have a widespread impact on the social and economic conditions of the people of the region in terms of direct and indirect employment, skill diversification, infrastructure development, business development etc. On this backdrop, the present study is directed towards the following objectives :

i) To assess the impact of the project on agricultural situation; ii) To assess the impact of the project on pattern of demand; iii) To examine the impact of the project on consumption pattern; iv) To examine the employment and income effects of the project; v) To assess the impact of the project on education; vi) To ascertain the impact of the project on industrialization in the study area; vii) To examine the impact of the project on community development activities;

EIA REPORT FOR




6.3.3 Brief outline of Wardha district

A 10km radius circle centering the plant area is considered as the study area for this project. The study area falls under Wardha district of Maharashtra. Demographic pattern on the district is given in Table 6.7.

Table 6.7 : Brief on Wardha district

Item Unit Wardha Area Sq. km 6309 Population

Male Female

Rural

Urban

No 1236736 638990 597746

911695 325041

Distribution of population Male

Female Rural

Urban

% of total population

51.7 48.3 73.7 26.3

Literates No 865556 Illiterates No 371180 Literacy Rate % 80 Sex Ratio No 935 Workers

Total workers Main workers

Marginal workers Non-workers

No 550351 431330 119021 686385

Distribution of Workers

Main workers Marginal workers

Non-workers

% of total workers

35 10 55

Source : Census 2011

6.3.4 Analytical Framework Methodology The present study is carried out using different quantitative techniques suitable for explaining various objectives of the study. Major methods used as tools of analysis in this study are as given below : Regression Analysis Simple linear regression of the following type in considered and fitted to cross section data collected in course of field survey :

http://www.districts.nic.in/

EIA REPORT FOR




Yi = a + b Xi + Ui

Where, Y = Dependent variable X = Explanatory variable U is the stochastic error term having its usual properties.

The above model is fitted to data applying Ordinary Least Square (OLS) technique to obtain estimated demand and consumption functions.

Fitted regression models are used to work out i) Elasticity of demand (e), for food and non-food items with respect to disposable

income (e) in case of demand functions : e = (dY / dX).(X / Y)

ii) Marginal Propensity to Consume (MPC) from consumption function : MPC = dC / dY

In case of aspects like demographic parameters, peoples’ perception, educational status, agricultural status, methods of descriptive statistics are used. Field Survey Baseline data on socio-economic parameters such as demography, infrastructure, economic resource base, health status, cultural aspects and aesthetic attribute were generated using information available with Govt. agencies, census data, and statistical abstract and health agencies. Socio-economic survey was carried out covering all the villages of the study area to record awareness, opinion, apprehensions, quality of life and expectations of the local people about the proposed project. The opinion of local people about the proposed plan was obtained through socio-economy survey of the villages in the study area.

A brief about the sampling design adopted for the field survey is described below. The survey has been conducted through specially designed questionnaire covering every aspect of the present study. In addition to the field data, secondary data / information collected, compiled and published by different Governmental agencies / departments were also collected and utilized appropriately. Sampling For selection of respondents from the study area, Two Stage Random Sampling has been adopted. In the first stage, villages are selected and in the second stage, households/ respondents are selected. From each selected village / town, the respondents are selected randomly to account intra-village variability among the

EIA REPORT FOR




respondents for the character under study. As the variability of the characters under each strata study do not vary widely among the households, a smaller sample size is expected to represent the population. A sample of 33 respondents is drawn from the study area. The sample covers an estimated 175 persons. Composition of the Questionnaire

Households/respondents were interviewed with the structured questionnaire specifically designed for this study keeping in view the objectives of the study. The questionnaire consists of following major sections :

Demographic profile of the households Information on agricultural situation Educational status Employment (sources of employment) Income of the family (income from various sources) Information on family budget Consumption and saving Energy consumption Respondents’ perception about the project

6.3.5 Prediction of Impacts

Pattern of Demand

The survey reveals that the respondents spend major portion of their disposable income on food items. However, there has been a growing tendency among the respondents of allocating higher expenditure on non-food items although their basket of consumption have only few items other than food. To go to the details of their pattern of demand, income elasticity of demand is calculated by fitting demand functions. Table 6.8 presents the results of the regression analysis conducted for fitting the demand functions. It is observed that all the demand functions give uniformly good fits to the data because R2 in all the cases are found to be quite high. Moreover, as indicated by t-test, the relevant parameter of the demand functions is found to be statistically highly significant at 1% level. The income elasticity of demand as measured from the fitted functions is 0.33 and 0.94 for food and non-food items respectively. The inelastic nature of demand for food items indicates their necessity for these items to the households. The non-food items are found to be elastic to the income of households. This implies that for any additional income , households will expend for non-food items including luxurious goods.

EIA REPORT FOR




Table 6.8 : Demand Functions for Food and Non-food Items

Demand Function Item Regression Parameters log a b R2

Dij = a * Ybj * U

(Where, Dij = Demand for the ith item by

jth respondent. Yj= Disposable income of the jth

respondent

Food Non-Food

2.722

0.103

0.328 (6.8)*

0.943 (17.1)*

0.899

0.907

Figures in () indicate t - values and * Significant at 1% level

With the implementation of the project and development of the locality, new type of demand pattern may emerge which is likely to place more importance on consumer goods and quality products. This is not a bad impact provided considerable income is generated due to the project and sufficient income is earned by them; otherwise, if the shift is a substitution of necessary food requirements then it is not desirable in true socio-economic sense. Employment and income Effect

Direct employment

Agriculture, business, and service are major sources of income in the study area. However, unemployment is quite common in the study area. The project has employment generation potential by way of recruiting local people directly for different activities of the project, specifically at the construction phase. It is expected that substantial portion of the investment in this project will trickle down to the local people in the form of employment and income.

Indirect employment

Indirect employment and income effects of a steel plant is widespread. Income and employment opportunities generated in the ancillaries, which are likely to come in the vicinity of the steel plant, along with growth of employment in services activities are likely to be much stronger due to its multiplier effect. Besides this, increase of population in the study area as a result of the project will lead to higher demand for food. As consequence, price of food is expected to increase. It is expected that the project may bring infrastructure development in the study area which may multiply in employment generation many fold. Hence, the project is expected to generate substantial indirect employment in other sectors. Overall assessment of the employment and income effects indicates that the project has strong positive direct as well as indirect impact on employment and income generation.

EIA REPORT FOR




Consumption Behaviour

Table 6.9 presents the source-wise distribution of average family consumption. It is observed that the major portion of total consumption expenditure goes to meet the need for food (50%). The consumption expenditure on clothing is second highest (16%). Average expenditure on medical purposes is 5%. About 27% of total consumption expenditure goes to meet the other social requirements. Expenditure on education in the study area is observed to be low.

Table 6.9: Source-wise Distribution of Family Consumption

Item Food Education Clothing Medical Others Total Consumption (Rs/yr) Distribution in total (%)

17067

49.7

1064

3.1

5331

15..5

1768

5.1

9136

26.6

34367

100.0 To investigate the consumption behaviour of the respondents in detail, Marginal Propensity to Consume (MPC) is calculated by fitting the consumption function. The results of the regression analysis performed for fitting the consumption function are presented in Table 6.10. It is observed that the function gave uniformly good fit to data because R2 is high and parameters are also found to be statistically significant at 1% level. The MPC worked out on the basis of the fitted consumption function is 0.52. Table 6.10 : Fitted Consumption Function

Demand Function Regression parameters a b R2

Cj = a + b Yj + Uj where, Cj = Consumption of the jth respondent Yj = Gross income of the jth respondent

11621.2

0.521 (8.2)*

0.884

Figures in ( ) indicate t - values and * Significant at 1% level.

The multiplier effect of investment on the people of the study area has been worked out by using the following model:

Consider the consumption behaviour of the respondents closely follow the following type of consumption function:

C = a + bY (1)

We know that, in equilibrium

Y = C + I (2)

EIA REPORT FOR




where, Y = Gross income, C = Consumption & I = Investment

Putting (1) in (2) one gets,

Y = a + bY + I

=> Y = ( 1 / (1-b) * [ a +I ] (3)

where, 1 / (1-b) is the multiplier.

Assuming that consumption behaviour of the people in the study area closely follow this fitted consumption function, one can easily see that existing size of the multiplier is 2.1. Hence, investment on this project and the consequent generation of additional income will have multiplier effect in raising average consumption.

The proposed project is going to have positive income effect and consequently, the multiplier effect is expected to lead to an overall increase in average consumption of the people of the study area. Therefore, one can conclude that the impact of the project on consumption behaviour of the local people is likely to be satisfactory and positive. Educational Status The existing educational status of members of the households is presented in Table 6.11. From the table it is clear that 40% of the members have education at primary level and middle school level taken together. People up to the high school and intermediate level are about 21% and 11% respectively of total population. It is worth noting that the graduation level people are of the order of around 10%. The survey further reveals that about 18% of the members are illiterate. As reported by the respondents, their thrust towards education has been increasing due to the lure of getting jobs specially in the non-agricultural sources. The project is expected to increase such aspirations by bringing opportunities of some direct & indirect employment for the local people. The general awareness towards the importance of education is expected to increase as a result of the new project and hence, it can be said that the project will have positive impact on the level of education of the people of the study area.

Table 6.11 : Educational Status in the Study Area

Education Level No Distribution (%) Illiterate * 31 17.7 Primary schooling 40 22.9 Middle schooling 30 17.1 High Schooling 37 21.1 Intermediate 20 11.4 Graduation 17 9.7

Total 175 100.0 * Includes children below 6 yrs also.

EIA REPORT FOR




Industrialisation Around the Project

Steel plants by nature serve as the nuclei for development of small-scale industries in the areas around them. These small-scale units usually have input-output linkages with the steel plants. The demand for spares, assemblies and sub-assemblies by steel plants are generally met through the supply (of these items) from small-scale units located nearly. The small-scale units, in turn, get necessary steel products from the steel plants. The advantages to steel plants as well as small-scale units are listed below:

Advantages to the proposed plant

Assurance of a reliable source of supply of spares and consumables; Supply on short-delivery schedules enabling maintenance of lower inventory; Saving foreign exchange through import substitution; Lower freight element in comparison to materials supplied by firm located far away; Better service facilities etc.

Advantages to Small Scale Units

Availability of ready market; Availability of raw material source for steel/by-product consuming industries; Getting price preference over distant suppliers; Availability of facilities from government; Availability of infrastructure support from the steel plant etc.

Proper utilisation of these mutual advantages is likely to play a catalytic role in the development of the region around the plant.

The small scale industries that are likely to come in the vicinity of the plant can be grouped into major three categories -- spares, metal based and chemical based, besides the service units. These are complemented by the service units. The present project is likely to accelerate such industrialization through “Bubble Effects” in the study area. It is important to note that the small scale units are usually labour-intensive and high-priority industries from social point of view.

The proposed project is expected to serve as centre of significant small-scale industrial economy around it complemented by the services sector. This is expected to play a major role in the future economic and social development of this area.

6.3.6 Conclusions

On the basis of the overall results of the present impact assessment the following conclusions are drawn:

i) The project is not going to cause any damage to the existing agricultural situation.

Instead, it is likely to provide the farmers with non-farm income.

EIA REPORT FOR




ii) The project is going to foster the change in pattern of demand among people of the study area by way of shift from food items to non-food items.

iii) The project has strong positive effect on average consumption in the study area,

which is likely to lead to increase in average income through multiplier effect.

iv) The project has very strong positive employment and income effects, both direct as well as indirect.

v) There is a possibility of increase in industrialisation in the vicinity of the project.

This is likely to bring more skill diversification among local people.

vi) The project has positive impact on educational status of people of the study area.

vii) Community development activities due to the proposed project will further boost the socio-economic condition.

6.3.7 Corporate Social Responsibility

Corporate Social Responsibility (CSR) is a form of corporate self-regulation integrated into a business model. CSR refers to strategies of corporations or firms to conduct their business in a way that is ethical, society friendly and beneficial to community in terms of development. CSR is the deliberate inclusion of public interest into corporate decision-making, and the honoring of a triple bottom line: People, Planet, Profit. Community Development (CD) refers to initiatives undertaken by community with partnership with external organizations or corporation to empower individuals and groups of people by providing these groups with the skills they need to effect change in their own communities. These skills are often concentrated around making use of local resources and building political power through the formation of large social groups working for a common agenda. The role of CSR in CD is any direct and indirect benefits received by the community as results of social commitment of corporations to the overall community and social system. The common roles of CSR in CD are as follows:

To share the negative consequences as a result of industrialization. Closer ties between corporations and community. Helping to get local talents as an attractive employer for potential candidates.

Community development activities (including that for its employees) are very important aspects for any organization like UVSL. UVSL will be implementing a large number of social development activities under its CSR. UVSL’s social initiatives are as follows :

Education Women empowerment

EIA REPORT FOR




Vocational training Health Environment Infrastructure development Sports Art, culture and heritage

UVSL is committed to community development around the steel plant. It has an ambitious plan to adopt Bhugaon, Barbadi, Chitoda, Inzapur and Selookate for community development. In addition to above, need based assessment was carried out in the study area during socio-economic survey which can help in upliftment of poor section of society and is consistent with the traditional skills of the people. The following needs were identified and a substantial amount has been allocated and being implemented for the activities for the social up-liftment of surrounding villages : Provision of distribution of school bag, sweater, note books in surrounding villages Provision of street light in the surrounding villages Construction of cement road in the surrounding villages Free medical check up and medicines to peripheral villagers Scholarship to meritorious students of surrounding villages Drinking water facilities with over head tanks & filter in Barbadi school Construction of compound wall of Barbadi school Plantation of trees with guard for peripheral villages The main occupation of the people at present is agriculture and allied activities. The agriculture is only during the rainy season. The infrastructure development is not enough to sustain the potential growth. The need is felt for round the year water supply from an assured surface source which is the basic need to achieve expected development. In spite of ample rainfall, the region is short of drinking water in summer. Just after rainy season is over, most of the rivers become dry. It is, therefore, need of the time to take up the ambitious water supply project for Wardha District . It is proposed to keep provision for training of women folks (sewing, stitching etc) of surrounding villages for their economic up-liftment. The CSR activities which are sponsored by UGML is indicated along with action plan and budgetary allocation in given below:

EIA REPORT FOR




PROVISIONAL ACTION PLAN AND BUDGETARY ALLOCATION FOR CSR ACTIVITES

Sl. No. Activity and Implementation target

Capital cost in

(RsCrores)

Recurring cost in (Rs. Crores)

/annum A. Water

1. Provision of potable drinking water supply in nearby villages through wells, hand pumps, tankers etc.

24.00 2.50

2. Awareness campaigns for water borne diseases, sanitation and hygiene 1.00 0.60

Sub total 25.00 3.10 B. Health 1. Mobile Clinic with testing and diagnostic facilities 5.00 1.00

2. Up gradation of local PHC with equipments and infrastructure and medicines 2.50 0.50

3. Partnership with Govt. for National Health Programs like Polio, TB, Malaria etc. 2.50 0.50

4. Health Camps for Family Planning, HIV/AIDS and other communicable diseases 3.00 0.65

5. Addressing local health related issues through audio visuals and group meetings 3.00 0.65

6. Subsidized treatment in hospital with which tie-up will be there 3.00 0.65

7. Specific Programs for hygiene and sanitation 3.00 0.45 Sub total 22.00 4.40 C. Education 1. Providing free ITI training - 2.50

2. Augmentation of infrastructure and equipments, furniture, blackboard, toilets etc. in villages schools

5.00 1.50

3. Scholarship to meritorious students - 1.00 4. School wall boundary maintenance - 1.00

5. Existing govt. school strengthening by boundary wall construction, construction of toilets, roof repair, drinking water taps, etc

25.00 4.25

Sub total 30.00 10.25 D. Physically Challenged

1. Helping aids to each category of physically challenged as per requirement. 3.00 0.50

2. Eye camps to address the issue of cataracts specially 3.00 0.75

Sub total 6.00 1.25

EIA REPORT FOR




Sl. No. Activity and Implementation target

Capital cost in

(RsCrores)

Recurring cost in (Rs. Crores)

/annum E. Capacity Building 1. Scholarship for ITI training - 1.50 2. Short term courses for skill up gradation 2.50 0.50

3. Vocational training (dairy, poultry, bee keeping, sericulture) 2.50 0.50

4. Specific programs for Ladies (stitching, embroidery, tailoring etc.) 2.50 0.50

Sub total 7.50 3.00 F. Vulnerable Persons 1. Pensions to vulnerable (Elderly / Widows etc.) - 1.50 2. Gainful engagement on priority - 1.50 Sub total - 3.00 G. Infrastructure

3.

Construction of roads, drainage, community halls, school buildings, health centers, street lighting, equipment to education institutions, public utilities, sanitation facilities, etc. in nearby area.

55.00 10.00

Sub total 55.00 10.00 H. Sports and Culture 1. Regular Rural Sports - 2.50 2. Facilitation / Sponsorship to local talent - 2.50 3. Promotion of local festivals - 1.50

4. Participation of local community in national festivals - 1.50

5. Preservation of culture and heritage - 1.50 Sub total - 9.50 GRAND TOTAL 145.50 44.50

The above table is a broad description of CSR activities which will be spread over a span of 10 years depends upon the urgency & benefit of the society and shall be fine-tuned on yearly basis. However in overall commitment to CSR will remain same as mentioned in the TOR granted by MoEF to the Project.

6.3.8 Flood Hazards The Wardha is the most important river in the district. It rises in the Multai plateau of the Satpura ranges and flows all along the northern and western boundaries of the district. The other important river in the district is the Venna, which flows from adjoining Nagpur district to the Hinganghat tahsil to merge with the Wardha river. Yashoda, Venna and Bakli are the main tributaries of the Wardha river.

EIA REPORT FOR




Other rivers in the district are Pothra, Bor, Dhom and Kar, which remain generally dry during the summer but turn into furious torrents during the rainy season and pose a threat of flood to nearby villages. The overall drainage pattern is dendritic to sub-dendritic. There are in all 39 watersheds ; the entire district s included in the Wardha river sub-basin of the Godavari Basin. There is no major dam in the district. The flood hazard map of India is enclosed. It can be seen that the project site is not falling under area liable to floods. According to the district administration, the probability of disaster occurrence and the possible intensity of disasters, based on the earlier history is given below.

Damage Earthquake Floods Cyclones Epidemics Industrial and

Chemical Accidents

Fires Road Accidents

Loss of Lives Low Low - Low Low Low Low Injuries Low Low - Nil High High High Damage to and Destruction of Property

Low High - Nil Medium Low Nil

Damage to cattle and livestock

Low Medium - Nil Nil Nil Low

Damage to subsistence and crops

Low High - Nil Nil High Nil

Disruption of life style

Low Low - Nil Nil Low Nil

Disruption of community life

Low Medium - Low Nil Low Nil

Loss of Livelihood

Low Medium - Low Low Low Low

Disruption of services

Low Medium - Low Low Low Low

Damage to infrastructure and/or disruption of government systems

Low Medium - - Low Low Low

Impact on National Economy

Low Low - - Low Low Low

Social and Psychological after-effects

Low Low - - Low Low Low

EIA REPORT FOR




Fig 6.1 : Flood Hazard Map of India

EIA REPORT FOR




6.3.9 Seismicity in Project Area The project area falls in Zone II of Bureau of Indian Standards (BIS) seismic zone. Zone II is a Low Damage Risk Zone, in which the maximum expected intensity is VI (MSK). BIS is the official agency for publishing seismic hazard maps and codes in India. According to the above Map, India has been divided into five seismic zones as given below. Wardha and its surrounding area are situated on the fringe of hard rock formation.

Seismic zones of India with seismic intensity

Seismic Zones of India Maximum Intensity on Modified Mercalli Scale:

Intensity in MSK Zone V IX or more Zone IV VIII Zone III VII Zone II VI

Zone V is the most vulnerable to earthquakes, where historically some of the country's most powerful shock has occurred whereas Zone II is a low damage risk zone.

EIA REPORT FOR




Fig 6.2 : Seismic Map of India

EIA REPORT FOR




7.0 PROJECT BENEFITS 7.1 INTRODUCTION

The development of industrial projects plays a key role in the economic growth of any country. The growth of the steel industry significantly contributes to economic growth as it generates employment both directly and also due to development of downstream industries. Peripheral development takes place and due to more influx of money through the area, overall importance of the area increases and overall the infrastructure improves.

7.2 EMPLOYMENT POTENTIAL 7.2.1 Skilled and Semi-skilled

Skilled and Semi-skilled employment potential in terms of indirect employment of the area will be non-marginal and will usually remain widespread across a long region. As the proposed project takes place indirect employment is likely to grow further. The project is expected to generate substantial indirect employment in other sectors such as metal-based industries, chemical-based industries, small rolling units, scrap dealing units, service units etc. Overall assessment of the employment and income effects indicates that the project has strong positive direct as well as indirect impact on employment and income generation of the area.

7.2.2 Un-skilled

Unemployment for un-skilled workers is quite common in the study area. The proposed project has employment generation potential by way of recruiting local people directly for different activities of the project, specifically at the construction phase. It is expected that substantial portion of the investment in this project will trickle down to the local people in the form of employment and income.

7.3 OTHER TANGIBLE BENEFITS 7.3.1 Education

The local peoples’ interest towards education will increase due to the expectation of getting jobs, especially from non-agricultural sources such as the industries in the area.

The project is expected to increase such aspirations by bringing opportunities of some direct & indirect employment for the local people.

The general awareness towards the importance of education is expected to increase as a result of the new project.

The project will have positive impact on the level of education of the people of the study area.

EIA REPORT FOR




7.3.2 Industrialisation Around the Project

Steel plants by nature serve as the nuclei for development of small-scale industries in the areas around them. These small-scale units usually have input-output linkages with the steel plants. The demand for spares, assemblies and sub-assemblies by steel plants are generally met through the supply (of these items) from small-scale units located nearby.

The present project is likely to accelerate such industrialization through “Bubble Effects” in the study area. It is important to note that the small-scale units are usually labour-intensive and high-priority industries from social point of view.

The proposed project is expected to serve as centre of significant small-scale industrial economy around it complemented by the services sector. This is expected to play a major role in the future economic and social development of this area.

7.3.3 Pattern of Demand

As indicated in Chapter 6, the questionnaire survey reveals that the respondents spend major portion of their disposable income on food items. However, the respondents are heavily influenced by the changing demand pattern of fast growing Indian consumer society. There has been a tendency among the respondents of allocating higher expenditure on non-food items although their basket of consumption has only few items other than food.

With the implementation of the project and development of the locality, existing demand pattern is likely to continue which indicates more importance on consumer goods and quality products. This will increase the local consumer goods market, thus creating more income opportunities to the local people.

7.3.4 Consumption Behaviour

The proposed project is going to have positive income effect and consequently, the multiplier effect is expected to lead to an overall increase in average consumption of the people of the study area

7.3.5 Revenue to Govt.

The project will contribute huge amount of money to Government in terms of taxes and duties which will be utilized for various social developments.

EIA REPORT FOR




8.0 ENVIRONMENTAL MANAGEMENT PLAN (EMP) : ADMINISTRATIVE ASPECTS 8.1 ORGANIZATION POLICY

The importance of environmental control has been recognised by project proponent and it has taken necessary steps to identify and control pollution in the plant, respond to impacts on its own captive population and also in the peripheral areas. “Environment Management” is one of the thrust areas of operation. It has already adopted a two-pronged strategy to abate pollution, as follows: Installation of new state of art pollution control equipment at the design stage itself. By developing a very strong monitoring/analysis and inspection setup for compliance. The above objective has been intended to be achieved through the following:

i) Improvement in the quality of raw materials. ii) Using automation & Computer control to have improvement on technology and

on working condition, iii) Pollution Monitoring and Control, iv) Implementation of occupational health set up including regular medical

monitoring of employees, v) A well developed safety management system, vi) Preparation of Emergency/Disaster Control plan and a properly trained group to

meet the emergency situations, vii) Green belt development inside the plant and township. viii) Development of awareness in employees and public including student population

towards environmental preservation, ix) R & D activities in regard to specific pollution problems.

Project proponent has given maximum importance for adopting latest technologies for keeping the pollution to minimum levels. A separate Environment Management Department will be set up with an Environmental Laboratory with latest monitoring instruments.

8.2 IMPLEMENTATION OF MITIGATIVE MEASURES

Mitigative measures for air, water & noise pollution control, solid /hazardous waste management have already been envisaged in the expansion project. Various proposed mitigation measures are given in Clause 4.1.4 (Impact & mitigation measures during operation phase). Environmental mitigation measures are also a part of equipment and will be commissioned along with the main equipment. Also, critical emission parameters have been covered under the performance guarantee clause so that to ensure compliance.

EIA REPORT FOR




8.3 ORGANISATIONAL SET UP 8.3.1 Administrative Set Up

A senior officer, of the rank of General Manager will be the head of the EMD. In his day to day work he is assisted by two Sr. Managers / AGMS. GM (EMD) reports to the Executive Director (ED)/ Director (Incharge). The organizational chart of EMD (proposed setup) is given in Fig. 8.1. A laboratory have been proposed to carry out the environmental monitoring and surveillance programme of the plant.

SR. ENVIRONMENT SCIENTIST-ENV.LAB

Fig. 8.1: Organisation Chart ( Proposed) of Environment Management Department

8.3.2 Laboratory Set Up A well-equipped environmental laboratory will be set up inside the plant premises. All the personnel deployed in the laboratory will be given training to carry out necessary environmental monitoring as well as analysis also. The requirement of equipments for carrying out environmental monitoring and frequency of the use of different equipments (as required for the environmental requirements of proposed plant) are given in Table 8.1.

GM (EMD)

SR. MANAGER / AGM SR.MANAGER/AGM (SE&FS)

MANAGER DY. MANAGER

JR. MANAGER JR. MANAGER

TECHNICIAN

EXECUTIVE DIRECTOR / DIRECTOR (I/C)

TECHNICIAN

SR.ENVIRONMENT SCIENTIST-ENV. LAB

ANALYTICAL CHEMIST - 4

EIA REPORT FOR




Table 8.1: Monitoring / Analytical Equipments / Usage for proposed plant

SN. Monitoring Equipments Parameter / Function

Frequency Ambient air Fugitive Emission

Stack Gas Source

Emission Equipments Nos.

Required Air Monitoring 1. Respirable Dust Sampler

(RDS) 3 NOX

PM 10 PM 2.5 SO2

Twice in a week

Yes Yes Yes Yes

2. Online AAQ Monitoring Stations

2 PM 10 & PM 2.5 Continuous Yes No

3. Sound Level Meter 2 Noise level Twice in a week

Yes

4. Stack Monitoring Kit (Manually Operated)

1 PM All stack twice in a month

No Yes

5. Online Stack Monitoring Set

5 Particulate Matter (PM)

Continuous No Yes

6. Flue Gas Analyser 1 O2% CO% SO2 mg/m3 NOX mg/m3 NO mg/m3 CXHY PPM Ambient temp

Once in a month for coke oven battery stacks

No Yes

7. Automatic Weather Monitoring Station

1 Meteorological parameters

Continuous - -

Water Monitoring 8. Hot Air Oven 1 Moisture

content & drying of samples glassware

Regularly - -

9. Hot Plate 2 O&G Iron & various purpose like boiling & digestion of sample

Regularly - -

10. Muffle Furnace 1 Digestion at higher temp, up to 1000°C

As and when required

- -

11. BOD Incubator 1 BOD Twice in a week

- -

12. BOD Apparatus 1 BOD Twice in a week

- -

13. DO Meter 1 BOD As and when required

- -

14. Spectrophotometer with Digestion, Assembly

1 COD, Phenol NO3 – N PO4 - P

Daily - -

EIA REPORT FOR




SN. Monitoring Equipments Parameter / Function

Frequency Ambient air Fugitive Emission

Stack Gas Source

Emission Equipments Nos.

Required 15. pH meter 2 pH Daily - - 16. Conductivity Meter 1 TDS Daily 17. Orion 10 W Analyser 1 NH3, CN, F Daily - - 18. AAS 1 Heavy metals As and when

required - -

19. Analytical / Digital Balance 1 Weighing Daily - - 20. Filtration Apparatus 1 SS / MLSS Daily - - 21. Heating mental 2 Distillation Daily - - 22. Refrigerator 1 Preservation of

chemicals and samples

Regularly - -

23. Fuming Cupboard 1 For exhaust As and when required

- -

24. Water Bath 1 Evaporation of sample

As when required

- -

25. Auto Titrator 1 Hardness alkalinity etc.


- -

26. Turbidity Meter 1 Turbidity As and when required

- -

27. Autoclave 1 Microbiology test


- -

28. Bacteriological Incubator 1 Faecal coli form, total coli form, E. coli cell count etc.


- -

8.3.3 Functioning

Environmental monitoring programme and its reporting has been designed to provide a close watch on the surrounding natural environment and provide early warnings of any adverse changes that may be related to some dimension of the plant’s operations. A separate department "Environmental Management Department" (EMD) will be formed for environmental monitoring of the plant and for development and maintenance jobs like drainage, settling tanks etc. assistance from the Projects, Civil engineering department are taken. EMD will be functioning in the plant to look after all environmental aspects, carry out day to day environmental monitoring / inspection requirements and maintain records. Part of the environmental monitoring programme is carried out through external agencies on a part time basis. However, casual labourers etc. is employed for plantation, drain cleaning etc as and when required.

The EMD carries out complete Air Monitoring, Noise Level Monitoring, Special monitoring on water and air, effluent, special surveys, solid waste management etc. Safety management & Occupational health aspects will be dealt by Safety Engineering

EIA REPORT FOR




& Fire Services / Factory Medical Officer (FMO). Green belt development aspects will be dealt by horticulture department. Community welfare & peripheral development aspects will be dealt by Personnel Department. The officers of EMD shall frequently analyse the data and periodically assess the progress of the EMP.

8.4 IMPLEMENTATION ARRANGEMENT 8.4.1 Institutional Implementation Arrangements

The proposed plant will be responsible for implementation of all the mitigation and management measures suggested in Environmental Monitoring Programme. A separate department "Environmental Management Department" (EMD) will be formed to look after all environmental related matters of the plant. In addition higher Management will also monitor the smooth implementation of Environment Management Plan. The in-charge of EMD (General Manager) will report all the environmental matters to higher management as per the reporting schedule on prescribed formats. The higher management will supervise the reported activity from time to time for smooth implementation of Environmental Mitigation and Management measures and will take necessary actions, if required. For successful implementation of the environmental management plan other agencies of the State may also be involved, if required (for regulatory requirement or technical support). The coordinating agencies, which may be involved for specific environmental related activities, are given in Table 8.2. Table 8.2: List of Coordinating Agencies, which may be involved for specific

Environmental Activities

State Level Agency SFD MPCB DOH SC Chairman Chief Engineer Chief Engineer

District Level DFO D.E.E Ex. Engr. Ex.Engr. Project Area: Plantation Programme Study Area: Air, noise, water quality, waste water discharge quality monitoring.

Project Area: Stack monitoring, work-zone air, work-zone noise, effluents from outlet of effluent treatment plants, fugitive emissions

Project Area: Solid / Hazardous Waste Utilisation & Dumping

Project Area: Human Health Study Area / Project Area Interface: Road safety measures

Index: SFD – State Forest Department MPCB – Maharashtra Pollution Control Board DOH – Department of Health WC – Wardha Corporation DFO – District Forest Officer

DEE – District Environmental Engineer

EIA REPORT FOR




Local NGOs will also be identified at the district and block level to provide help and advice for implementation of EMP especially on matters related to community development programmes.

8.4.2 Co-ordination with Other Departments The Environment Management Department (EMD) also co-ordinates with other departments like Occupational Health, Safety Management, Project Engineering, Horticulture, CSR, Town administration, Water Supply Department etc. and also do the liaison work with external agencies like State & Central Pollution Control Boards and Environment Management Division (EMD), Corporate Office.

8.4.3 Interaction with State Pollution Control Board /CPCB / MoEF EMD shall be in regular touch with MPCB and shall send them monthly progress reports in the prescribed format, as per the prevailing practice. Any new regulations considered by State/Central Pollution Control Board for the Industry shall be taken care of by EMD of the plant. Also, half yearly compliance reports will be sent to MoEF as per the guidelines in the prescribed format.

8.4.4 Training The EMD, who would be responsible for the implementation of the EMP, needs to be trained on the effective implementation of the environmental issues. To ensure the success of the implementation set up proposed, there is a high requirement of training and skill up-gradation. For the proposed project, training facilities will be developed for environmental control. For proper implementation of the EMP, the officials responsible for EMP implementation will be trained accordingly. To achieve the overall objective of pollution control it is essential not only to provide latest pollution control and monitoring systems but also to provide trained man power resources to operate and maintain the same. So far, the practice with many plants is to utilize the plant operations and maintenance crew for operation of systems. This has shown adverse results due to lack of specialized knowledge in addition to priority selection. Therefore apart from the EMD, specific training will be provided to personnel handling the operation and maintenance of different pollution control equipments. In-plant training facilities will be developed for environmental control. Specialised courses at various Research / Educational institutes will be organised. The training will be given to employees to cover the following fields:

Awareness of pollution control and environmental protection to all. Operation and maintenance of specialised pollution control equipment. Field monitoring, maintenance and calibration of pollution monitoring instruments. Laboratory testing of pollutants. Repair of pollution monitoring instruments.

EIA REPORT FOR




Occupational health/safety. Environmental management. Afforestation / plantation and post care of plants. Knowledge of norms, regulations and procedures. Risk assessment and Disaster Management.

8.5 ENVIRONMENTAL AUDITING

The proposed project will be audited by third party after commissioning in phases. This will help in identifying any non-compliance through structured internal /external audits in the area of environment and occupational safety & health areas and to take corrective action.

8.6 WATER AND ENERGY CONSERVATION MEASURES

Rain water harvesting measures will be implemented for the proposed project to reuse the rain water or to recharge the ground water as part of water conservation measures. Proper functioning of the systems provided will be ensured by regular monitoring. Energy conservation measures as per the design plan will be implemented so as to bring energy saving and also possible CDM benefits. This will include providing VVVF drives for higher capacity motors, CFL lamps etc.

8.7 OTHER MEASURES

The following activities will be carried out in a structured way for the benefit of the surrounding people through close co-ordination with Personnel Department: Improvement of social infrastructure through CSR activities like school buildings,

drinking water facilities, street lights, roads, sanitary facilities etc. Community education & training Medical welfare Sports activities

EIA REPORT FOR



© 2015MECON Limited. All rights reserved 9 - 1

9.0 SUMMARY AND CONCLUSION In the design phase of the project, Environmental Impact Assessment (EIA) was done to assess the possible impacts of the proposed plant. In the plant design itself latest state of art technology has been envisaged so as to achieve the desired air emissions and noise levels from plant operation levels and the effluent quality at the outlet below statutory norms. Further, maximum re-use and re-utilisation of generated solid waste has been envisaged.

Primary and secondary data were used to assess the environmental impacts of the proposed project. The potential environmental impacts were assessed in a comprehensive manner. All the potential environmental impacts associated with different phases (i.e, during design or pre-construction, construction and operation) of the Project were assessed.

The EIA report has thoroughly assessed all the potential environmental impacts associated with the project. The environmental impacts identified by the study are manageable. The implementation of environmental mitigation measurers recommended in the report will bring the anticipated impacts to minimum.

Site specific and practically suitable mitigation measures are recommended to mitigate the impacts. Further, a suitable monitoring plan has been designed to monitor the effectiveness of envisaged mitigation measures during the operation phase.

The introduction of state of art technology (including the technological mitigation measures) during the design has limited the environmental impacts related with the Project. The implementation and monitoring of effectiveness of the environmental mitigation measures during the operation phase will be assigned to the Environmental Control Department. An Environmental Management Unit, comprising of senior management level officers will periodically assess and monitor the implementation of mitigation measures, and will tackle the management bottle necks of implementation of mitigation measures and environmental monitoring programme.

EIA REPORT FOR




10.0 DISCLOSURE OF CONSULTANTS (MECON LIMITED)

MECON LIMITED is a Public Sector Undertaking under Ministry of Steel, Government of India, as one of the leading design, engineering and consultancy organizations, with extensive in house and overseas experience. MECON has wide exposure and infrastructure for carrying out detailed design engineering, consultancy and site services or any other technical services for various sectors but predominantly in steel. MECON’s services include the whole range of work relating to setting up of projects in the field of infrastructure, power, metallurgy both ferrous & non- ferrous, chemicals/ petrochemicals and allied engineering complexes including specialized fields such as hydro engineering, sewerage scheme, sewage treatment, industrial effluent treatment, solid waste disposal including municipal waste disposal system, ports, defense projects, mints/ currency note presses, environmental engineering, system engineering, etc. Because of being under Ministry of Steel MECON has wide exposure in providing engineering and consultancy services for the steel sector in India and abroad. MECON was involved in the planning stage of a large number of important steel plants in India. MECON is registered with World Bank, ADB, EBRD, African Development Bank, UNIDO, etc. MECON has collaboration agreements with the leading firms from USA, Germany, France, Italy, erstwhile U.S.S.R etc. in various fields and possesses process know-how & intend to make alliances & agreements to pool up and offer the best resources as may be available for specific requirement. MECON is the first engineering & consultancy organization in the country to be accredited with ISO: 9001 by RW TUV of Germany in the field of design, engineering, consultancy, contracting & supplying, inspection and project management services.

MECON’s Engineering Resources MECON has a large set up with about 1700 strong workforce, of which about 1100 are graduate/ postgraduate engineers and technical staff in about 30 technical disciplines. We possess our own in-house mainframe computer and host of LANS, mini computers, PCs, latest facilities of CAD/ CAM and other design & engineering aids. MECON is equipped with laboratories including electro-technological laboratory (ETL), environmental laboratory and R & D laboratory and E-Mail connectivity through VSAT of NICNET. With head office at Ranchi; and engineering offices at Bangalore & Delhi, 35 project site offices and liaison offices spread all over the country including Kolkata, Delhi, Chennai & Mumbai. MECON can assist very effectively in executing projects.

10.1 PROFILE OF CONSULTANT

MECON's services include the whole range of work relating to setting up of industrial projects in the field of power, metallurgy, ferrous and non-ferrous, chemicals/petrochemical and allied engineering complexes including specialised fields, such as, Defence Projects, mints/currency note presses, Environmental

EIA REPORT FOR




Engineering, Systems Engineering, etc. MECON has an established track record of providing its expertise in the area of design, engineering, supply, inspection, project management, construction management, construction supervision, testing and commissioning services for large industrial projects in India and abroad.

MECON’s consultancy services in the field of Environmental Engineering & Management includes but not limited to Project Specific EIA/EMP study, Regional EIA Study, ISO:14000 Consultancy, Environmental Audit, Ground water contamination study, Preparation of industry specific norms for CPCB, ETP/STP/Tailing disposal (FR/DPR/DE/Turnkey execution), Socio-Economic study, Rehabilitation & Resettlement study, Environmental Baseline data generation, Environmentally compatible land use zoning, Air Pollution (Dust Suppression & Dust Extraction Systems) /Water Management, Ecological study (Terrestrial & Aquatic/Marine), Effluent Treatment Plant, Sewage Treatment Plant and Rainwater Harvesting. All these proposals have received Environmental Clearance from MoEF.

MECON’s Environmental Engineering Division is a multi-disciplinary group of 30 engineers, specialists and scientists whose services are backed up by a sophisticated Environmental Engineering Laboratory. MECON has been accredited for 16 sectors and 11 functional areas. All EIA coordinators and Functional area experts are in-house experts of MECON. Certificate of NABET is enclosed at the end of the chapter. Details of the sectors and of the Functional Area Experts of MECON working in Environmental area are given below: Details of sectors accorded to MECON under the QCI-NABET scheme for accreditation of EIA consultant organization

Sr. No.

Name of the Sector Category

1. Mining of minerals including Opencast / Underground mining A 2. Only offshore oil and gas exploration, development & Production A 3. River Valley, hydel, drainage and Irrigation projects A 4. Thermal Power Plants A 5. Coal washers A 6. Mineral beneficiation including pelletization A 7. Metallurgical industries (ferrous & non ferrous) – both primary and

secondary A

8. Cement Plants A 9. Coke Oven Plants A 10. Induction / arc furnaces / cupola furnaces / submerged arc furnace / B

EIA REPORT FOR




Sr. No.

Name of the Sector Category

crucible furnace / re-heating furnace of capacity more than 5 Tonne per heat

11. Oil & gas transportation pipeline (crude and refinery / petrochemical products), passing through national parks / sanctuaries / coral reefs / ecologically sensitive areas including LNG terminal

A

12. All ship breaking yards including ship breaking units A 13. Industrial estates / parks / complexes / areas export processing

Zones (EPZs), Special Economic Zones (SEZs), Biotech Parks, Leather Complexes

A

14. Ports, harbours, jetties, marine terminals, break waters and dredging

A

15. Highways, railways, transport terminals, mass rapid transport systems

A

16. Common Municipal Solid Waste Management Facilities (CMSWMF) B Brief description of the Functional Area Experts of MECON working in the field of Environment Sr. No. Functional Area Approved Category

1. Noise A 2. Land Use A 3. Solid Waste and Hazardous Waste Management A 4. Water Pollution Prevention, Control & Prediction of Impacts A 5. Risk Assessment & hazard Management A 6. Ecology and Biodiversity A 7. Meteorology, Air Quality Modeling & prediction A 8. Hydrology, Ground Water & Water Conservation A 9. Socio-Economics A 10. Air Pollution Prevention, Monitoring & Control A 11. Geology A

MECON’s Environmental Engineering Division is well equipped with various computerized predictive tools required for carrying out Environmental studies.

EIA REPORT FOR




List of Computer models for Environmental Studies

Developed In house

Multisource Dispersion Model based on Gaussian Model

Screening Model to determine Max. GLC at most unfavorable meteorological condition

Determination of Atmospheric stability

Noise Propagation Model

Coastal Zone Dispersion Model

Model for preparation of Wind Rose Procured from outside

USEPA approved models Industrial Source Complex Short Term (ISCST)

AEROMOD for Air Quality prediction

Industrial Point Source Complex Long Term (ISCLT)

Multiple Point Source Model With Terrain Adjustments (MPTER) Fugitive Dust Model (FDM)

Qual 2E River Model

CALINE – 3 (Highway Model) Complex Terrain Dispersion Model (CTDM PLUS)

Groundwater Modeling System (GMS)

Surface Water Modeling System (SMS)

Watershed Modeling System (WMS)

Green Belt Model

Phase Model for Risk Assessment

Environmental division has a sophisticated environmental engineering laboratory equipped with modern state of the art apparatus/instruments for carrying out physico-chemical and biological analysis of environmental parameters. The equipment list is shown below:

EIA REPORT FOR




List of major equipment at Environmental laboratory

Sl. No. Name of the instrument Make/ Model/ Specification

1. High Performance Liquid Chromatograph (HPLC) with UV Detector.

Younglin, South Korea

2. Atomic Absorption Spectro-photometer (AAS) ECIL, India 3. Ion Analyser ORION-960/940 Ion Analyser, USA

4. Gas Chromatograph with FID Model – Trace Ultra,

Make- Thermo Fischer Scientific 5. Portable Spectrophotometer HACH, DR-2000, USA 6. Oil Analyser Wilks-CVH, USA 7. CO Analyser( NDIR Based) Ecotech, Australia

8.

UV – Visible Spectrophotometers Colorimeter

Thermo Fischer Scientific & ECIL, GS – 5701. Systronics – 106 Systronics – 115

9. Digital Mercury Analyser ECIL, MA 5840 10. Flame Photometer AIMIL 11. Turbidity Meter Systronics 12. Conductivity Meter Toshinwal, ModeLO110A 13. pH Meter Lab India

14. BOD Incubator OXI - Top

SICO E. Merck

15. Research Microscope Wild Leitz Germany

EIA REPORT FOR




EIA REPORT FOR




NABET Certificate No. & Issue Date: NABET/EIA/RA022/047 dated 14-10-2014

S. No. Functional Area Code Complete name of Functional Areas

1. AP Air Pollution Prevention, Monitoring & Control

2. WP Water Pollution Prevention, Control & Prediction of Impacts

3. SHW Solid waste & Hazardous Waste Management

4. SE Socio-Economics

5. EB Ecology & Biodiversity

6. HG Hydrology, Ground Water & Water Conservation

7. GEO Geology

8. SC Soil Conservation

9. AQ Meteorology, Air Quality Modelling & Prediction

10. NV Noise/ Vibration

11. LU Land Use

12. RH Risk Assessment & Hazard Management

EIA REPORT FOR




EIA REPORT FOR




11.0 QUESTIONNAIRE FOR ENVIRONMENTAL APPRAISAL

(INDUSTRY SECTOR PROJECTS)

I. General Information A. Name of the Project : Expansion Of Existing Steel

Plant from 1.0 To 2.0 MTPA

1. Existing project/proposed project/ expansion project/modernization project

: Expansion Project

2. If Existing/expansion/ modernization project, whether environmental clearance has been obtained

: EC obtained for existing plant

B. Plant Capacity (TPA) : 2.0 MTPA

C. Location

Village Tehsil District State Barbadi, Bhugaon & Selukata Wardha Wardha Maharashtra

D. Geographical Information

1. Latitude 20°42’37” N

2. Longitude 78°37’32” E

3. Elevation above Mean Sea Level (metres) 270-280 m

4. Total Area envisaged for setting up of

project (in ha.) 105 ha for expansion

out of total 220 ha

5. Nature of terrain (hilly, valley, plains, Coastal plains etc.)

Plain

6. Nature of Soil (sandy, clayey, sandy Loam

etc.) Silty Clay Loam

7. Permeability (cm/sec) NA

EIA REPORT FOR




E. Alternate sites considered

1. No alternative site considered/required to examine as the proposed expansion project is enhancement of existing capacity within the existing Plant premises.

2. -

F. Reasons for selecting the proposed site based on comparative evaluation of environmental considerations : Not Applicable

II. Environmental Setting

A. Current land usage of the proposed project site Area (in hectares).

1. Notified Industrial Area/Estate 105 2. Agricultural Irrigated X Un-irrigated X 3. Homestead X 4. Forest X 5. Grazing X 6. Fallow X 7. Marshy X 8. Mangroves X 9. Others (Pl. specify) X Total 105

B. Please indicate area earmarked for each of the following (in acres.)

1. Plant Facilities(existing + proposed) 259 2. Ash Disposal(existing + proposed) X

3. Storage (Fuel) X

EIA REPORT FOR




4. Storage (Water) X 5. Storage (Hazardous Waste) X 6. Storage (Hazardous Chemicals) X 7. Storage (Others) X 8. Approach Roads X 9. Township X 10. Green Belt X 11. Others (Pl. specify) Total (included in above) 259

C. Is the proposed site located in a low-lying area?

Yes No X

If yes,

1. Level before filling (above MSL, in metres) : NA

2. Level after filling (above MSL in metres) : NA

Quantity of Fill Material required (in cum.) Source NA NA

D. Proximity to sea/water bodies:

Sea Other Water bodies like

River/creek/lake etc. (Please specify)

Distance of site* boundary (in m)

Not applicable River, Dham – 10000

Distance of plant facilities (in m)

Not applicable River Dham - 10000

* From highest flood line/high tide line

EIA REPORT FOR




E. Whether any of the following exist within 7 km. of the periphery of the project site. If so, please indicate aerial distance and the name of the eco-system as given under the Table.

Sn. Name Area falling within

7 km periphery of project (ha.)

Aerial Distance (in km.)

1. National Park / Wildlife Sanctuary

X

2. Tiger Reserve/Elephant Reserve / Turtle Nesting Ground

X

3. Core Zone of Biosphere Reserve

X

4. Habitat for migratory birds X 5. Lakes/Reservoir/Dams X 6. Stream/Rivers Dham River - 10 7. Estuary/Sea X 8. Mangroves X 9. Mountains/Hills X 10. Notified Archaeological sites X 11. Any other Archaeological

sites

X

12. Industries/Thermal Power Plants

UGML plant & UGML power

plant

Beside the expansion

project. 13. Defence Installation X 14. Airports X 15. Railway Lines* Wardha Railway

Station - Approx. 7 km

16. National / State Highways* SH-243 2 km W * 0.5 km from Railway lines/National / State Highway should be maintained.

F. Description of the flora/vegetation within 7 km under following headings.

1. Agricultural crops : Wheat, Pigeon pea, Chickpea

2. Commercial crops : Soyabean, Cotton, Sugarcane & Groundnut

3. Plantation : XX

4. Natural Vegetation/Forest Type : Tropical Wet and Dry type

5. Grass Lands : XX

6. Endangered species : XX

7. Endemic species : XX

EIA REPORT FOR




8. Others (Please Specify) : XX

G. Description of fauna (non-domesticated) within 7 km under following headings.

1. Total listing of faunal elements :

Due to lack of any forest area and biotic interference the only animals found in the study area are few rodents, reptiles and birds. Due to human interference, in general the availability of animals in the study area is low.

2. Endemic fauna species : No

3. Endangered Species : No

4. Migratory species : No

5. Route of migratory species of birds and mammals : XX

6. Details of aquatic fauna (if applicable) : NA III. Meteorological Parameters

A. Seasonal – Monitoring Data (continuous monitoring for one full season

except monsoon should be carried out) – Summer Season March’13 – June’13

1. Temperature (in °C)

(a) Maximum : 47.2 (b) Minimum : 11.8 (c) Mean : 29.5

2. Rain fall (in mm) : Annual rainfall

(a) Maximum : 1598.9 (b) Minimum : 729 (c) Mean : 1055.4

3. Mean value of humidity (in %) : 16 – 34%

4. Inversion occurrence:

(a) In percentage : 31% at 5.30 4% at 17.30

(b) Height in meters : 200 to 1000 m

EIA REPORT FOR




5. Seasonal Wind-rose pattern (16 points on compass scale):

Wind-Rose at Wardha during Summer: Day & Night (Overall)

6. Hourly Mean Meteorological data (based on one full season data

Collected at site required as input for air quality modelling)

Hour Wind Speed (m/s)

Predominant Wind Direction (N as 1800)

Ambient air temp. (K)

Hourly Stability Class

Mixing depth (m)

01 0.36 317 292 6 100 02 0.45 0 292 6 100 03 0.50 270 291 6 201 04 0.50 270 291 6 249 05 0.18 292 290 5 380 06 0.16 292 289 4 412 07 0.45 0 289 3 543 08 0.52 293 288 3 974 09 0.45 0 291 2 996 10 0.45 226 299 1 1037 11 2.36 90 302 2 1068 12 3.81 45 303 1 1099 13 2.78 157 304 1 1154 14 3.71 232 304 1 1162 15 2.52 232 303 2 1162 16 1.22 90 298 3 1162 17 1.10 267 294 4 1162 18 2.50 135 292 5 955 19 2.23 265 292 6 547 20 0.45 267 291 6 439 21 0.36 202 290 6 331 22 0.45 180 290 6 223 23 0.50 180 289 6 215 24 0.45 277 289 6 207 Attach additional sheet as required.

EIA REPORT FOR




IV. Ambient Air Quality Data [Frequency of Monitoring should be as per guidelines of CPCB and monitoring should cover one full season (excluding monsoon)]

A. Season and period for which monitoring has been carried out : March 2013

to June 2013 in summer season

B. Frequency of sampling: Two days in a week, twelve weeks

C. Number of samples collected at each site: 24 samples at each site

Summarised Results of AAQ Monitoring during summer around Wardha Parameters Results (µg/m 3)

Plant Gate (A1)

China Colony

(A2)



Bhugaon Village

(A5)

Kurjhadi Village

(A6)

Salod Village

(A7)


Wardha (Anand

Nagar) (A9) PM -10 Max 70.3 63.8 62.6 63.8 66.3 53.4 62.8 69.2 77.2

Min. 59.8 50.2 40.5 51.8 53.5 44.5 48.8 58.6 58.4 C98 70.1 63.2 59.2 62.6 66.2 52.8 62.4 68.4 76.4 Avg. 65.1 57.0 50.5 59.5 59.9 49.1 56.2 63.3 68.7

PM -2.5 Max 42.6 43.7 22.4 24.6 34.5 21.4 26.4 33.4 38.9 Min. 32.6 36.9 14.6 18.1 26.5 16.5 17.6 24.9 26.5 C98 42.2 42.9 21.9 24.4 32.9 21.2 24.6 31.4 37.4 Avg. 38.3 40.6 18.5 21.5 30.3 18.6 21.4 28.0 32.6

SO2 Max 19.6 16.7 13.1 10.4 17.6 11.8 11.3 13.8 18.6 Min. 15.4 13.2 8.6 7.2 13.6 8.9 8.6 10.2 14.8 C98 19.2 16.3 12.9 10.1 17.2 11.4 11.2 13.6 18.2 Avg. 17.2 15.1 11.3 8.7 15.8 10.1 10.0 12.1 16.6

NOX Max 35.4 26.4 28.0 22.4 33.9 23.3 21.3 30.1 36.9 Min. 18.3 15.9 11.6 10.4 18.4 11.0 10.9 13.4 17.4 C98 30.8 24.3 24.8 20.2 31.6 21.2 21.1 28.3 34.9 Avg. 23.6 19.7 18.7 15.1 24.8 15.9 14.9 19.4 26.4

CO Max 2162 1362 1264 1518 1432 1358 1643 1431 1649 Min. 1352 896 892 627 856 862 762 852 984 C98 1961 1230 1165 1245 1324 1159 1365 1354 1411 Avg. 1696 1087 1071 993 1123 1053 1183 1138 1238

O3 Max 41.0 40.0 43.2 53.2 41.5 42.3 42.8 40.9 41.3 Min. 27.2 27.4 29.7 29.9 28.5 28.2 28.4 26.7 28.0 C98 40.0 37.6 43.1 53.0 41.3 42.1 42.7 40.8 41.2 Avg. 34.1 33.7 36.4 41.5 35.0 35.2 35.6 33.8 34.6

NH3 Max 12.6 11.8 12 11.4 11.2 9.2 10.2 10.8 13.4 Min. 6.5 4.2 3.9 3.4 5.6 1.4 2.6 4.7 6.5 C98 11.6 10.8 11.6 11.0 10.4 8.4 10.5 10.5 12.8 Avg. 8.9 7.7 7.9 6.7 8.2 4.8 6.1 7.2 9.4

Pb Max 0.046 0.032 BDL BDL 0.03 BDL BDL 0.031 0.052 Min. 0.016 0.014 BDL BDL 0.014 BDL BDL 0.014 0.016 C98 0.045 0.031 BDL BDL 0.024 BDL BDL 0.028 0.048 Avg. 0.0 0.0 BDL BDL 0.0 BDL BDL 0.0 0.0

As ng/m 3


EIA REPORT FOR





(A1) China Colony

(A2)



Bhugaon Village

(A5)

Kurjhadi Village

(A6)

Salod Village

(A7)


Wardha (Anand

Nagar) (A9) Ni ng/m 3


BaP Max ND ND ND ND ND ND ND ND ND Min. ND ND ND ND ND ND ND ND ND C98 ND ND ND ND ND ND ND ND ND Avg. ND ND ND ND ND ND ND ND ND

Benzene Max ND ND ND ND ND ND ND ND ND Min. ND ND ND ND ND ND ND ND ND C98 ND ND ND ND ND ND ND ND ND Avg. ND ND ND ND ND ND ND ND ND

BDL = Below detection limit ND = Not Detected

Average AAQ Monitored Values during Summer Season as Compared with CPCB Norms

AAQ Station/ CPCB Standards Ambient Air Quality PM-10 (µg/m3)

PM- 2.5 (µg/m3)

SO2 (µg/m3)

NOX (µg/m3)

CO* (µg/m3)

Plant Gate (A1) 65.1 38.3 17.2 23.6 1696 China Colony(A2) 57.0 40.6 15.1 19.7 1087 Bapukuti Sewagram Area(A3) 50.6 18.5 11.3 18.7 1071 Mandavgarh Village(A4) 59.5 21.5 8.7 15.1 993 Bhugaon Village(A5) 59.9 30.3 15.8 24.8 1123 Kurjhadi Village(A6) 49.1 18.6 10.1 15.9 1053 Salod Village(A7) 56.2 21.4 10.0 14.9 1183 Borgaon Village(A8) 63.3 28.0 12.1 19.4 1138 Wardha (Anand Nagar) (A9) 68.7 32.6 16.6 26.4 1238 Industrial, Residential, Rural and other area (24hr./*1hr.Av)

100 60 80 80 4000

Note: 24/8 hourly values should be met 98% of the time in a year. However 2% of the time it may exceed but not on 2 consecutive days; * 1 Hour

Report on analysis of PAH and Characterisation of RSPM

Sl. No

Parameters China Colony (A2)

Bhugaon Village (A5)


Norms

01 Calcium 1.68 2.94 1.86 NS 02 Magnesium 1.32 1.81 0.87 NS 03 Flouride BDL BDL BDL NS 04 Mercury BDL BDL BDL NS 05 Sulphate 0.41 1.42 0.62 NS 06 Benzo-a-pyrene BDL BDL* BDL* 10 ng/m3

DETECTION LIMIT: F= 10 µg/m3, Hg = 0.02 µg/m3 & Benzo-a-pyrene = 1 ng/m3 All values have units µg/m3 except Benzo-a-pyrene.

EIA REPORT FOR




* Sample analysed for Benzo-a-pyrene using HPLC method as per CPCB. D. Number of samples collected at each site: 24 samples at each site

E. 24 hourly concentrations (in g/m3): As mentioned above

F. Specific air pollution issues in the project area: None

V. Manufacturing Process details

A. Raw materials (including process chemicals, catalysts, & additives).

Sl. No.

Raw material Source Quantity (tpa)

Mode of transport

1 Hot Metal UGML 537,600 Own corridor 2 Pig Iron UGML 50,400 Own corridor 3 Slabs UGML 413,044 Own corridor 4 Ferro alloys Local Market 7971 Road 5 Limestone Jodhpur/ Wardha/ Katni 354,240 Rail/Road 6 Dolomite Mandla / Korpana 93,450 Rail/Road 7 DRI local Market 1,249,293 Rail/Road

8 Scrap

From nearby operating sponge iron units and other market sources located in the Maharashtra and Chhattisgarh

142,348 Rail/Road

9 Zinc Local Market 11,190 Road 10 Carbon Powder Local Market 5,314 Road 11 HR coils UGML 115,959 Own corridor 12 Coke Breeze Local Market 6,648 Road 13 Calcium Carbide Local Market 1,566 Road

Sub Total 2,989,023

B. Brief description of the process : DRI-SCRAP-EAF-CCM – Bar & Rod Mill route

C. Details of process technology know how/collaboration : None

D. Production profile (tonnes/year) : 2000000

Name of Products, By-

products and Intermediate Products

Existing Proposed activity (new/modernization/expansion)

Total

A. Main Products 1.Bar & Rod 2.HR Plates / Colour Coated coils 3. Pipes

Nil

1000000

New

Expansion

New

500000 1250000

250000

B. By-Products

EIA REPORT FOR




Name of Products, By- products and Intermediate

Products

Existing Proposed activity (new/modernization/expansion)

Total

1. 2.

X X X

C. Intermediate Products 1. 2.

X

X

X

E. Means of transportation of raw material and final products

Means of Transport Raw material (in TPA)

Final Product (in TPA)

1. Road 148648 2000000

2. Rail 1839331 -

3. Pipeline - -

4. Others, Please specify Own corridor 1001044 -

VI. Water

A. Water Requirement (cum/day) : 13920 m3/day

B. Source of Raw Water Supply

C. Lean Season flow in case of surface water source (cusecs/cumecs):

D. Groundwater (a) Recharge Rate/Withdrawal rate : Not

applicable

1. Ground water level (metres)

(i) Pre-monsoon NA

(ii) Post-monsoon NA

(to be obtained from Central/State Ground water authorities)

EIA REPORT FOR




E. Competing Users of the Water Source:

S. No.

Usage Present Consumption

(cu.m/day)

Addition Proposed as per

local plan

Total

Surface Ground Surface Ground Surface Ground 1. Irrigation UVSL is having a permission for drawl of 3.65 MGD of water

from Dham river, for the existing plant. After consumption of around 2.75 MGD, balance will be utilised for the proposed plant. UVSL will obtain fresh approval for any further additional requirement of water for the proposed facilities from the concerned authorities.

2. Industry 3. Drinking 4. Others

(Please specify)

Total

F. Physico-chemical analysis of Raw Water at intake point :

Sn. Parameters Units River Dham 1. pH Value - 8.1 2. Dissolved oxygen (as O2), min mg/l 6.0 3. BOD, 3 days at 27°C, max mg/l BDL 4. Total coliform organism, max MPN/100 ml, >1100 5. Free ammonia (as N), max mg/l, nil 6. Electrical conductivity, max µmhos/cm, 339 7. Sodium absorption ratio, max. 0.65 8. Boron (as B), max. mg/l, BDL

G. Physico-chemical analysis of treated water to be used in project/township.

Sn. Parameters Standards Results

ETP Inlet Outlet

01 TSS (mg/l) 100 131.8 77.6 02 pH 6.5-8.5 4.6 8.3 03 Oil & Grease

(mg/l) 10 Not detected Not detected

04 COD (mg/l) 250 146.7 110.17 05 BOD (mg/l) 30 46.67 27.8

H. Waste Water Management: NA. No waste water discharge is expected as

zero water discharge concept is envisaged.

1. Description of waste water treatment plan with flow chart: NA

2. Characteristics of discharge stream(s) before and after treatment: No discharges are expected from the proposed plant in normal circumstances.

EIA REPORT FOR




3. Daily discharge (m3/day) from different sources:

(a) Plant operation 3600

(b) Workshop -

(c) D.M. Plant effluent -

(d) Domestic -

(e) Other (specify) -

Total 3600 Waste water will be treated and treated water will be used for greenbelt development & dust suppression.

4. Quantity of water recycled:

(a) (in %) 3.6

(b) (in cum/day) 504

5. Details of recycling mechanism: Reused in plant as process water

and cooling water.

6. Mode of final discharge/disposal of treated effluent: NA

Mode Length (in m.)

Quantity (in m3/day)

(i) Open Channel X X (ii) Pipeline X X (iii) Others (Please specify) X X Total X

EIA REPORT FOR




7. Point of final discharge: NA

Final Point Quantity discharged (in m3/day)

(i) Green belt within the plant/township X (ii) Agricultural land X (iii) Fallow Land X (iv) Forest Land X (v) River/Stream X (vi) Lake X (vii) Estuary X (viii) Sea X

Total X

8. Lean season flow rate in case of discharge in a river/stream (cusecs): NA, as there is no measurable discharge into any water body.

9. Downstream users of water (in case of river, reservoir, lake (cusecs): NA

(a) Human

(b) Irrigation

(c) Industry

(d) Other (Pl. specify)

10. Analysis of river water 100 metres upstream of discharge point and 100 metres downstream of discharge point (except in rainy/monsoon season) along with details of aquatic life. NA, as there will be no discharge in any water body from the proposed plant.

11. What is the predicted impact on water quality of the receiving body due to discharge? (Briefly state the prediction tool adopted): NA as there is no discharge from the plant units.

EIA REPORT FOR




VII. Solid Waste Management 1. Details: NA

S.N Source Qty (TPM) Form (Sludge/Dry/Slurry etc.)

Composition

1 Raw water treatment plant X X X 2 ETP X X X 3 Process X X X 4 Spent Catalyst X X X 5 Oily Sludge X X X 6 Others (Pl. Specify) X X X 7 SMS Slag 94 tpd 8 Flue Dust from SMS 11 tpd 9 Mill scale 4.31 tpd

A. If waste(s) contain any hazardous/toxic substance/radioactive materials or

heavy metals, provide data and proposed precautionary measures.

Waste oil – 380 kg/d ETP sludge – 825 kg/d Zinc dross – 6.343 tpd Will be disposed off as per CPCB guideline

B. What are the possibilities of recovery and recycling of wastes? Will be disposed off as per CPCB guideline

C. Possible users of Solid Waste (s).

D. Method of disposal of solid waste (s): NA

Method Qty(TPM)

1. Landfill X

2. Incineration X

3. Recovery X

4. Downstream users X

EIA REPORT FOR




E. In case of landfill: NA

1. Is solid waste amenable for Landfill YES NO

2. Dimensions of landfill

3. Life of landfill

4. Proposed precautionary and mitigative measures along with design features

F. In case of incineration: NA

1. Details of incinerator

(i) Type

(ii) Size

(iii) Capacity

(iv) Fuel

2. Likely composition and quantum of emissions

S.No. Composition Quantity (in cu.m/hr) x X x

VIII. Noise Pollution Control and Management

(a) Source Fans, steam vents, feed water pumps, high pressure steam pipelines

(b) Level at Source (dB) <85 dB(A)

(c) Level at project boundary Capacity (dB)

60-70 dB(A)

(d) Abatement measures (give source-wise details)

Vibration isolators, noise absorbing enclosures, silencers, ventilated control pulpits.

EIA REPORT FOR




IX. Fuel/Energy Requirements A. Total Power Requirement (MW): Total Power requirement of the proposed

plant is 78 MW. Project Township Other (pl.specify) Total Present (in existing) 73 MW X X 73 MW Proposed 78 MW Included -- 78 MW Total 151M

W Included -- 151MW

B. Source of Power (MW): Power will be sourced from Maharastra State

Electricity Board

SEB/Grid Captive power plant DG Sets Present 73 MW - - Proposed 78 MW - Total 151 MW - -

C. Details of Fuel used

S.N. Fuel Daily Consumption (TPD) Calorific value

(Kcals/kg)

% Ash

% Sulphur Existing Proposed 1

2

3

4

5

6

7

Gas

Naphtha HSD Fuel Oil Coal Lignite Other (Pl. specify)

Mixed gas

Furnace Oil

LDO

LPG

- - - - - -

- - - - - -

890

83

23

54

- - - - - -

1900

10000

10000

11900

- - - - - - - - - -

- - - - - - -

3.5-4 %

1.8% -

EIA REPORT FOR




D. Source of Fuel (Distance in km)

1. Port X

2. Mine X

3. Refinery X

4. Storage depot/Terminal NA

E. Mode of Transportation of fuel to site

1. Trucks (numbers/day) 12

2. Pipeline (length in km.) NA

3. Railway Wagons (numbers/day) NA

X. Atmospheric Emissions

A. Flue gas characteristics (SPM, SO2, NOx, CO)

S. No. Pollutant Source of Emission Emission rate

(kg/hr) Concentration in flue gas (mg/m3)

1 PM EAF

50 50.0 2 SO2 32.4 32.4 3 NOx 40 40 1 PM

EAF 50 50.0

2 SO2 32.4 32.4 3 NOx 40 40 1 PM

Lime Plant 1 3.5 50.0

2 SO2 2.8 40 3 NOx 2.8 40 1 PM

Lime Plant 2 3.5 50.0

2 SO2 2.8 40 3 NOx 2.8 40 1 PM Dolo Plant 1.5 50.0

EIA REPORT FOR




S. No. Pollutant Source of Emission Emission rate (kg/hr)

Concentration in flue gas (mg/m3)

2 SO2 1.2 40 3 NOx 1.2 40 1 PM

Bar & Rod Mill 3 50

2 SO2 244. 4080 3 NOx 3 50

B. Size distribution of SPM at the top of the stack: NA

S. No.

Range

% by weight

1

Micron

2

1-10 Micron

3

10-20 Micron

4

<20 Micron

C. Stack emission Details (All the stacks attached to process units, Boilers,

captive power plant, D.G. Sets, Incinerator both for existing and proposed activity).

Plant Section & units* Stack No.

Height of the

Chimney

Internal dia. at

top (m)

actual vol.

(m 3/hr)

exit velocity

(m/s) Temp.

°K Emission , Kg/h

PM

SO2

Nox

EAF Ist 50 5 1117450 16 333 50 32.4 40 EAF 2nd 50 5 1117450 16 333 50 32.4 40 Lime plant Stack-1 3rd 50 1.2 78221 19 333 3.5 2.8 2.8 Lime plant Stack-2 4th 50 1.2 78221 19 333 3.5 2.8 2.8 Dolomite plant Stack-1 5th 50 1 33523 12 333 1.5 1.2 1.2 Bar & Rod Mill 6th 75 2.5 89195 5 443 3 244.8 3 HSM Reheating Furnace 7th 80 4 388544 8.5 418 6.8 9.7 14

*Note: Please indicate the specific section to which the stack is attached. For e.g.: Process section, D.G. Set, Boiler, Power Plant, incinerator etc. Emission rate (kg/hr.) for each pollutant (SPM, SO2, NOx etc. should be specified.

D. Details of fugitive emissions (Indicate the points of fugitive emissions and

quantities estimated): NA

EIA REPORT FOR




E. Predicted impact on air quality (as per CPCB Guidelines for conducting the air quality modelling)

PM10 Station Monitored stations Back ground

Concentration Predicted Emission

from Source Predicted max GLC

A1 Plant Gate 70.3 1.00 71.30 A2 China Colony 63.8 0.45 64.25 A3 Bapukuti Sewagram Area 62.6 0.62 63.22 A4 Mandavgarh Village 63.8 0.33 64.13 A5 Bhugaon Village 66.3 2.54 68.84 A6 Kurjhadi Village 53.4 0.21 53.61 A7 Salod Village 62.8 0.74 63.54 A8 Borgaon Village 69.2 0.22 69.42 A9 Wardha (Anand Nagar) 77.2 0.22 77.42

Maximum 77.2 3.12 80.32 Note : Concentrations are in μg/m3 and of 24 hours averaging time.

SO2 Station Monitored stations Back ground



A1 Plant Gate 19.6 2.09 21.69 A2 China Colony 16.7 0.79 17.49 A3 Bapukuti Sewagram Area 13.1 2.03 15.13 A4 Mandavgarh Village 10.4 2.02 12.42 A5 Bhugaon Village 17.6 11.77 29.37 A6 Kurjhadi Village 11.8 0.75 12.55 A7 Salod Village 11.3 2.29 13.59 A8 Borgaon Village 13.8 0.36 14.16 A9 Wardha (Anand Nagar) 18.6 0.58 19.18


NOX Station Monitored stations Back ground



A1 Plant Gate 35.4 0.88 36.28 A2 China Colony 26.4 0.36 26.76 A3 Bapukuti Sewagram Area 28 0.55 28.55 A4 Mandavgarh Village 22.4 0.27 22.67 A5 Bhugaon Village 33.9 2.16 36.06 A6 Kurjhadi Village 23.3 0.18 23.48 A7 Salod Village 21.3 0.65 21.95 A8 Borgaon Village 30.1 0.18 30.28 A9 Wardha (Anand Nagar) 36.9 0.19 37.09


EIA REPORT FOR




Predicted maximum ground level concentrations

Sl. No.

Description Pollutants* PM10 SO2 NOx

1 Predicted maximum ground level concentrations 3.12 16.97 2.60 2 Present monitored maximum background

concentrations 77.20 19.60 36.90

3 Total maximum concentrations (1+2) 80.32 36.57 39.50 *Concentrations are in μg/m3 and of 24 hours averaging time

XI. Pollution load statement (Applicable to Expansion and Modernization

Projects only)

Parameter Existing Plant

Proposed Expansion/M oderniza tion

Total Remarks

1. Land area (ha)

2. Raw water (m3/day)

3. Power (MW)

4. Waste water (effluent generation) (m3/day)

a. Process b. Domestic

5. Air emissions (gms/hr.)

a. PM10 b. CO c. SO2 d. NOx e. Others (like HC, Cl2, NH3 etc.)

6. Hazardous Chemical Storage (give

item-wise)

7. Solid waste (TPD)

a. Non-Hazardous b. Hazardous

115

12480

73

1213

788 425

105

13920

78

3600

118332 X

326088 103968

F.O. – 1000 KL LDO – 250 KL LPG – 750 MT

SMS slag – 94 Flue dust – 11 Mill scale – 4.3

Used Waste oil – 0.38 ETP sludge – 0.825

Zinc dross – 6.34

220

26400

151

4813 X

Used for dust suppression &

Green Belt Development

X

10 days storage 10 days storage 15 days storage

EIA REPORT FOR




XII. Storage of chemicals (inflammable/explosive/hazardous/toxic substances)

S. No.

Name Number of

Storages

Capacity (TPD)

Physical and Chemical

Composition

Consumption (in TPD)

Maximum Quantity of

storage at any point of time

Source of Supply*

Means of transportati

on*

1. Furnace Oil

2 500 MSDS enclosed.

84 1000 t IOCL By Road

2. LDO 1 250 MSDS enclosed.

23 250 t IOCL/ Goverdhan

energy

By Road

3. LPG 3 250 MSDS enclosed.

44 750 t IOCL By Road

XIII. Occupational Health and Industrial Hygiene

A. What are the major occupational health and safety hazards anticipated?

(Explain briefly).

The major occupational health hazard expected is due to inhalation of dust (pneumoconiosis). However, no case pertaining to pneumoconiosis has been detected yet.

B. What provisions have been made/propose to be made to conform to

health/safety requirements? (Explain briefly).

Presently at UVSL routine medical examination of personnel is being carried out in a systematic programme at plant medical unit. The same procedure will be followed for personnel working for expansion project. A systematic programme for medical check- up at regular intervals shall be followed for all workers to ascertain any changes in health condition due to the working conditions.

C. Details of personal protective equipment provided/to be provided to the

workers.

Ear Muffs, dust masks etc. are provided.

D. Details of proposed measures for control of fugitive emission/odour nuisance from different sources. UVSL shall engineer and install adequately sized facility and shall use documented procedures for the control of fugitive dust emissions associated with material handling and storage operations which include enclosure and/or hooding with emission controls, where appropriate, of those operations that are potential sources of fugitive emission and operating practices that minimize fugitive emissions from operations that are not amenable to enclosure or hooding.

EIA REPORT FOR




E. Details of fire protection and safety measures envisaged to take care of fire and explosion hazards.

Keeping in view the nature of fire and vulnerability of the equipment and the premises, the following fire protection facilities have been proposed for the plant. Portable Fire Extinguishers All plant units, office buildings, stores, laboratories, MCCs etc. will be provided with adequate number of portable fire extinguishers. The distribution and selection of extinguishers will be done as per IS:2190. Hydrant System Hydrants will be provided at suitable locations and in different levels inside the plant buildings. Yard hydrants will be provided in the vicinity to meet the additional requirement of water to extinguish fire. Sprinkler system for LPG, MRSS, Oil cellars also have been provided. Automatic Fire Detection System Unattended vulnerable premises like electrical control rooms, cable tunnels, MCC, oil cellars, etc. will be provided with automatic fire detection and alarm systems. Manual Call Point Systems All major units and welfare/administrative building will be provided with manual call points for summoning the fire fighting crew from the fire station for necessary assistance. Fire Station

The Fire station will be centrally located with adequate communication facilities and trained man power. There will be one central fire station with fire tenders to extend the necessary assistance required for fighting fire in any of the plant units and associate premises. The following equipment will be provided in fire station/fire posts. - Water tender - Foam tender - Portable pump - Wireless set - Hoses

EIA REPORT FOR




XIV. Pollution Control Aspects A. Details of Pollution Control Systems :

S. No

Existing Proposed to be installed

i) Air ACGC, Air Recuperator, scrubber

Bag filters, cyclone, chimney etc

ii) Water ETP, STP

Zero water discharge concept is envisaged so all effluent shall be reused in the plant itself

iii) Noise All high noise areas Acoustic insulation Ventilated control pulpits

will be provided Fans Vibration isolators Vibration isolators Steam vents Silencers Silencers Along Plant

boundary and various shops, office buildings etc.

Green belt across the plant boundaries and provision of ear muff

Green belt shall be developed

iv) Solid Waste Used oil/ waste oil

(Category 5.1) sell to registered recyclers approved by CPCB & MSPCB

Reused and balance sold to registered recyclers approved by CPCB & MSPCB

ETP Sludge Dispose off to CHWTSDF (Common Hazardous waste treatment and safe disposal facility ) Butibori , Nagpur

Will be sold to registered recyclers.

Zinc Dross NA

B. Efficiency of each pollution control equipment/system installed.

1. Existing Units :

S. No.

Name of the System Equipment

Design Efficiency %

Present Working efficiency %

1. ACGC system 99 % 99 % 2. Ventury Scrubbers 99 % 98 %

EIA REPORT FOR




2. Proposed Project :

Sl. No.

Name of the System Equipment Design Efficiency %

1 Bag Filter 99 2 Multiclone 95

XV. Green Belt Plan

(a) Total area of project/township (in ha.) 220

(b) Area already afforested (for existing projects), in ha.

(c) Area proposed to be afforested (in ha.)

(d) Plant species proposed

1. Indigenous Indigenous

2. Exotic Nil

(e) Width of green belt (minimum, in m.)

1. Along plant boundary 10 m

2. Roads and avenues within the plant 2 rows along

the road

3. Ash Dike X

4. Township X

5. Other-ornamental, garden spaces,

6. Commercial plantations etc. Nos.

EIA REPORT FOR




(f) Trees planted & proposed

1. Planted 56000

2. Survival rate 92% 3. List of species planted:

Scientific Name Common Name Pithecolobium dulce Jungle Jalabee Zizyphus sp. Ghontol / Barkoli Pongamia pinnata Karanj Murraya exotica Kamayani Gmeline arborea Gamhari Acacia arabica Babool Thevieta peruviana Yellow Kaneer Nerium sp Pink Kaner Bougainvillea spp. Bougainvellea Duranta sp. Duranta Cassia auriculata Cassia

The sensitive varieties like Gulmohar, Amaltas, Kachnar, Kadamb should not be planted in the works area. The plants in the plant works area should be periodically washed with water spray, especially during dry and dusty seasons.

Areas Around Waste Dumps and along Plant Boundary

Location Width (m) Outer curtain belt (pollution attenuation) 30 Middle belt (pollution attenuation) 50 Inner belt (pollution attenuation and training of winds to middle & outer belt)

20

However, the above-mentioned thickness of each belt may be proportionately reduced or increased in view of the total space available for plantation work. The list of plants to be used in each belt is given in the following paragraphs. In the curtain belt the following species of trees be planted keeping a space of 2.5m from plant to plant as well as from row to row:

EIA REPORT FOR




Scientific Name Common Name Pongamia pinnata Karanj Dalbergia sissoo Shisham Azadirachta indica Neem Albizzia lebbek Siris Pithecolobium dulce Junglee jilebi Polyalthia longifolia Druping Ashok Syzygium cuminii Jamun Tectona grandis Teak Leucaena leucocephala Subabool Butea spp. Palas

In the middle belt the following species of trees to be planted 3 m apart, from tree to tree as well as from row to row:

Scientific Name Common Name Cassia siamea Cassia Lagerstroemia parviflora Lagerstroemia Azadirachta indica Neem Tamarindus indica Imli Ficus bengalensis Bargad Ficus religiosa Peepal Pongamia pinnata Karanj

In the inner belt the following species of trees and shrubs to be planted 2.0 m apart from tree to tree as well as from row to row:

Scientific Name Common Name Nerium sp Kaneer Zizyphus spp Ber Murriya exocitica Kamayani Acacia arabica Babool Gmeline arborea Gamhari Bougainvillia spectabilis Baganvileas

Vacant Areas in Plant

Plantation in vacant areas will be selected from among the following species. Plantation will be done in staggered trench manner 3.0 apart.

Scientific Name Common Name Artocarpus heterophyllus Kathal Azadirachta indica Neem Pongamia pinnata Karanj Ficus bengalensis Bargad

EIA REPORT FOR




Scientific Name Common Name Ficus religiosa Peepal Mangifera indica Mango Lagerstroemia parviflora Lagerstroemia Syzygium cuminii Jamun Tectona grandis Teak Gmeline arborea Gamhari

Plantation around Office Buildings, Stores, Garage etc. The species recommended for plantation around various buildings will include:

Scientific Name Common Name Azadirachta indica Neem Ficus bengalensis Bargad Lagerstroemia parviflora Lagerstroemia Dalbergia sisso Sisham Ficus religiosa` Peepal Mangifera indica Mango Polyalthia longifolia Ashok Delonix regia Gul mohar Cassia javanica Java-ki-rani Thevieta peruviana Yellow Kaneer Nerium sp Pink Kaner Bougainvillea spp. Bougainvellea Duranta sp. Duranta Cassia auriculata Cassia Cassia fistula Bhaya Cassia siamea Cassia

The species, which may be planted along the side of roads, include:

Scientific Name Common Name Azadirachta indica Neem Ficus bengalensis Bargad Ficus religiosa` Peepal Polyalthia longifolia Ashok Tectona grandis Teak Delonix regia Gul mohar Cassia javanica Java-ki-rani Lagerstroemia parviflora Lagerstroemia Cassia fistula Amaltas Cassia siamea Cassia

EIA REPORT FOR




Avenue Plantation Double rows of avenue trees on the outer side of the footpaths are recommended; an outer row of shade trees and an inner row of ornamental flowering trees will be planted.

(a) Foliage Trees for Outer Avenue:

Scientific Name Common Name Syzigium cumnii Jamun Azadirachta indica Neem Tamarindus indica Imli Tectona grandis Teak Dalbergia sisso Sisham

(b) Flowering / Ornamental Trees for Inner Avenue:

Scientific Name Common Name Delonix regia Gul mohar Cassia javanica Java-ki-rani Lagerstroemia parviflora Lagerstroemia Polyalthia longifolia Ashok Anthocephalus cadamba Kadamb Thevieta peruviana Yellow Kaneer Nerium sp Pink Kaner Bougainvillea spp. Bougainvellea Duranta sp. Duranta Cassia auriculata Cassia Cassia fistula Bhaya Cassia siamea Cassia

4. Proposed 5. List of species Refer above

XVI. Construction Phase Management Aspects

(A) Estimated duration of construction in months 24

(B) Number of persons to be employed for construction 225

1. Peak 300

EIA REPORT FOR




2. Average

(C) What provision has been made for the sewage treatment for the construction workers? The construction activity shall be confined to the existing plant area which already has all modern facilities and will be provided with sewage treatment plant.

(D) How the fuel (kerosene/wood, etc.) requirement of labour force will be met to avoid cutting of trees from the adjoining areas:

The area near the site is already developed. All fuel requirement of the labour force shall be met from nearby local market.

(E) Proposed Health care Measures with emphasis on protection from

endemic diseases.

The UVSL plant complex is already having Medical facilities along with ambulance with qualified Doctors and para-medical staff. Assistance will be taken as and when required.

(F) Educational and other social welfare measures proposed

Provision of drinking water facilities in surrounding villages Bus Stop/rest shelter for villagers Annual Eye camps are being organized. Drinking water facilities with overhead tanks at each peripheral villages An school for children of surrounding villages upto XIIth standard

XVII. Human Settlement

Item Unit Wardha

Area Sq. km 6309 Population

Male Female

Rural

Urban

No 1236736 638990 597746

911695 325041

Distribution of population Male

Female Rural

Urban

% of total population 51.7 48.3 73.7 26.3

Literates No 865556 Illiterates No 371180 Literacy Rate % 80

EIA REPORT FOR




Item Unit Wardha Sex Ratio No 935 Workers

Total workers Main workers

Marginal workers Non-workers

No 550351 431330 119021 686385

Distribution of Workers

Main workers Marginal workers

Non-workers

% of total workers

35 10 55

XVIII . Rehabilitation & Resettlement Plan (Wherever applicable)

A. Village(s) affected by the project: NA

S. No.

Village (Tribal/Others)

Population Occupation Average Income per annum

B. Population to be displaced: NA

S. No

Name of Village Population Land oustees

only Homestead

oustees only Land and

Homestead oustees

C. Salient features of Rehabilitation Plan: NA

(i) Site where the people are proposed to be resettled (ii) Facilities proposed at the resettlement site (iii) Compensation package (iv) Agency/Authority responsible for their resettlement.

XIX. Expenditure on Environmental Measures

A. Capital cost of the project (as proposed to approved by the funding

agency/financial Institutions

(Rs. Lakhs) 332590

EIA REPORT FOR




B. Cost of environmental protection measures (Rs. Lakhs)

S. No.

Recurring Cost per annum

Capital Cost

1 Air Pollution Control 4000 11500 2 Water Pollution Control 1000 2200 3 Noise Pollution Control Included in item no. 1 Included in item no. 1 4 Environment Monitoring

and Management 25 525

5 Reclamation borrow/mined area

- -

6 Occupational Health Included in item no. 4 Included in item no. 4 7 Green Belt 10 175 8 Others ( Pl. Specify) 3000 6600

Total (included) 8035 21000

C. Details of organizational set up/cell for environmental management and monitoring:

Organization Chart – Environmental Management Division

D. Details of community welfare/peripheral development programmes envisaged/being undertaken by the project proponent: Refer Serial No. XVI-F already stated above.

EIA REPORT FOR




XX. Public Hearing details: Public Hearing completed on 24.06.2015 and details given in Chapter -12

(A) Date of Advertisement:

(B) Newspapers in which the advertisement appeared

(with copies)

(C) Date of Hearing

(D) Panel Present

(E) List of public present along with address and occupation

(F) Summary/details of public hearing report

S. No.

Issues raised

Recommendation of panel

Response of Project Proponents

1

2

3

The data and information given in this Performa are true to the best of my knowledge and belief

Date:

Rajiv Munjal Whole Time Director

Signature of the Applicant with full name & address.

Place:

Given under the seal of organisation on behalf of whom the applicant is signing

EIA REPORT FOR




12.0 COMMENTS OF THE PROJECT PROPONENT ON THE VARIOUS CONCERNS RAISED IN THE PUBLIC CONSULTATION PROCESS

The public hearing of the proposed expansion of steel plant from 1.0 MTPA to 2.0 MTPA at Village - Barbadi, Bhugaon & Selukate, Bhugaon Link Road, Wardha , Maharashtra was held on 24.06.2015 at Krida Sankul Ground, In front of Police Head Quarter, Near Dr. Babasaheb Ambedkar Statue, Sewagram Road, Wardha. The proceedings of the environmental public hearing are attached at the end of the chapter.

In this public hearing total of thirty three (33) numbers of representations / memorandum / suggestions / views were received in covering six (6) areas of issues as specified below. Majority of the public in PH i.e. more than 2/3rd have expressed their support for expansion project. Summary of areas of issues raised / suggestions given by the public in general and comments /action plan of the project proponent i.e. UVSL for addressing these issues are given below:

Areas of issues Nos. Comments / Action Plan 1 Water Drawl

Water drawl from Wana / Vena River at Hinganghat

9 The water requirement of M/s. UVSL has been fulfilled from Dham River near Wardha.

No water is drawn from Wana / Vena River at Hinganghat for this project. Company has clarified that public has wrongly misconceived that water will be drawn from Wana / Vena river at Hinganghat for this project.

2 Infrastructure Development Further development of infrastructure in terms of Roads in the villages, Drinking water, Schools premises and recreation.

1 The infrastructure in the villages around the Uttam Steel Complex is being continuously improved. Work has already commenced to up-grade the roads and school infrastructure in the surrounding villages. Till date 1624 meters of cement roads have been constructed and 20 solar lamps have also been installed at conspicuous places in the villages.

Ground water samples taken from 8 different locations in surrounding villages were tested and compared with drinking water quality standards specified in IS:10500 (2012) and observed to be well within the permissible limits.

Improved infrastructure by undertaking repair / replenishment of school building’s roofs, boundary walls, entrance gates, playground etc. and by providing ceiling fans in the classrooms of schools. And one dozen molded chairs.

EIA REPORT FOR




Areas of issues Nos. Comments / Action Plan

Every year meritorious students from the S.S.C. to college level are being given rewards / incentives for their studies by the company. Till date Company has distributed 9 Laptops, 60 Mobile Telephones, 50 Bicycles, 1,800 Schoolbags and 11,100 notebooks to students in surrounding villages.

These efforts will be continued and further reinforced.

3 Employment opportunities More employment to qualified and skilled local youth

8 The Company is committed to give more employment opportunities to local youths directly or indirectly and this will be continued. As on date around 85% employees are local.

As suggested in the PH, company will make efforts for development of required skillsets for the industry through local Technical / Engineering institutions.

Company has distributed 40 sewing machines with accessories to the widows to make them self-reliant for earning their livelihood.

4 Health care & medical facilities More medical check-up to local villagers

1 Medical camps / health check-ups are being periodically organized for the local people through the qualified medical practitioners / specialists. Necessary medicines and medical aids have been provided in these camps free of cost.

Eye camps were also held in which 1305 patients have been checked and 1025 Spectacles have been distributed to the needy patients free of cost.

Blood donation camps were also organized from time to time.

As the response of the villagers is overwhelming company plans to hold such camps more frequently in future.

Company shall send deserving patients for further treatment to main hospitals for treating certain diseases for which treatment is not available locally.

EIA REPORT FOR




Areas of issues Nos. Comments / Action Plan

5 Environmental pollution Water pollution from the

industry 7 Water is used in the industry for processing,

cooling, gardening and sprinkling. The above operations do not pollute the water. The company has embarked upon 100% utilisation of water by its recycle in the process / reuse for gardening and sprinkling after treatment for conserving the precious water resources and control the cost also. This has been confirmed in the ground water survey undertaken in and around various locations of the plant premises.

Reduction of agriculture yields

1 In the case of adjoining unit of M/s. Uttam Galva Metallics Ltd., based on the assurance given in the Legislative Assembly by the Honourable Minister for Environment a Study group comprising MPCB officials, EE (MIDC), Principal Scientist & Head of Air Pollution Department of NEERI, Village Sarpanch, Representative of Human Rights Sangh & Bapu Kuti was constituted to find out the facts. The Study group visited the plant and surrounding areas for personal inspection and interaction with the people and also called for report from the District Agricultural Officer, Wardha who has confirmed that due to the existing plant there has been no adverse effect on the crop as well as there is no reduction in the yield of main crop in the region. In light of the above it is established that this concern is not based on facts and as such company envisage that there will not be reduction in the yield even after expansion takes place.

Due to Air & Water pollution people in the surrounding villages are suffering from disease

6 In the case of adjoining unit of M/s. Uttam Galva Metallics Ltd., based on the assurance given in the Legislative Assembly by the Honourable Minister for Environment a Study group comprising MPCB officials, EE (MIDC), Principal Scientist & Head of Air Pollution Department of NEERI, Village Sarpanch, Representative of Human Rights Sangh & Bapu Kuti was constituted to find out the facts. The Study group visited the plant and surrounding area for personal inspection and interaction with the

EIA REPORT FOR




Areas of issues Nos. Comments / Action Plan people and also called for report from the District Health Officer, Wardha who has confirmed that due to the existing plant people from the villages are not suffering from any specific diseases and there has been no adverse effect on their health.

In light of the above it is established that this concern is not based on facts and as such company envisage that there will not be any adverse effect on health of the people residing in vicinity of plant.

Effect of Fly ash 1 Company is not generating any power and therefore fly ash is not generated. The concern is not based on facts.

6 Greenery & Tree Plantation Tree plantation in nearby villages and contribution to Wardha City

3 Company has extensively covered all areas under its precincts and control for development as green belt by planting trees. The company has planted 1,92,600 trees till date.

Company is also distributing tree saplings in the surrounding villages with Tree guards. All the schools are involved in this movement. We will continue our efforts of planting trees in coming years too as an ongoing activity.

Company has undertaken beautification of Mahavir garden located in heart of Wardha city and also installed CCTV at 5 locations in Wardha city for improving traffic regulation and prevention of crimes.